manualshive.com logo in svg

Toshiba e-STUDIO 4500c, Service Manual

The Toshiba e-STUDIO 4500c User Manual is available for free download at manualshive.com. This comprehensive manual equips users with in-depth instructions and troubleshooting guidance for effectively operating the e-STUDIO 4500c multifunction printer. Get the most out of this versatile device with the help of this convenient manual.

Share
Download
background image

PM COUNTER 

August, 2006 

2-4 

 

Number button submenu 

Press any number button to open the submenu for a part. In the example below, 
the number button [001] #K:PCU was pressed. 

 

 

[A]:  Clear current counter. Press to reset the selected PM counter (in this 

example 001 #K:PCU) to "0". You can also clear the settings by pressing the 
[Clear] button on the right side of the PM Counter Main Menu ([F] on the 
previous page). 

[B]:  Change target yield. Press the change the target PM yield. To change the 

setting: 

•

  Press [Change target yield] 

•

  Enter the number for the new target with the 10-key pad. 

•

  Press [#] on the operation panel. 

[C]:  PM yield indicator settings. [Yes] is the default. Press [No] to remove the 

current item from the "Parts list for PM yield indicator".  

•

 When set to "Yes", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) will not have 

their individual items displayed automatically in the "Parts list for PM yield 
indicator list".  

•

 When set to "No", items marked with the # mark (# = a unit) only the 

individual components will appear in the list (the units will not appear). 

[D]:  PM counter history. This is a summary of the most recent counts 

•

  Latest 1. The latest PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced. 

•

  Latest 2. The previous PM count since the unit (or part) was replaced. 

•

  Latest 3. The previous but one PM count since the unit (or part) was 

replaced. 

 

 

 

 

B132P904.BMP 

[A] 

[B] 

[C] 

[D] 

Summary of Contents for e-STUDIO 4500c

Page 1: ...SERVICE MANUAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS e STUDIO4500c 5500c File No SME060023C0 R060621C2200 TTEC Ver03_2007 04 ...

Page 2: ...istered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U S and or other coun tries Apple AppleTalk Macintosh and Mac are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc in the U S and other countries PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated NOVELL NetWare and NDS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Novell Inc Ricoh Corporation or other company names and product names in this manual are the trad...

Page 3: ...UTION Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries Important Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds damage to originals loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine IMPORTANT ALWAYS OBEY THESE GUIDELINES TO AVOID SERIOUS PROBLEMS SUCH AS MISFEEDS DAMAGE TO ORIGINALS LOSS OF VALUABLE DATA AND TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE MACHINE BOLD IS ADDED...

Page 4: ...Z Fold This refers to the Z Folding unit The copier does not support this peripheral device at this time Please ignore references to Z Fold in the SP tables QL Quenching Lamp ITB Image Transfer Belt PTR Paper Transfer Roller PCU Photoconductor Unit IDU Image Discrimination Unit SBU Sensor Board Unit NIB Network Interface Board STC Soft Toner Cartridge TD Toner Density ADS Auto image Density Select...

Page 5: ...d notations are used WARNING A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation Failure to obey a Warning could result in death or serious injury CAUTION A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation Failure to obey a Caution could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property Switches and Symbols Where symbols are used on or near switches on machines for...

Page 6: ...nance shall be done using the special tools and procedures prescribed for maintenance of the machine described in the reference materials service manuals technical bulletins operating instructions and safety guidelines for service engineers In regard to other safety issues not described in this document all service engineers shall strictly obey procedures and recommendations described the CE Safet...

Page 7: ...n transporting the copier 5 The copier is quite heavy and weighs approximately 298 kg 655 6 lb therefore pay full attention when handling it 6 When transporting installing the equipment employ four persons 2 2 2 POWER Warning 1 Always disconnect the power plug before doing any maintenance procedure After switching off the machine power is still supplied to the main machine and other devices To pre...

Page 8: ...n the parts are disassembled reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise noted in this manual or other related documents Be careful not to install small parts such as screws washers pins E rings star washers in the wrong places 4 Basically the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled 5 Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation w...

Page 9: ...o treat the touch panel gently and never hit it Breaking the surface could cause malfunctions 2 3 2 SAFETY DEVICES WARNING 1 Never remove any safety device unless it requires replacement Always replace safety devices immediately 2 Never do any procedure that defeats the function of any safety device Modification or removal of a safety device fuse switch etc could lead to a fire and personal injury...

Page 10: ...Silicone Oil Remover or dry rags to soak up spills For more details please refer to Technical Bulletin Silicone Oil Removal A024 50 2 3 4 LITHIUM BATTERIES WARNING 1 Always replace a lithium battery on a PCB with the same type of battery prescribed for use on that board Replacing a lithium battery with any type other than the one prescribed for use on the board could lead to an explosion or damage...

Page 11: ... or personal injury from electrical shock 4 Check the length of the power cord between the machine and power supply Make sure the power cord is not coiled or wrapped around any object such as a table leg Coiling the power cord can cause excessive heat to build up and could cause a fire 5 Make sure that the area around the power source is free of obstacles so the power cord can be removed quickly i...

Page 12: ...d regulations regarding the disposal of such items 2 To protect the environment never dispose of this product or any kind of waste from consumables at a household waste collection point Dispose of these items at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site 3 Return used selenium drums to the service center for handling in accordance with company policy regarding the recycling or disposal...

Page 13: ...consumables Make sure that all operators have access to an operating instruction manual for the machine Confirm that operators have read and understand all the safety instructions described in the operating instructions Demonstrate how to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug by pulling the plug not the cord if any of the following events occur 1 Something has spilled into the product 2...

Page 14: ... If toner is swallowed drink a large amount of cold water to dilute the ingested toner If there are signs of any problem seek medical attention 6 If toner spills on clothing wash the affected area immediately with soap and cold water Never use hot water Hot water can cause toner to set and permanently stain fabric 2 7 HANDLING AND STORING TONER WARNING Toner used toner and developer are extremely ...

Page 15: ...ed toner and empty toner bottles and cartridges in plastic bags to avoid spillage Follow the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items 3 Dispose of used toner and toner cartridges at one of our dealers or at an authorized collection site Always dispose of used toner cartridges and toner bottles in accordance with the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such i...

Page 16: ...e copier is operating Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS 1 Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed 2 Toner and developer are non toxic but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident it may cause temporary eye discomfort Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water as first aid If unsuccessful get medical atte...

Page 17: ... Radiological Health CDRH prohibits the repair of laser based optical units in the field The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Service engineer The laser chassis is not repairable in the field Service engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subs...

Page 18: ...to the laser beam Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on the laser beam path Remove all reflecting metals such as watches rings etc before starting service 2 Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places such as laser beam exit of the laser optical unit ...

Page 19: ...1 26 STC Soft Toner Cartridge Installation 1 27 Make the Machine Level 1 28 Attach the PCU Stand Rack 1 29 Attach Decals 1 30 Initializing Developer and Toner 1 31 Load the Paper Trays 1 33 Make a Test Color Print 1 33 ACC Automatic Color Calibration Adjustment 1 33 Counter Display Setting 1 35 Print an SMC Report 1 35 Connect the Upper and Lower Tray Heaters 1 36 1 3 3 BREAKER SWITCH TEST PROCEDU...

Page 20: ...Staple Supply Name 1 73 Enabling Booklet Binding B700 Only 1 73 1 9 PUNCH UNIT B702 1 74 1 9 1 ACCESSORIES 1 74 1 9 2 INSTALLATION 1 75 1 10 MAIL BOX B762 1 78 1 10 1 ACCESSORIES 1 78 1 10 2 INSTALLATION 1 79 1 11 3000 SHEET FINISHER B706 FINISHER ADAPTER B698 1 82 1 11 1 ACCESSORIES 1 82 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 Accessories 1 82 Finisher Adapter Kit B698 Accessories 1 83 1 11 2 INSTALLATION 1 84 ...

Page 21: ...PLICATIONS ON ONE SD CARD 1 119 Overview 1 119 Merging Applications 1 120 Undo Exec 1 121 Storing SD Application Cards on Site 1 122 1 15 6 PRINTER SCANNER UNIT GM 2100 N737 1 123 Accessories 1 123 Installation 1 124 USB SP Settings 1 126 1 15 7 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE 3260 B761 1 127 Accessory Check 1 127 1 16 8 DATAOVERWRITESECURITY UNIT TYPE C B735 1 128 Accessory Check 1 128 Before You Begin 1 1...

Page 22: ...CEDURES 3 5 3 2 1 ARDF 3 5 3 2 2 OPERATION PANEL TOP COVERS 3 6 3 2 3 LEFT COVERS 3 7 3 2 4 FRONT DOOR 3 8 3 2 5 RIGHT COVERS 3 9 3 2 6 REAR COVERS 3 10 3 2 7 TONER HOPPER FACEPLATE PCU 3 11 Removing Toner Hopper Face plate PCU 3 11 Reinstalling PCU Face plate Toner Hopper 3 15 3 2 8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3 18 3 2 9 DRAWER UNIT 3 20 3 2 10 DUPLEX UNIT 3 22 3 2 11 OPENING AND LOCKING THE CONTROLLER B...

Page 23: ... DETECTION SENSOR REGISTRATION SENSOR 3 65 3 7 3 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3 66 3 7 4 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER DISCHARGE PLATE 3 68 3 7 5 LUBRICANT BAR 3 69 3 7 6 CLEANING BLADE 3 70 3 7 7 PTR CLEANING BRUSH ROLLER 3 71 3 7 8 PAPER TRANSPORT BELT SEPARATION POWER PACK 3 72 3 7 9 REGISTRATION MOTOR 3 73 3 7 10 DOUBLE FEED DETECTION LED 3 74 3 8 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3 75 3 8 1 ITB Image Transfer Belt BELT CLE...

Page 24: ...OR REPLACEMENT 3 114 3 11 3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT 3 115 3 11 4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT 3 116 3 11 5 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT 3 117 3 11 6 TANDEM TRAY PAPER SIZE CHANGE 3 119 3 12 PAPER FEED TRAYS 2 3 3 122 3 12 1 PICKUP FEED SEPARATION ROLLERS 3 122 3 12 2 FEED UNIT 3 123 3 12 3 SEPARATION ROLLER PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT 3 125 3 12 4 PAPER END TRAY LIFT PAPER FEE...

Page 25: ...8 3 18 4 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR 3 159 3 18 5 INTERVAL ORIGINAL WIDTH SKEW CORRECTION SEPARATION SENSORS 3 160 3 18 6 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS 3 161 3 18 7 COVER OPEN ORIGINAL SET BOTTOM PLATE PICK UP ROLLER HP UPPER INVERTER SENSORS 3 162 3 18 8 ARDF POSITION SENSOR APS START SENSOR 3 164 3 18 9 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION EXIT SENSORS 3 165 3 18 10 ARDF SEPARATION ROLLER 3 167 3 18 11 ARDF TRANSPO...

Page 26: ...CH SCREEN CALIBRATION 3 191 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 4 1 4 1 PROGRAM DOWNLOAD 4 1 4 1 1 OVERVIEW 4 1 4 1 2 RECOVERY METHODS 4 1 4 1 3 DOWNLOAD ERROR CODES 4 2 4 1 4 IMPORTANT SP CODES 4 5 4 2 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 4 6 4 2 1 SP2181 030 ALIGNMENT RESULT ERRORS 4 6 4 2 2 COLOR REGISTRATION ERROR ADJUSTMENT 4 10 Color Registration Error Correction 4 10 Color Skew Error Correction 4 12 Overall Check 4 13 Color R...

Page 27: ...ED J098 099 4 77 SYMPTOM 4 77 CAUSE 4 77 ACTION 4 78 How to Change the Paper Thickness and Paper Type Settings 4 79 How to Change the Paper Type Detect or Double Feed Detect Settings 4 79 4 4 3 PAPER FEED SKEW 4 80 SYMPTOM 4 80 CAUSE 4 80 SOLUTION 4 80 HOW TO CHECK THE POSITION OF THE REAR REGISTRATION PRESSURE SPRING 4 80 4 4 4 WHITE LINE IN SUB SCAN DIRECTION ON SINGLE COLOR SOLID IMAGE 4 84 SYM...

Page 28: ...it P N B1329713 4 103 4 4 12 COPIER FIRMWARE UPDATE NOTICE WHEN COLOR CONTROLLER E 7000 IS INSTALLED 4 105 REASON 4 105 PROCEDURE 4 105 4 4 13 POOR FUSING ON 100g m2 PAPER 4 107 SYMPTOM 4 107 CAUSE 4 107 SOLUTION 4 107 4 4 14 NIP WIDTH ADJUSTMENT 4 112 MEASURING THE NIP WIDTH 4 112 NIP WITH SPECIFICATIONS 4 113 ADJUSTING THE NIP WIDTH 4 114 5 SERVICE TABLES 5 1 5 1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 5 1 5 1 1 S...

Page 29: ...up 2000 5 33 Group 3000 5 80 Group 4000 5 96 Group 5000 5 106 Group 6000 5 132 Group 7000 5 141 Group 8000 5 151 Group 9000 5 186 5 5 3 PRINTER SERVICE TABLE 5 188 Group 1 Printer 5 188 5 5 4 SCANNER SERVICE TABLE 5 190 Group 1 Scanner 5 190 Group 2 Scanner 5 190 5 6 COPIER INPUT OUTPUT CHECK 5 191 5 6 1 COPIER INPUT CHECK SP5803 5 191 5 6 2 COPIER OUTPUT CHECK SP5804 5 200 5 7 ARDF INPUT OUTPUT C...

Page 30: ...RDS 6 6 6 2 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 6 6 6 2 2 COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS 6 7 6 2 3 CONTROLLER BOX VENTILATION 6 9 6 3 COPY PROCESS OVERVIEW 6 10 6 4 ARDF 6 13 6 4 1 OVERVIEW 6 13 6 4 2 ARDF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 6 14 Components View 1 Sensors 6 14 Components View 2 Motors Sensors Other 6 15 ARDF Components View 3 Drive Motors 6 16 6 4 3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION 6 17 6 4 4 PICK UP ROLLER 6 20 6 4 5 BOTTOM PLATE...

Page 31: ...ON MUSIC 6 47 What does MUSIC do 6 47 When is MUSIC done 6 47 Location of the MUSIC Sensors 6 48 How is MUSIC Done 6 49 3rd Mirror Position Adjustment 6 51 Exposure Unit Temperature Sensors 6 51 6 8 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS PCU 6 52 6 8 1 OVERVIEW OF TANDEM PCU UNITS 6 52 6 8 2 AROUND THE DRUM 6 53 Drum Drive 6 54 Drum Charge 6 55 Drum Cleaning 6 56 Drum Ventilation 6 57 Ozone Ventilation 6 59 6 8 3 D...

Page 32: ...view 6 87 Toner Supply Operation Flow 6 89 6 12 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6 90 6 12 1 OVERVIEW 6 90 6 12 2 ITB DRIVE 6 93 6 12 3 ITB LIFT 6 94 6 12 4 TRANSFER POWER PACK 6 96 6 12 5 PAPER TRANSFER AND SEPARATION 6 97 6 12 6 PTR CLEANING 6 98 6 12 7 ITB CLEANING 6 99 6 12 8 ITB SPEED CONTROL 6 100 6 12 9 ITB VENTILATION 6 101 6 13 PAPER FEED 6 102 6 13 1 OVERVIEW 6 102 6 13 2 DRIVE 6 104 6 ...

Page 33: ...NIT DRIVE 6 135 6 15 2 LUBRICATION AND CLEANING 6 136 Stripper Retraction 6 137 6 15 3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL 6 138 Basic Temperature Control 6 138 Correction for Machine Internal Temperature 6 140 Copy Speed Reduction CPM Down Mode 6 140 6 15 4 FUSING UNIT VENTILATION 6 141 6 16 DUPLEX UNIT 6 142 6 16 1 OVERVIEW 6 142 6 16 2 DUPLEX DRIVE 6 143 6 16 3 INVERTER OPERATION 6 144 Inverter Feed in ...

Page 34: ...TION B473 14 2 5 PAPER END DETECTION B473 15 2000 3000 SHEET FINISHER 1 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B700 1 1 1 BASIC PROCEDURES B700 1 1 1 1 1 COVERS B700 1 2 1 1 2 UPPER TRAY END FENCE B700 2 1 2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR LIMIT SWITCH B700 4 1 3 POSITIONING ROLLER B700 5 1 4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR B700 6 1 5 UPPER TRAY HEIGHT SENSORS 1 2 B700 7 1 6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR B700 8 1 ...

Page 35: ...0 38 2 6 UPPER TRAY B700 40 2 7 LOWER TRAY B700 ONLY B700 42 2 8 CORNER STAPLING B700 44 1 2 8 1 STACKING AND JOGGING B700 44 2 2 8 2 STAPLER MOVEMENT B700 46 3 2 8 3 CORNER STAPLING B700 48 2 9 BOOKLET STAPLING B700 ONLY B700 49 1 2 9 1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM B700 49 2 2 9 2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING B700 50 Overview B700 50 Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms B700 56 2 10 UPPER TRAY O...

Page 36: ...0 2 1 4 PAPER PATH B704 13 2 2 PAPER FEED B704 14 Power On B704 14 Paper Separation and Feed B704 14 Bottom Tray Lift B704 14 Paper Near end B704 14 Paper End B704 14 3000 SHEET FINISHER 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B706 1 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE B706 2 3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B706 3 3 1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT B706 3 Front Door B706 3 Left Inner Cover B706 3 Inner Cover B706 3 Side Table...

Page 37: ...R DRAG MOTORS RETURN HP SENSOR B706 20 3 8 Z FOLD JOGGER UNIT B706 23 3 8 1 Z FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER B706 23 3 8 2 Z FOLD JOGGER UNIT B706 24 3 8 3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR B706 25 3 8 4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR B706 26 3 9 PUNCH UNIT B531 B706 27 3 9 1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT B706 27 Front to Rear Adjustment B706 27 Right to Left Adjustment B706 27 3 10 JOGGER UNIT B513 B706 28 3 10 1 JOGGER UNI...

Page 38: ...NICAL LAYOUT B706 50 6 13 2 JOGGER UNIT DRIVE B706 51 7 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION B706 52 7 1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT B706 52 7 2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION B706 53 7 3 DRIVE LAYOUT B706 56 9 BIN MAILBOX 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B762 1 1 1 COVERS AND TRAYS B762 1 1 2 SENSORS B762 2 1 3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD B762 3 2 DETAILS B762 4 2 1 OVERVIEW B762 4 2 1 1 MAIN COMPONENT LAY...

Page 39: ...RAY B474 SPEC 7 3 3 9 BIN MAILBOX B762 SPEC 8 3 4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 SPEC 8 3 5 3000 SHEET FINISHER B706 SPEC 9 3 6 PUNCH UNIT B531 SPEC 10 3 7 3000 SHEET FINISHER B701 SPEC 11 3 8 2000 SHEET FINISHER B700 SPEC 13 3 9 PUNCH UNIT B702 SPEC 15 3 10 A3 11 X 17 TRAY B331 SPEC 16 3 11 COPY TRAY B756 SPEC 16 4 MACHINE CONFIGURATION SPEC 17 4 1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS SPEC 18 4 1 1 COPIER SPEC 18 4...

Page 40: ...ur 5 Ambient Dust Less than 0 10 mg m3 1 If the machine is installed in a location where the ambient temperature is more that 30o C 86o F Do not run full color copying longer than 2 hours Never turn the main power switch off immediately after a long copy job Leave the machine on so the fans can expel the hot air from the machine and cool the electronic components 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 10 20...

Page 41: ... to gases that can cause corrosion 8 Put the copier on a strong and level surface The front and rear of the machine must be less than 5 mm 0 2 away from level 9 Do not put the machine where there could be strong vibrations 10 Do not connect the machine to the same power source as other electrical devices 11 The machine can make an electromagnetic field and this can cause interference with radio or...

Page 42: ...NIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS Put the copier near the power source Minimum clearance must be as shown below The same amount of clearance is necessary when optional peripheral devices are installed B132I111 WMF 0 mm Rear 750 mm 29 5 Front 110 mm 4 3 Right 160 mm 6 3 Left ...

Page 43: ...EQUIREMENTS August 2006 1 4 1 1 4 DIMENSIONS B132I112 WMF B132I113 WMF 480 mm 18 9 480 mm 18 9 1 230 mm 48 4 354 mm 13 9 750 mm 29 5 657 mm 25 9 90 mm 3 5 1 014 mm 39 9 1 198 mm 43 2 850 mm 33 5 458 mm 18 613 mm 24 1 ...

Page 44: ...sible voltage fluctuation 10 CAUTION Do not turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing To prevent damage to the hard disk or memory push the operation switch to turn the power off then do nothing until the power LED goes off and then turn the main power switch off There are two power switches on the machine Main Power Switch This is located on the front left corner of the...

Page 45: ...t Type 1075 For B706 only 9 B513 Output Jogger Unit Type 1075 For B706 only 10 B704 Cover Interposer Tray Type 3260 For B700 B701 B706 11 B762 Mailbox CS391 For B700 B701 only 12 B701 3000 Sheet Finisher SR970 No saddle stitching Tray x1 50 sheet stapling 13 B702 Punch Unit Type 3260 For B700 B701 14 B700 2000 Sheet Booklet Finisher SR4000 Saddle stitching Trays x2 50 sheet stapling 15 B703 Output...

Page 46: ...e glass cloth 1 4 Leveling Shoes 4 5 PCU stand 1 6 PCU Caps Set Not Used 1 1 7 Lock Plate Development Roller attached 5 1 8 Development Roller Gear attached with 5 1 9 Lock Plate Drum Shaft attached with 5 1 10 PCU Stand Holder 1 11 Decal Paper Loading 1 12 Decal Paper Size 1 1 Attach the PCU caps to the PCU toner ports before you return PCUs to the factory They are not used during installation or...

Page 47: ...ed support G made of cardboard with its hard side H up when unloading the copier from the pallet using it Remove all tapes and packing material from the main machine A ARDF right side B Packing block inside ARDF C Accessories bag Remove other accessory bags from Tray 2 Tray 3 D ARDF left side E ARDF connector cord Remove tape and connect the cord F Power cord B132I703 WMF B132I004 WMF A B C B132I9...

Page 48: ...August 2006 COPIER E STUDIO4500C 5500C 1 9 Installation A Under ARDF B Operation panel film B132I002 WMF A B ...

Page 49: ...MS ARE REMOVED AFTER YOU REMOVE THE FACE PLATE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE ITB NEVER TURN DOWN LEVER D TO PULL OUT THE DRAWER UNIT UNTIL AFTER YOU HAVE REMOVED THE ROD WITH THE RED TAG AND WIRE B THE DRAWER MUST REMAIN INSIDE THE MACHINE UNTIL AFTER THE DEVELOPER IS INSTALLED IN THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGES OF THE PCUS THE ROD IS REMOVED AFTER THE FACE PLATE IS REMOVED TO INSTALL THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGES...

Page 50: ...August 2006 COPIER E STUDIO4500C 5500C 1 11 Installation 2 From Tray 1 remove A Block tape B Retainer tag wire x1 3 Remove all retainers and accessories from Trays 2 Tray 3 B132I102 WMF A B ...

Page 51: ...Always make sure that the support leg is down and locked before you remove the hopper 6 Hold the toner hopper using the handles at the top left and right sides Then lift the toner hopper off its rails and set it on the floor CAUTION The hopper is heavy Lift it carefully Make sure that it disengages fully from the rails on the left and right and then set it on the floor 7 Push the hopper rails into...

Page 52: ...llation 8 Remove the tag and rod A x 1 9 Disconnect the fan connector B 10 Remove the face plate C x 5 11 Put the PCU stand D on a flat clean surface 12 Use a clean cloth to remove dust from the surface of the stand B132I715 WMF B132I902 WMFF D A B C ...

Page 53: ...MOVE THE FOLLOWING RETAINERS 13 Remove the tape A 14 Pull on the reinforced part B on tag C to remove the stabilizing rod D NOTE If you do not pull on the reinforced part B you will tear the tag or pull the wire off 15 Remove the bracket E red tag and wire x1 NOTE Do not remove bracket F B132I723 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 54: ...PCU when you hold the PCU Always use the PCU stand Do not put the PCU on other surfaces 1 Push down the tab A above the Yellow PCU 2 Hold the Yellow PCU B by its sides and pull it out of the machine 3 Set the PCU on the PCU stand C In the diagram F is front R is rear 4 Put a piece of clean paper on top of the PCU to protect the drum from light B132I903 WMF F R B132R214 WMF A B C ...

Page 55: ...emove the shaft cap A and lock plate B x 3 Important After you remove the shaft cap make sure that you do not turn the shaft C of the development roller 6 On the rear end of the PCU remove the lock plate D x 4 7 Remove the development unit E from the PCU B132R210 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 56: ...th a fingernail release the tabs on the left C and right D Important The development unit is top heavy and falls easily Hold it on the left side 11 While holding the unit steady with one hand on the left E remove the dummy cartridge F from the development unit 12 Shake the new yellow developer cartridge G from side to side about 6 times B132I105 WMF B132I105A WMF A B B C G D E F ...

Page 57: ... the developer cartridge down C on the left so the holes and tabs D are aligned 15 Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge E to lock the tabs inside F 16 Press down on the right end of the developer cartridge until the tabs G on the right lock B132I106 WMF B132I106A WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 58: ...ked The developer cartridge edge C should be flat and not bulging or floating away from the side of the development unit Pull gently on the developer cartridge at D to make sure that it does not part from the development unit 18 Fasten the cartridge E x2 IMPORTANT DO NOT REMOVE THE FILM SEAL F ON THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGE AT THIS TIME B132I106B WMF B132I106C WMF A B C D F E ...

Page 59: ...a Use your fingers to turn the front and rear ends of the development roller shaft until the end of the shaft is as shown C b Make sure that you hold the shaft and not the sleeve the sleeve does not turn c To prevent damage to the shaft do not hold the end of the shaft with pliers 2 Reattach the development unit to the PCU Important HANDLE THE DEVELOPMENT UNIT CAREFULLY WHEN YOU REATTACH IT TO THE...

Page 60: ...ake sure the tab C above the PCU is locked NOTE If the PCU does not go in smoothly make sure the rails B and grooves are engaged correctly 6 To release the developer into the PCU pull out the film seal D NOTE Put your other hand on the PCU E to keep it stable it while you pull on the film seal 7 Repeat Steps Page 1 15 to 1 21 for the other PCUs Cyan Magenta Black B132I114 WMF B132I905 WMF B132I101...

Page 61: ...late 1 Attach the face plate A with the screws in the sequence shown by the numbers above x 5 Important Do not tighten these screws too much Make sure the fan connector B is not pinched behind the face plate 2 Connect the fan again B x 1 1 4 2 5 3 B132I716 WMF A B ...

Page 62: ...t stops 2 Remove the instruction sheets C and D 3 Remove the bracket and tag E at the rear 4 Remove the bracket and tag F at the front Important A sheet of paper protects the ITB if you accidentally pull the drawer out without first removing the rod Do not push the drawer into the machine Follow the procedure on the instruction sheet to remove the rod and paper B132I709 WMF A B E F C D ...

Page 63: ...4 5 Raise lever D2 A 6 Turn knob D1 B in the direction shown by the arrow 7 Remove protective sheet C 8 Lower lever D2 A 9 Push the drawer into the machine until it stops 10 Rotate handle B2 up and to the right until it stops B132I722 WMF A B C ...

Page 64: ... 12 Attach the transfer belt release lever 13 Turn it to the vertical position and make sure that it locks Important The transfer belt release lever must be turned up and locked in position before you install the toner hopper IF YOU FORGET TO ATTACH THE TRANSFER BELT RELEASE LEVER A THIS WILL CAUSE AN ID SENSOR ERROR SC410 TO SC413 B132I707 WMF A ...

Page 65: ... F 4 Push the lock G and push the support leg H Important Make sure that the support leg is up and locked before you push the toner hopper into the machine 5 Put your hands at the bottom of the toner hopper at and and then push the hopper into the machine against the face plate Important To prevent damage to the hopper do not push the top of the toner hopper when you do this step 6 Make sure that ...

Page 66: ...ant To prevent damage to the bin door do not try to pull a bin directly out Push down on its top edge first to release it then pull it to open it 2 Remove the Yellow STC Soft Toner Cartridge from its box 3 Shake the STC A up and down about 10 times Do not squeeze or knead the toner cartridge this will make clumps in the toner NOTE The bottom of the cartridge C must face down 4 Set the Yellow STC i...

Page 67: ...l 1 Attach the leveling shoes A to the machine 2 Place a level on the exposure glass 3 Use a wrench to lift or lower the nuts B on the leveling shoes until the machine is less than 5 mm from level measure it from front to rear and from left to right B132I717 WMF A B ...

Page 68: ...e sure that the following accessories are attached to the bottom of the PCU stand B Then they will be available for the next servicing C Lock plate short Necessary for drum motor replacement D Lock plate long Necessary for developer replacement to lock the front side of the development roller E Development roller gear Necessary for developer replacement to turn the development gears 4 Put the PCU ...

Page 69: ... paper should be face up in the tray Back set decal Attach these decals to the trays of the copier Back set means that the paper should be face down in the tray 2 Attach exposure glass cleaning decal A at the front edge of the ARDF exposure glass 3 Attach the original caution decal B and the silicone cloth holder C 4 Put the silicone cloth D in the holder B132I910 BMP B132I911 BMP B132I912 BMP B13...

Page 70: ... the copier to a power outlet 3 Open the front door C Very Important TURN ON THE MACHINE WITH THE FRONT DOOR OPEN TO PREVENT THE MACHINE FROM PERFORMING THE INITIAL PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK IF THE FRONT DOOR IS NOT OPEN THE DRUMS WILL TURN WITH NO TONER IN THE PCUS IF THE POWER IS TURNED ON WITH THE FRONT COVER CLOSED DEVELOPER REPLACEMENT WILL BE REQUIRED IF THE DRUMS TURN WITH NO TONER IN THE ...

Page 71: ...01 DOES NOT ONLY INITIALIZE THE DEVELOPER IT ALSO INITIALIZES THE TD SENSOR IF YOU DO SP3801 AFTER SP3811 TD SENSOR INITIALIZATION WILL BE DONE TWICE THIS CAN CAUSE A FATAL ERROR IN TONER SUPPLY CONTROL After you replace developer only initialize the TD sensor for the color that you replaced As instructed in specific troubleshooting procedures If you do not obey the above instructions you will get...

Page 72: ...t You will use this in the ACC procedure if ACC is necessary 4 Check the results of the copy with the customer If the quality of the color is satisfactory ACC adjustment is not necessary If the quality of the color is not satisfactory do the ACC adjustment described below ACC Automatic Color Calibration Adjustment Automatic color calibration is done at the factory with the procedure given below Do...

Page 73: ...sure that the arrow on the test pattern is in the upper left corner of the exposure glass 8 Remove the pattern from the exposure glass and replace it with the Color test chart C 4 9 Press Exit three times to return to the Copy mode screen 10 Make a full color copy of the test chart 11 Compare the results of the 1st copy made in step 3 of Make a Test Color Print and the 2nd copy made in step 10 abo...

Page 74: ...SP5045 001 Counter Display Setting 3 Select the counter to use 0 Development counter Default 1 Page counter Important THIS SETTING CAN BE DONE ONLY ONCE AFTER IT IS SET TO 1 THE COUNTER SETTING CANNOT BE CHANGED IF THE WRONG SETTING IS SELECTED BY MISTAKE CONTACT YOUR TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR Print an SMC Report 1 Enter the SP mode 2 Do SP5990 001 to print a full SMC report Keep it in a safe location ...

Page 75: ...he factory with the tray heaters disconnected NOTE Heater connection is optional but the heaters must be connected if the location has high humidity Speak with the customer before you connect the tray heaters 1 Remove the left lower cover A x 5 2 Attach the connectors HT5 B and HT6 C x 1 x 2 B132I009 WMF A B C ...

Page 76: ...ical breaker switch NOTE The breaker switch is located at the left rear corner of the machine When the switch is in the ON position you can see the mark on the lower part of the switch 1 Connect the power plug Then push the test button A with the tip of a pen If the switch B is functioning normally it will automatically move to the middle position You will see the mark and the o mark A B ...

Page 77: ...006 1 38 To return the switch to the ON position Perform following 2 steps continuously 1 Push down the switch to the lower OFF position C You will see the o mark 2 Push up the switch to the upper ON position D You will see the mark C D ...

Page 78: ...antities against this list Description Q ty 1 Copy Tray 1 2 Actuator Arm and Bracket not used 1 3 Tapping Screw not used 2 4 Large Cap 1 5 Small Cap 4 6 Tapping Screw M4 x 8 1 7 Harness Clamp 1 8 Paper Height Sensor 1 9 Actuator Arm Bracket 1 10 Sensor Bracket 1 11 Actuator Arm 1 B756I001 WMF 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 79: ...COPY TRAY B756 August 2006 1 40 1 4 2 INSTALLATION 1 Remove the left upper cover A x 2 B756I101 WMF A ...

Page 80: ...er height sensor A and harness clamp B to the sensor bracket C 3 Attach the sensor bracket and actuator arm bracket D to the copier x3 4 Attach the sensor harness E x1 x4 5 Attach the actuator arm F to the arms of the actuator arm bracket B756I003 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 81: ...Y B756 August 2006 1 42 6 Reattach the left upper cover A x2 7 Attach the copy tray B 8 Attach the small caps C to the holes 9 Install the large cap D in the finisher power connection point B756I002 WMF A B C D ...

Page 82: ...PAPER SIZE TRAY B331 The A3 11 x 17 Paper Size Tray is installed in tray 1 of the copier e STUDIO4500c 5500c 1 5 1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 A3 DLT Tray 1 2 Short Connector 1 3 Paper Size Decal 1 B331I001 WMF 1 2 3 ...

Page 83: ...G Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do the following procedure 1 Remove the metal retainer A and packing material B x 1 2 Check the position of the front and rear fences and make sure that they are set for DLT or A3 B331I011 WMF A B ...

Page 84: ...R SIZE TRAY B331 1 45 Installation 3 Open the front doors 4 Pull out the tandem feed tray A fully 5 Push the right tandem tray B into the machine 6 Remove the left tandem tray C x 2 left x 3 right B331I707 WMF B331I708 WMF A B C ...

Page 85: ...A3 11 X 17 PAPER SIZE TRAY B331 August 2006 1 46 7 From the left tandem tray remove the front cover A x 2 8 Pull out the right tandem tray B then remove it x 2 B331I102 WMF B331I709 WMF A B ...

Page 86: ... in the illustration 10 Install the A3 11 x17 paper size tray C on the right rail D center rail E and left rail F Use the screws that you removed in Steps 6 and 8 NOTE You must use the short silver screws on the left and right rails If you use one of the longer screws it will stop the movement of the tray on the rails B331I004 WMF B331I003 WMF C D E F A B ...

Page 87: ...l the front cover A x 2 that was removed from the left tandem tray 12 Use SP5959 001 to select the paper size for Tray 1 A3 or 11 x 17 13 After you select the paper size turn the machine off and on to change the indicator on the operation panel B331I105 WMF A ...

Page 88: ...ER B699 1 6 1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list LCT B473 Description Qty 1 Upper docking pins grooved 2 2 Lower docking pin not grooved not for e STUDIO4500c 5500c 1 3 Flat head shoulder screw M4x6 1 4 Paper Set Decal 1 B473I101 WMF 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 89: ...LCT B473 LCT ADAPTER B699 August 2006 1 50 LCT Adapter B699 Description Qty 1 Brackets 2 2 Supports 3 3 Machine Screws M3x8 3 4 Machine Screws M4x8 6 B699I101 WMF 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 90: ...RNING Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure 1 Remove the filament tape A 2 Remove the decals B 3 Remove the tape under the lid C 4 Remove the docking pins D attached to the rear with tape 5 Remove the docking pins E B473I001 WMF B473I002 WMF A B C A D ...

Page 91: ...t the LCT A on its front side Important Do not put the LCT on its right side the open side or you will bend the ground plate B 2 Remove the 3 casters C x 3 each 3 Attach the 3 supports D x 1 each M3x8 thin screws 4 Set the LCT in a vertical position 5 Remove the stay E x 4 6 Attach the stay E at position F x 4 B699I102 WMF B699I103 WMF E F A B C D ...

Page 92: ... the right side of the machine x 2 2 Remove the upper covers B 3 Remove the lower covers C 4 Attach the brackets D that are supplied with the LCT Adapter B699 x 2 each M4 x 8 5 Attach the two grooved docking pins E NOTE The docking pin without a groove is not necessary for this installation B699I104 WMF A B C D D E ...

Page 93: ...Align the holes on the side of the LCT B with the docking pins C on the side of the machine 8 Slowly push the LCT onto the pins NOTE The release button D is used to unlock the LCT 9 Connect the plug E of the LCT power connector to the side of the machine B699I115 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 94: ...e machine 13 Attach the cover B with the screw that you removed in Step 11 14 Turn the machine on 15 Enter the SP mode 16 Do SP5959 005 NOTE The side fences of the NA model are set for 81 2 x 11 paper You must select the paper size with this SP 17 Input 0 for A4 LEF or 4 for 81 2 x 11 LEF 18 Turn the machine off and on to enable the setting B699I107 WMF A B C ...

Page 95: ...installation and LCT installation are both completed This is because to do the following procedure the copier main power must be turned ON 1 Turn ON the copier main power 2 Open the LCT top cover A 3 Hold down the LCT bottom plate function button B while covering the photo sensor C Do this until the bottom plate D reaches the bottom of the LCT A D C B ...

Page 96: ... 4 Move the side fence brackets E from the A4 position to the 81 2 x 11 LT position 1 screw for each bracket NOTE The various side fence positions are written on the bracket F 5 Remove the shaft H from the backside of the LCT top cover 1 snap ring G E F G H ...

Page 97: ... end fence I from the A4 position to the 81 2 x 11 LT position 7 Insert the shaft H 1 snap ring NOTE NOTE The various end fence positions are written on the LCT top cover J 8 Close the LCT top cover K 9 Set Sp5959 005 to a value of 1 for 81 2 x 11 LT H I J K ...

Page 98: ...The 81 2 x 14 B4 B474 is installed in the LCT B473 1 7 1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Q ty 1 Tapping screws M4x8 4 2 Tapping hex screws M4x8 6 3 Harness clamp 1 4 B4 LG frame 1 5 Front bracket 1 6 Rear bracket 1 7 Bottom plate extension 1 8 Cover 1 ...

Page 99: ...copier Open the cover and remove the paper Close the cover Turn the main power switch off Disconnect the LCT from the copier 2 Remove the LCT cover A x 1 3 Remove the right cover B x 2 4 Remove the right stay C and attach it below x 2 5 Change the position of the lower limit sensor D x 1 6 Attach the harness clamp not shown to the rear of the plate Use this clamp to hold the sensor connector wire ...

Page 100: ...tach the rear bracket B with the beveled corner down x 2 9 Attach the bottom plate extension C with the hex screws x 4 10 Remove the casters from the bottom of the B4 LG frame D 11 Align the positioning pin E 12 Attach the B4 LG frame F with the hex screws x 2 13 Move the front side fence G and rear side fence H to the B4 or 81 2 position and attach it x 1 B474I502 WMF B474I553 WMF B474I555 WMF G ...

Page 101: ...st 2006 1 62 14 Attach the cover A 81 2 x 14 B4 x 1 15 Attach the right cover B x 2 16 Connect the LCT to the machine 17 Turn the machine on 18 Enter the SP mode 19 Do SP5959 005 20 Input 5 for B4 SEF or 6 for 81 2 x 14 SEF B474I506 WMF A B ...

Page 102: ...on with double sided tape 1 2 Ground earth plate 1 3 Tapping screws M4 x14 4 4 Tapping screws M4 x 8 2 5 Leveling Shoes 3 6 Upper output tray 1 7 Lower output tray B700 Only 1 8 Front joint bracket 1 9 Rear joint bracket 1 10 Gasket Seal 1 11 Support Tray 1 12 Support Tray Not used 1 13 Accessory Pocket 1 B700I201 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...

Page 103: ...can be used with the e STUDIO4500c 5500c B701 3000 Sheet Finisher This can do punching shifting and stapling but with no saddle stitching unit This finisher can be used with the e STUDIO4500c 5500c NOTE Differences in the installation procedures are shown as B700 or B701 Be careful not to touch the sharp edge on the guide A indicated in the figure WARNING Always turn the machine off and disconnect...

Page 104: ... Materials 1 Remove the machine from its box and remove all the wrapping 2 Remove all filament tape and packing material from the finisher 3 Open the front door 4 Remove all tapes and packing materials inside the finisher B700I102 WMF B701I102 WMF B700I202 WMF B701I202 WMF B700 B701 B700 B701 ...

Page 105: ...2000 3000 SHEET FINISHERS B700 B701 August 2006 1 66 5 Pull the jogger unit A out of the finisher 6 Remove the tapes and retainers B700I204 WMF B701I204 WMF B700 B701 A A ...

Page 106: ...r is connected to the copier Use a short screwdriver to attach the grounding plate C x 2 M3 x 6 If you will install the Cover Interposer B704 Do not attach the sponge cushion to the finisher It must be attached to the cover interposer Do not attach the grounding plate C to the finisher It must be attached to the cover interposer Install the interposer on the finisher before you dock the finisher t...

Page 107: ...2000 3000 SHEET FINISHERS B700 B701 August 2006 1 68 2 Attach the rear joint bracket A x 2 M4 x 14 3 Attach the front joint bracket B x 2 M4 x 14 B700I105 WMF A B ...

Page 108: ... D go into their slots If you do this too quickly you will bend and cause damage to the paper entrance guide plates C 6 Attach and tighten the screw removed in Step 5 7 Connect finisher connector E to the main frame 8 Attach the gasket seal F as shown Important Check the duct on the left side of the machine Make sure that the sponge does not block this duct B700I107 WMF B132R734 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 109: ...tach the upper output tray A x 1 M3 x 6 NOTE Make sure that the metal plate B is on the top of the tray 2 Attach the lower output tray C B701 1 Attach the upper output tray A NOTE Make sure that the metal plate B is on the top of the tray B700I208 WMF B701I208 WMF B700 B701 A B C A B ...

Page 110: ...0 3000 SHEET FINISHERS B700 B701 1 71 Installation Leveling the Finisher 1 Put the leveling shoes A x 3 below the feet B 2 Use a wrench to adjust the height of the screws C to make the machine level B701I109 WMF A B C ...

Page 111: ...ively curled paper activating the tray full sensor A before the tray is actually full 1 Remove the paper form the paper feed tray turn it upside down then print 2 If Step 1 does not solve the problem place the support tray B on the exit tray as shown at figure NOTE Accessory pocket Attach this pocket to the rear cover of the finisher Keep the support trays inside this pocket when they are not bein...

Page 112: ...ting should be done for the B700 and B701 022 Staple Bind2 Input the name of the staples that are used for booklet stapling saddle stitching This setting is necessary only for the B700 Enabling Booklet Binding B700 Only To enable booklet binding saddle stitching for the B700 you must select the center stapling position 1 Press the User Tools key 2 Press Copier Document Server Features 3 Press the ...

Page 113: ...IES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 Punchout Waste Unit 1 2 Slide Drive Unit 1 3 Punch Waste Hopper 1 4 Screws M3 x 6 5 5 Side to Side Detection Unit 1 6 Punching Unit 1 WARNING Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure B702I101 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 114: ...ear cover make sure to disconnect the tabs that attach the cover to the frame 3 Remove the guide plate C x 2 4 Remove the shipping retainer bracket G screws H Move the punching unit D along its rails into the finisher Make sure that the pin engages correctly at the front and rear 5 Connect and attach the punching unit E x 2 x 1 The cables F are coiled and attached to the PCB Attach connectors to C...

Page 115: ... detection unit B in the machine Make sure that the two pins are engaged correctly at the front 9 Make sure that the side to side detection unit moves smoothly on its rails If it does not make sure that the rails are aligned with their grooves 10 Attach the side to side detection unit and connect it at the rear x 2 x 1 x 1 11 Pull the short connector out of the connector C then connect the cable x...

Page 116: ...sure that the punchout waste unit moves smoothly on its rails If it does not make sure that the rails are aligned with the grooves 14 Remove the short connector from the connector C NOTE This is the 4 pin connector 15 Connect the cable and attach the punchout waste transport unit x 1 x 1 x 1 16 Set the punch waste hopper D in its holder B702I106 WMF B702I107 WMF A B D 4 pin Connector C ...

Page 117: ...B762 The Mailbox B762 is installed on the 2000 3000 Sheet Finisher B700 B701 1 10 1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 Trays 9 2 Guide plate 1 3 Decals bin display 1 4 Tapping screws M3x8 6 ...

Page 118: ...2 INSTALLATION WARNING Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you start this procedure 1 Remove the filament tape A Important Move the mailbox carefully It is easy to cause damage to the corner leaf plate B B762I101 WMF A B ...

Page 119: ... Interposer Tray B704 is installed on the B700 B701 remove it NOTE The cover interposer tray and mail box cannot be installed on the finisher at the same time 3 Remove the top cover A of the finisher x1 4 Remove the bracket B x1 B762I102 WMF A B ...

Page 120: ...o the top of the finisher x2 M3x8 6 Attach the mailbox B to the top of the finisher x4 M3x8 7 Attach the 9 trays C to the mailbox 8 Give the decals D to the customer The customer will write on these and attach them at the correct location B762I103 WMF B762I104 WMF A B C D ...

Page 121: ... Extension 1 2 Leveling Shoes 4 3 Rear Joint Bracket 1 4 Front Joint Bracket 1 5 Entrance Guide Plate 1 6 Ground Earth Plate 1 7 Tray Holder Not used for e STUDIO4500c 5500c 1 8 Auxiliary Tray Proof Tray Not used 1 9 Auxiliary Tray Shift Tray Not used 1 10 Phillips Screws w washer M4 x 14 4 11 Tapping Screws M4 x 8 2 12 Tapping Screws M3 x 6 4 13 Tapping Screws M3 x 8 4 14 Shift Tray 1 15 Sponge C...

Page 122: ...t B698 Accessories Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 Upper Transport Motor Bracket 1 2 Timing Belt 1 3 Short Connector 1 4 Harness 1 5 Gasket Seal 1 6 EPROM 1 7 Harness Clamps 2 8 Serial Number Decal 1 9 Stopper Bracket 1 B698I101 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 ...

Page 123: ... August 2006 1 84 1 11 2 INSTALLATION WARNING Turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure Shipping tape and retainers 1 Remove the finisher from its box Remove all tapes and packing materials B706I002 WMF ...

Page 124: ... 85 Installation 2 Open the front door A and remove tape and packing materials 3 Pull the jogger unit B out of the finisher 4 Remove brackets C D and E x 2 each with their red tags and wires and all tapes and packing materials B706I102 WMF B706I101 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 125: ...August 2006 1 86 Finisher Adapter B698 Installation 1 Remove the finisher rear cover A x2 2 Connect the short connector B to CN137 on the finisher main board 3 Remove the upper transport motor mount C x1 x3 spring x1 B698I102 WMF B698I103 WMF A C B ...

Page 126: ...allation 4 Remove the transport motor A from the original bracket B x4 5 Set the motor on the new bracket C supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698 6 Attach the timing belt D 7 Use the same screws to attach the transport motor to the new bracket x4 B698I104 WMF A B C D ...

Page 127: ...s clamp B 10 Attach the transport motor assembly C x3 x2 spring x1 The harness D is supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698 Attach the screws but do not tighten Pull the spring slightly to apply tension then tighten the screws 11 Remove EPROM E and replace it with EPROM F that is supplied with the Finisher Adapter B698 B698I105 WMF C A B D E F ...

Page 128: ...ess clamps in the holes as shown 13 Install the harnesses through the clamps and close the clamps 14 Make sure that the harnesses do not touch the motor 15 Attach the finisher rear cover 16 Open the front door Attach the serial number decal C below the finisher serial number D decal that is attached to the front bottom support of the finisher frame B698I106 WMF B698I107 WMF C D A B ...

Page 129: ...ear joint bracket A x 2 M4 x 14 2 Attach the front joint bracket B x 2 M4 x 14 3 Remove the connector cover C 4 Attach the ground plate E x 2 M3 x 6 Important Set the grounding plate so there is no gap D between the ground plate and the bottom frame of the finisher B698I108 WMF B706I004 WMF D E A B C ...

Page 130: ...ve the strip from the sponge cushion C and attach it to the finisher Attach the entrance guide plate D x 2 M3 x 6 If you are going to install the Cover Interposer Tray B704 Do not attach the sponge cushion C Do not attach the entrance guide plate D to the finisher Install the interposer tray before you dock the finisher to the copier Then come back to the procedure for the B706 finisher and contin...

Page 131: ...kets E and push the finisher against the side of the copier 12 Make sure that the top edges of the finisher and the copier are parallel from front to rear as shown below 13 Set the leveling shoes F x4 below the feet G 14 Use a wrench to adjust the height of the feet G to make the machine level 15 Push in the lock lever D attach it x 1 then close the front door 16 Connect the finisher cable H to th...

Page 132: ...list press User Tools Inquiry Print Inquiry List Start 012 Staple Std Input the name of the staples that are used for corner stapling This setting should be done for the B706 with B698 Stopper Bracket Co packed with B698 Installation The stopper bracket improves stapling quality when using curled paper Installation Procedure 1 Open the finisher front cover and pull the jogger unit out of the finis...

Page 133: ...tant Make sure the stopper bracket C is flat against the edge of bracket G Make sure the stopper bracket C covers the shaft F NOTE The stopper bracket C limits the movement of the paper pressure unit E This is to prevent the paper pressure unit from pressing curled paper too much If curled paper is pressed too hard the staple position will sometime shift out of position C G F B C D E ...

Page 134: ...ES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 Punch unit 1 2 Punch Waste Hopper 1 3 Sensor Arm and Sensor 1 4 Spacer 2 mm 1 5 Spacer 1 mm 2 6 Spring 1 7 Step Screw large M4 x 10 1 8 Tapping Screw M4 x 10 2 9 Step Screw small M3 x 4 1 10 Machine Screw Washer M4 x 6 1 11 Knob 1 B531I001 WMF 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 135: ...nnect it 2 Open the front door and remove the rear cover x 2 3 Remove the punch unit from its packing materials Remove the motor protector plate A x 4 and the cam lock plate B x 1 4 Remove the inner cover C x 3 5 Behind the inner cover at D and E push the lock tabs to the right to release the inner cover from the frame 6 Remove the plastic sections F from the cover B531I002 WMF B531I09 WMF C D E F...

Page 136: ...97 Installation 7 Remove the paper guide A x 4 8 Install the sensor arm and sensor B x 1 small step screw M3 x 4 NOTE Make sure that the sensor arm turns freely on the step screw 9 Attach the spring C B531I003 WMF B531I004 WMF A B C ...

Page 137: ...the 2 mm spacer C and attach the tapping screws D to the punch unit x 2 M4 x 10 NOTE At the hole immediately above the lock lever use one of the screws from the paper guide removed above to attach the remaining two spacers to the frame These two spacers are used to adjust the horizontal position of the punch holes 13 At the front side attach the punch unit knob E x 1 M4 x 6 B531I006 WMF B531I005 W...

Page 138: ... to the hopper full sensor on the arm x 1 clamp x 1 Then connect the other two connectors to HP Sensor 1 D and CN620 E of the punch PCB NOTE No special DIP switch settings are necessary for this punch unit The punch unit sends an identification signal to the machine Then the machine knows the type of punch unit that is installed 17 Put the punch waste hopper F in the finisher 18 Attach the inner c...

Page 139: ...inisher B700 B701 The Output Jogger Unit B513 is installed in the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 1 13 1 ACCESSORIES Check the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 Jogger Unit 1 2 Tapping Screws M3 x 6 2 WARNING Always turn the machine off and disconnect the machine power cord before you do this procedure B703I101 WMF 1 2 ...

Page 140: ...ion 1 13 2 INSTALLATION 1 Turn the main machine switch off 2 Disconnect the finisher cable from the main frame 3 Use the flat head of a screwdriver to remove the left upper cover A 4 Remove the cover plate B x 2 Keep the screws B703I103 WMF B703I102 WMF A B ...

Page 141: ...tor B on the left put the hooks of the frame of the jogger unit A into the holes in the left and right side of the finisher frame 6 Fasten connector B to the socket x 1 7 Attach the jogger unit to the finisher x 2 M3 x 6 8 Reattach the jogger unit cover C to the jogger unit x 2 B703I104 WMF A B C ...

Page 142: ...1 3 Shoulder screws 3 4 Tapping screws M4 x 8 9 5 Tapping screws M3 x 8 2 6 Tapping screws M3 x 6 5 7 Adjuster plates B706 Only 2 8 Hinge Bracket B706 Only 1 9 Plate Extension bottom 1 10 Gasket Seals 2 11 Right Rear Cover Plate B706 only 1 12 Spacer 1 13 Anti Static Brush 1 14 Spacer B706 only 1 15 Spacer Not used 2 16 Right front corner plate for B706 only 1 17 Front door extension bottom B704I1...

Page 143: ...rom the main machine and that the copier is turned off and the power cord is disconnected before you start this procedure 1 If the finisher is connected to the machine disconnect it CAUTION After disconnecting the finisher for safety remove the front and rear finisher connectors from the copier Reattach them just before docking the finisher to the copier 2 Remove all tape and retainers from the co...

Page 144: ... If you are installing the cover interposer tray with a previously installed finisher B700 B701 B706 remove the sponge strip from the finisher and save it for re attachment to the interposer tray 4 If you will install the B700 B701 attach the extensions to the finisher without modification Go to Attaching the Extensions for the B700 B701 on page 1 1093 or If you will install the B706 modify the ex...

Page 145: ... Modify the Attachments for the B706 Front Door Extension 1 Attach spacer A to the front door extension top x 2 2 Remove the lower hinge B and replace it with C x 2 Rear Cover Extension Bottom 3 Remove D and replace it with E x 1 4 Remove F and replace it with G x 1 Plate Extension Bottom 5 Remove bracket H and attach it to the end of the bottom plate extension x 2 B704I108 WMF Front Door Extensio...

Page 146: ... Interposer for the B706 1 Remove spacer A x1 2 Attach spacer B x1 3 Remove the screws from the connector case C x2 4 Push the connector case in the direction of the arrow until the second set of holes are aligned with the holes below then attach the screws B706I900 WMF A B C ...

Page 147: ...e ground plate to the bottom plate x 2 5 Attach the bottom front cover extension D x 2 M4 x 8 NOTE Attach this cover first 6 Attach the top front cover extension E x 2 M4 x 8 7 Set two screws into the holes provided for the rear cover extension F x 2 M3 x 6 8 Set the keyholes of the rear cover extension over of the heads of the screws 9 Press up on the bottom of the rear cover extension to close t...

Page 148: ...as been previously installed remove the ground plate B from the finisher and save the screws 3 Attach the bottom plate C x 2 M3 x 6 then attach the ground plate to the bottom plate x 2 4 Attach the bottom front cover extension D x 2 M4 x 8 5 Attach the top front cover extension E x 2 M4 x 8 6 Attach the rear cover extension F x 2 M3 x 6 B704I104 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 149: ... screws 2 Secure the cover interposer with the screw C x 1 M3 x 6 3 If you are installing the cover interposer tray on the B700 B701 skip the next section and go directly to Docking Finisher and Interposer on page 1 11307 or If you will install the cover interposer tray on the B706 go to the next section install the corner plates on the B706 then go to Docking Finisher and Interposer on page 1 113...

Page 150: ...ight end of the finisher extension table B x 2 tapping M4 x 8 NOTE The holes are not visible because they are covered with tape Just punch the screws through the holes 2 Align the cutouts C of the right rear corner plate D with the screws and attach the plate 3 With a long screwdriver inserted through the cutouts in the right rear corner plate D tighten the screws to fasten the right rear corner p...

Page 151: ...hole is not invisible because it covered with tape Just punch the screw through the hole 5 With the clamp B under the edge of the corner align the cutout C in the right front corner plate with the screw then snap it into position 6 With a long screwdriver insert into the plate cutout C and tighten the screw to fasten the right front corner plate B704I111 WMF A B C ...

Page 152: ...ER TRAY B704 1 113 Installation Docking Finisher and Interposer to the Machine B700 B701 B706 1 Attach the rear bracket A x 2 M4 x14 2 Attach the front bracket B x 2 M4 x14 3 Attach the gasket seals C and D B704I121 WMF A B C D ...

Page 153: ...the machine screws removed from the finisher guide plate 6 Release the lock lever D x 1 7 Attach the pad E This pad is provided with the finisher 8 Slowly push the finisher against the side of the machine until the brackets F go into the slots WARNING Move the finisher carefully or you will bend the entrance guide plates 9 Attach the lock lever D x 1 10 Connect the connector G to the copier Import...

Page 154: ...lications 1 or several applications combined on 1 SD Card 1 System Controller SD Card Never remove Important Only one SD Card slot Slot 2 is available for applications To install more than one application they must be copied on the same SD Card 1 15 5 L ADP NEXT COPIER KEY CARD B A C D E A B C D E File Format Converter Tandem External CTL Option Ethernet USB Ver 2 0 SD Card Slot 3 2 1 Service Opti...

Page 155: ...use A B328 Copy Connector Type 3260 B 1 132 EFI V G815 EFI Printer Controller E 7000 C 1 134 Not use D Not use D Not use D Not use D Printer Scanner unit GM 2100 E 1 123 Note Items must be in the same slot Because of this only one of these cards can be installed at the same time B737I102 WMF ...

Page 156: ...stomer must use more than one application then the applications must be put together on one SD card 1 15 5 Important Slot 1 the lower slot is for the system SD card only The system SD card must not be removed The machine will show SC732 if a different SC card is put in Slot 1 Slot 2 holds the application SD card It also holds the target SD card when applications are put together on one card Slot 3...

Page 157: ... Put the edge connector C in the slot at a 30 degree angle from the surface of the board If the angle is too low the upper contact could bend 3 Carefully move the outer edge of the ROM DIMM up and down slightly until it goes into the connector Then carefully push it down level with the controller board Important If the upper contact is pushed in with force and becomes bent the connection will be d...

Page 158: ...card is used The SD card is the only evidence that the customer is licensed to use the application program The service engineer may occasionally need to check the SD card and its data to solve problems SD cards must be stored in the cover on the door of the copier Pg 1 116 A licensing agreement prohibits copying of the PostScript SD card However you can copy an application from another SD card to ...

Page 159: ...opying is completed touch Exit 11 Turn the copier off 12 Remove the Source SD card from Slot 3 Keep the target SD card in Slot 2 13 Turn the copier on 14 Go into the User Tools mode and check that all the applications on the SD card in Slot 2 are enabled User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Firmware Version Next 5 5 15 Turn the copier off again then Attach the SD card slot cover Attach t...

Page 160: ... front door into Slot 3 NOTE The SD card in Slot 3 must be the original SD card of the application you want to move from Slot 2 to Slot 3 You cannot use any blank SD card in Slot 3 4 Turn the main switch on 5 Go into the SP mode and do SP5873 002 Undo Exec 6 Follow the messages on the operation panel to complete the procedure 7 Turn the main switch off 8 Remove the SD cards from the slots 9 Turn t...

Page 161: ...ugust 2006 1 122 Storing SD Application Cards on Site 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the cover A on the door x2 3 Remove the block B 4 Store the SD cards C inside the cover 5 Attach the cover to the machine B132I728 WMF A B C ...

Page 162: ...ck the accessories and their quantities against this list Description Qty 1 Scanner Printer DIMM 1 2 NIB Network Interface Board 1 3 Printer Scanner SD card 1 4 Screws M3x8 2 5 Ferrite Core 1 6 Key Top Assembly 1 7 Operating Instructions Printer 1 8 Installation Instructions 1 9 FCC Label 1 10 Software CD ROM 3 ...

Page 163: ...supplied with this option 1 Disconnect the ARDF cable A x1 2 Remove the controller board B x3 3 Connect the Scanner Printer DIMM 128 MB expansion memory into RAM slot CN501 on the controller board 4 Attach the controller board x3 5 Remove the I F Slot Cover E C x2 6 Install the NIB D NIC USB in Slot E 7 Remove the SD card slot cover E x2 8 Install the Printer Scanner SD card F in SD Card Slot 2 mi...

Page 164: ... the ferrite core 13 Connect the RJ45 plug C on the Ethernet cable to the NIB 14 Replace the old key top assembly D with the new key tops E 15 Do the procedures in the operating instructions to make the user settings for example the IP address 16 Do the color calibration for the printer User Tools Maintenance Auto Color Calibration Printer Function Do all three test patterns B737I900 WMF B737I115 ...

Page 165: ...5844 SP No Name Function Adjusts the USB transfer rate Do not change the setting unless there is a data transfer error with the USB high speed mode HS FS High speed Full speed auto adjust 480Mbps 12Mbps 5844 001 Transfer Rate FS Full speed 12Mbps fixed 5844 002 Vendor ID Displays the vendor ID DFU 5844 003 Product ID Displays the product ID DFU 5844 004 Dev Release Num Displays the development rel...

Page 166: ...applications If the customer wants to use one more application that must go in slot 2 Printer Scanner B737 for example you must copy the contents of the printer scanner SD card to the PostScript3 SD card 1 15 5 The scanner printer application must be copied to the PostScript3 SD card because the PostScript3 SD card cannot be copied for copyright reasons After you copy the printer scanner SD card s...

Page 167: ... original SD card with the DataOverwriteSecurity application only cannot be used For example you can copy the contents of the printer scanner SD card to the Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 SD card 1 15 5 Also the DataOverwriteSecurity card application can be copied to the scanner printer card After you copy the printer scanner SD card or DataOverwriteSecurity card store it behind the door Pg 1 1...

Page 168: ...u see VOID on the tapes do not install the components in the box 2 If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID remove them from the corners of the box 3 When you remove each seal the VOID marks B can be seen In this condition they cannot be attached to the box again 4 Copy the DataOverwriteSecurity card to another application s SD card for example the printer scanner or PostScript card 5 After y...

Page 169: ... do this procedure 1 If the machine is on turn off the main power switch 2 Disconnect the network cable if the machine is connected to a network 3 Remove the slot cover A x 2 4 Install the SD Card B into slot 2 then attach the slot cover 5 Connect the network cable if the machine is connected to a network 6 Turn the main power switch on B132I909 WMF A B ...

Page 170: ...On 11 Go out of the User Tools mode 12 Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon A is displayed 13 Make a Sample Copy 14 Check the overwrite erase icon The bottom of the icon becomes thicker B Next Copy is shown for a short interval below the icon The icon goes back to its usual shape C 15 Remove the Document Server and Scanner key tops and replace them with the blank key tops ...

Page 171: ...3260 B328 1 Turn the machine off and unplug the machine before starting the following procedure 2 Remove the cover A of Slot B x 2 3 Install the Copy Connector Board B328 B in Slot B and attach it with the screws 4 Remove the rear upper cover See 3 3 6 B737I904 WMF A B ...

Page 172: ...cable is required connect the cables E with repeater hubs D 11 On the operation panel of each machine remove the second cover F from the bottom Printer 12 Install the appropriate key on each machine Attach the Printer Other Function key G or its equivalent symbol for EU if the printer scanner option is installed or Attach the Other Function key G or its equivalent symbol for EU if the printer scan...

Page 173: ...ONS August 2006 1 134 1 15 10EFI PRINTER CONTROLLER G815 1 Turn the machine off 2 Remove the cover A of Slot C x 2 3 Install the EFI Printer Controller G815 board B in Slot C and attach it with the screws B737I905 WMF A B ...

Page 174: ...wder is not available please use this machine s yellow toner Always use this lubricant powder to lubricate the drum and ITB during servicing Never use the previous Setting Powder 54429101 in any service procedure for the e STUDIO4500c 5500c The composition of this Setting Powder and the Lubricant Powder is completely different If you use Setting Powder 5442910 to service this machine you will dama...

Page 175: ...List Displays all PM items all PM items not only PM units Lists all PM items regardless of PM yield indicator settings Pg 2 4 Parts list for PM yield indicator Displays on the items with their PM yield indicator settings set to Yes Pg 2 4 Clear all PM settings Resets all PM counter settings to 0 at the same time PM items can be reset one by one with the Clear button Pg 2 4 Counter list print out P...

Page 176: ...s Pg 2 4 A Number buttons Pressing a number button opens a submenu Pg 2 4 B Descriptions The mark denotes a unit not individual item C PM yield buttons Function is the same as the PM yield indicator settings button Pg 2 4 D Current PM counter value E Target PM interval This can be changed by pressing a number button A F PM counter clear button Function is the same as the Clear current counter butt...

Page 177: ... key pad Press on the operation panel C PM yield indicator settings Yes is the default Press No to remove the current item from the Parts list for PM yield indicator When set to Yes items marked with the mark a unit will not have their individual items displayed automatically in the Parts list for PM yield indicator list When set to No items marked with the mark a unit only the individual componen...

Page 178: ...he PM Parts Main Menu with only items set to Yes displayed Note the following The mark denotes a unit Items without the 065 ITB denote individual components An asterisk will appear in the Exceed column A to show items that that have exceeded their target PM yields B132P905 BMP A ...

Page 179: ...S660 SHIN ETSU G0049668 Heat Resisting Grease MT 78 54479078 Launa Oil 40 54429103 EM Emergency Maintenance Copier PM Parts 150K 300K 600K EM Note OPTICS Reflector C Optical cloth 1st Mirror C Optical cloth 2nd Mirror C Optical cloth 3rd Mirror C Optical cloth Scanner Rails C Alcohol then dry cloth Exposure Glass C Exposure glass cleaner Toner Shield Glass C Optical cloth APS Sensor C Dry cloth AR...

Page 180: ...evelopment Roller Idle Gear R Service Life 600K Blower brush 3 5 2 Development Unit C Service Life 3000K Blower brush dry cloth 150K 300K 600K EM Note TONER SUPPLY Toner Supply Unit C Blower brush dry cloth 150K 300K 600K EM Note TRANSFER UNIT ITB R ITB Internal Rollers C Dry cloth ITB Encoder Sensor C Alcohol then dry cloth ID and MUSIC Sensors C Alcohol then dry cloth ITB Cleaning Roller R ITB C...

Page 181: ... Strippers Pressure Roller Strippers C L Dry Cloth Thermistors C 150K 300K 600K EM Note OTHER Circuit Breaker Check the operation one a year Dust Filters R Ozone Filters Service Life 1200K Waste toner bottle IR IR IR Empty and clean every inspection 150K 300K 600K EM Note PAPER FEED Copier Registration Rollers C Alcohol dry cloth Paper Dust Removal Unit C Dry cloth Registration Sensor C Blower bru...

Page 182: ...ertical Feed Sensors C Blower brush Paper End Sensor C Blower brush 150K 300K 600K EM Note DUPLEX UNIT Inverter Roller C Blower brush Reverse Rollers Drive Idle C Alcohol dry cloth Duplex Rollers C Dry cloth Transport Rollers x4 C Dry cloth Duplex Entrance Anti Static Brush C Dry cloth Inverter Junction Gate C Dry cloth Inverter Roller C Dry cloth 150K 300K 600K EM Note PAPER EXIT Heat Dissipation...

Page 183: ... water dry cloth Original Length Sensors Skew Correction Sensor Interval Sensor Registration Sensor Paper Exit Sensor Lower Inverter Sensor Separation Sensor Upper Inverter Sensor C C Blower brush White Cover C C Transport Belt C R C Alcohol or water dry cloth Feed Drive Gears L G501 Grease Grip Roller C Transport Rollers C Scanner Rollers Entrance Exit C Exit Rollers C Inverter Rollers Lower Exit...

Page 184: ...C report with SP5990 Replace the unit if the staple count is 200K 2 3 3 PUNCH B702 PUNCH 300K 2400K 3000K 4000K EM Punch Waste Hopper I I I I I Remove and empty Punch Unit Replace after 1000k punches 2 3 4 3000 SHEET FINISHER B706 350K 700K 1050K Note FINISHER Driver rollers I I I Idle rollers I I I Discharge brush I I I Alcohol Shaft Bearings I I I Lubricate with silicone oil if noisy Sensors I I...

Page 185: ...t R R R Pick up Roller R R R Separation Roller R R R Replace as a set Driver Rollers C C C Idle Rollers C C C Discharge Brush C C C Damp clean cloth Sensors C C C Blower brush 2 3 7 LCT B473 1000K 2000K 3000K Expected Note Paper feed roller R R R Pick up roller R R R Separation roller R R R Transport guide plate Grip roller Inspect and clean every 350K ...

Page 186: ... 13 2 4 LUBRICATION POINTS 2 4 1 COPIER OPC ITB Replacement Be sure to apply Lubricant Powder B1329700 when re installing the drum A or ITB B For more please refer to section 3 Replacement and Adjustment B023R960 WMF B132R319 WMF A B ...

Page 187: ...ive Gear B Exit Idle Gear C Upper Gear D Lower Gear Barrierta S552R Brush all gear teeth E Bearing Race φ20 x φ32 x 7 Barrierta S552R F Hot Roller Sleeve G Bearing Race φ25 x φ37 x 7 H Hot Roller Sleeve I Bearing Race Be sure to brush both ends B132P906 WMF B132P907 WMF A B C H G I G I D E F ...

Page 188: ...y wipe it with a dry cloth or clean it with wet cotton Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton 5 Never use alcohol to clean the drum alcohol dissolves the drum surface 6 Store drums in a cool dry place away from heat 7 Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily damaged 8 Never expose a drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas 9 Dispose of used drums i...

Page 189: ...tatic electricity on the glass surface 3 Use a cotton pad with water or a blower brush to clean the mirrors and lenses 4 Never bend or crease the exposure lamp cables 5 Never disassemble the lens unit Doing so will throw the lens and the copy image out of focus 6 Never adjust any CCD positioning screw Doing so will throw the CCD out of position 3 1 5 LASER UNIT 1 Never loosen the screws that secur...

Page 190: ...rrect SPs to do 8 Never do SP 3801 or 3811 with used developer 9 When using a vacuum cleaner to clean the development unit casing always ground the casing with your fingers to avoid damaging the toner density sensor with static electricity 10 After replacing the TD sensor Replace the developer in the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced Then do SP3801 001 006 only for the PCU where the TD sensor w...

Page 191: ...2 Make sure that the fusing lamps are positioned correctly and do not touch the inner surface of the rollers 3 1 9 PAPER FEED 1 Do not touch the surfaces of the pick up feed and separation rollers 2 To avoid paper misfeeds the side fences and end fence of the paper trays must be positioned correctly to align with the actual paper size 3 1 10 USED TONER WASTE TONER 1 We recommend checking the amoun...

Page 192: ...al position 2 At the rear left corner of the machine disconnect the ARDF cable 3 Remove the left screw B and right screw C 4 Slide the ARDF back until the heads of the screws are in the large end of the keyholes then lift the ARDF off the machine CAUTION The ARDF is very heavy Remove it carefully B132R101 WMF A B C ...

Page 193: ... PROCEDURES August 2006 3 6 3 2 2 OPERATION PANEL TOP COVERS Remove the ARDF x1 x2 Open the front door Remove A Operation panel x1 x2 B Top rear cover x2 C Left top cover x1 D Right top cover x1 B132R701 WMF A B C D ...

Page 194: ... If a finisher is installed disconnect it Then remove the front and rear finisher joint brackets Remove A Left upper cover x2 B Left lower cover x5 Reinstallation Make sure all the cover tabs are inserted correctly before you fasten the screws B132R702 WMF A B ...

Page 195: ...h one hand 2 Press down the hinge bracket B 3 Lift the front door slightly to remove it Important If you must replace the front door make sure that you put the SD cards from the storage location in the old front door into the storage location in the new front door 3 2 12 B132R703 WMF A B ...

Page 196: ...removed already if the LCT has been installed B Open the bypass tray C Right upper cover x2 Pull the bottom of the cover down and toward you as you remove it D Right lower cover x5 Pull the bottom of the cover down and toward you as you remove it Reinstallation Make sure all the cover tabs are inserted correctly before you fasten the screws B132R704 WMF A B C D ...

Page 197: ...ON REMOVAL PROCEDURES August 2006 3 10 3 2 6 REAR COVERS Remove A ARDF connector x1 B Rear upper cover x3 C Rear lower cover x2 Remove the bottom screws Do not remove the shoulder screws B132R705 WMF A B C ...

Page 198: ... hands under the left and right corners of the toner hopper and slowly pull it out on its rails until it stops IMPORTANT THE TONER HOPPER CAN EASILY SLIP OFF ITS RAILS 4 Press the release B to drop the support leg C 5 Confirm that the support leg is down and locked IMPORTANT ALWAYS MAKE SURE THAT THE SUPPORT LEG IS DOWN AND LOCKED BEFORE YOU REMOVE THE TONER HOPPER 6 Lift the toner hopper off its ...

Page 199: ...clockwise until it stops 9 Disconnect the fan connector B 10 Remove the face plate C x5 11 Place the PCU stand D on a flat surface NOTE The PCU stand is mounted on a rack attached to the bottom of the copier with magnets 12 Wipe the surface of the stand with a clean cloth to remove dust B132R201 WMF B132I902 WMF D A B C ...

Page 200: ...to the drum potential sensor and its relay board always make sure that the machine is turned off and that the power cord is disconnected from the power source before you remove a PCU 13 While pressing down the release tab A above the PCU pull the PCU B out of the machine B132R202A WMF A B ...

Page 201: ...THE OPC DRUM IS EXPOSED ON THE BOTTOM OF THE PCU NEVER PLACE YOUR HAND UNDER THE PCU NEVER PLACE THE PCU ON ANY SURFACE OTHER THAN THE PCU STAND 14 Set the PCU A on the PCU stand B NOTE In the diagram F is the front and R is the rear F R B132R214 WMF A B ...

Page 202: ...e the PCU is locked NOTE If the PCU does not go in smoothly make sure the rails B and grooves are engaged correctly Important If you have replaced a developer cartridge in a PCU be sure to remove the film seals D of every replaced developer cartridge after you reinstall it in the machine To release the developer into the PCU pull out the film seal D NOTE Put your other hand on the PCU E to keep it...

Page 203: ...e 1 When you reattach the face plate A fasten the screws in the order shown by the numbers above x5 Important Do not over tighten these screws 2 Rotate the transfer belt release lever B clockwise to lock it 3 Reconnect the fan connector C x1 1 4 2 5 3 B132I115 WMF A B C ...

Page 204: ...t the support leg is up and locked before you push the toner hopper into the machine 5 Place your hands at the bottom of the toner hopper at and and then push the toner hopper into the machine against the face plate Important To avoid damaging the toner hopper never press in on the top of the toner hopper 6 Make sure that the toner hopper is flat against the face plate on the right side NOTE If th...

Page 205: ...Open the front door 3 Remove the toner hopper then push the hopper rails into the machine 3 2 7 4 Rotate the transfer belt release lever A counter clockwise until it stops 5 Disconnect the fan connector B 6 Remove the face plate C x1 x5 7 Rotate the lever B2 D on the drawer unit counter clockwise to separate the transfer roller from the ITB B132R201 WMF D A C B ...

Page 206: ...ve it lift it carry it and put it down Never stand the image transfer unit C on its edge before you remove the cleaning unit from the ITB 3 8 1 Never place the image transfer unit on a carpet where toner may scatter or the unit will collect dust Reinstallation Re insert the image transfer unit slowly and carefully to avoid snagging the belt on the frame of the machine Make sure that the image tran...

Page 207: ...wise until it stops 3 Grip the lever and pull the unit B out of the machine until it stops To remove the drawer unit 4 Disconnect from the left rail C x2 5 Disconnect from the right rail D x2 6 Lift the unit off the rails CAUTION The drawer unit is very heavy 30 kg 66lb After removing it push the rails into the machine B132R900 WMF B132R301 WMF A B C D ...

Page 208: ... CAUTION The drawer unit is very heavy 30 kg 66lb Make sure that hooks are engaged with the holes on the rails 5 Slowly push the unit into the machine until it stops 6 Rotate the lever A clockwise to the vertical position 7 Fasten the screws to the left rail B x2 8 Fasten the screws to the right rail C x2 Important Make sure these screws are fastened and tight This ensures that the unit is positio...

Page 209: ...Open the front door 2 Pull the duplex unit A out until it stops 3 Remove the clip ring B from the left rear corner x1 4 Remove the clip ring C from the right rear corner x1 5 Lift the duplex unit from the rails and place it on a flat level surface B132R501 WMF A B C ...

Page 210: ... controller box screws 3 Open the controller box A to the left until it stops Important Obey the warning on the decal to avoid touching the fan blades when you open and close the controller box 4 Remove the left screw B of the plastic stopper arm C 5 Rotate the plastic stopper counter clockwise until it is aligned with the hole below and its tip D is touching the machine frame 6 Reattach the screw...

Page 211: ... x2 3 Remove the block B 4 Store extra SD cards C inside the cover 5 Reattach the cover to the machine Important When you replace the door confirm whether SD cards are stored here Remove any SD cards and store them in the new door These SD cards serve as prove of purchase of MFP options by the customer B132R728 WMF A B C ...

Page 212: ...August 2006 SCANNER UNIT 3 25 3 3 SCANNER UNIT 3 3 1 EXPOSURE GLASS Remove A Rear scale x3 B Left glass cover x3 C Exposure glass B132R128 WMF A B C ...

Page 213: ...t touch the paint locked screws on the lens block C Original width sensor x1 x1 D Original length sensors x2 x1 each x1 each After replacing the lens block do the following SP codes SP4008 001 Sub Scan Mag Sub Scan Magnification Adjustment SP4010 001 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment SP4011 001 Main Scan Reg Main Scan Registration Adjustment After lens block replacement do some copy sa...

Page 214: ...tion panel 3 2 2 1 Slide the 1st scanner A to the cutout in the frame 2 Remove the exposure lamp B x1 x1 x1 Important Never touch the surface of the exposure lamp with bare fingers Work carefully to avoid damaging the relay plugs attached to the rear ends of the lamp B132R129 WMF A B ...

Page 215: ... August 2006 3 28 3 3 4 SCANNER MOTOR Remove Exposure glass 3 3 1 A Lens cover x4 B Right lens cover x3 C Top right cover x1 D Bracket x5 E Scanner motor Timing belt x1 x1 x1 x3 B132R132A WMF B132R133 WMF E A B C D ...

Page 216: ...ER UNIT 3 29 3 3 5 SCANNER HP SENSOR Remove ARDF 3 2 1 Exposure glass 3 3 1 Top rear left right covers 3 2 5 A Ground plate x1 B Left stay x3 C Right stay x5 D Rear stay x4 E Scanner HP sensor x1 B132R134A WMF A B C D E ...

Page 217: ...August 2006 3 30 3 3 6 SCANNER INTERFACE BOARD SIOB Remove ARDF 3 2 1 Exposure glass 3 3 1 Top rear left right covers 3 2 5 Right stay rear stay 3 3 5 Lens cover 3 3 2 A Scanner interface board x6 x2 B132R133A WMF A ...

Page 218: ... ground x1 2 Disconnect the head of wire from tension bracket 1 3 Remove spring 4 Loosen the screw of tension bracket 1 5 Disconnect the end of wire at 6 Remove lock bracket of the 1st scanner x1 7 Disconnect the wire from the pulley x1 8 Remove the wire from the scanner B132R137 WMF ...

Page 219: ...Position Adjustment 1 Place the beads A on the middle of the wire on the pulley openings 2 Wind the ball end of the wire B 4 times 3 Wind the other end of the wire C 5 times 4 Attach tape D across the pulley to temporarily hold the wires in place 5 4 B132R136 WMF A B C D ...

Page 220: ... x2 7 Attach the lock bracket E to fasten the wire to the 1st scanner 8 Tighten the screw of tension bracket Section 3 3 7 9 Attach the pulley and tighten it lock screw Section 3 3 7 10 Remove the positioning pins x4 11 Remove the tape from the pulley 12 Slowly push the scanner left and right to confirm that the wires are engaged correctly The 1st and 2nd scanners should move smoothly B132R138 WMF...

Page 221: ...y performing any replacement or adjustment of the laser unit press the main power switch to power the machine off then unplug the machine from the power source Allow the machine to cool for a few minutes The polygon motor continues to rotate for approximately one to three minutes Never power on the machine with any of these components removed 1 LD unit 2 polygon motor cover 3 synchronization detec...

Page 222: ...ty from your hands The polygon motor rotates at extremely high speed and continues to rotate after you switch the machine off To avoid damaging the motor never remove the polygon motor within three minutes of switching off the main power and disconnecting the power plug Remove Exposure glass 3 3 1 Lens block 3 3 2 A Top cover x2 B Middle cover x2 C Polygon motor x3 x1 x1 Important Do not attempt t...

Page 223: ...LASER UNIT August 2006 3 36 3 4 3 LASER UNIT Remove A ARDF x 1 x2 B Left top cover x1 C Rear top cover x2 D Right top cover x1 E Operation panel x2 x1 B132R101 WMF B132R701 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 224: ...he rubber clamps Next do the following F Raise the scanner unit x 2 G Set the support rod at the base then under the front right corner of the scanner unit CAUTION The scanner unit is very heavy Never remove the support rod during servicing Reinstallation Be sure to reconnect ground wire C B132R001 WMF 1 2 B132R002 WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 225: ...t includes four LD sub units However the LD sub units cannot be replaced separately because factory adjustment is required Reinstallation Make sure that the four tapes are set correctly in the holes Be sure to reconnect the ground wire C on the previous page B132R003 WMF A ...

Page 226: ...nter the values shown in the sample above 2 Make a test copy 3 19 4 Color Registration Errors In addition to the SP adjustments printed on the seal attached to the LD unit if color registration errors occur immediately after you change the laser unit an additional adjustment is required This additional adjustment is normally not required in the field Do it only if you see color registration errors...

Page 227: ... 3 4 4 LASER SYNCHRONIZATION DETECTOR Remove A Laser unit 3 4 3 B Laser synchronization detector x2 x1 NOTE In the figure above note the locations of the 8 laser synchronization detectors shown within the circles B132R004 WMF A B ...

Page 228: ...the long special tool B and gear lock C from the bottom of the PCU stand 5 Put the PCU stand A on a flat surface 6 Remove the PCU 3 2 7 7 Position the front and rear of the PCU D so it matches the F front and R rear markings on the stand then place the PCU on the stand Important The front rear alignment aligns the shape of the stand with the contours of the PCU bottom This ensures that the exposed...

Page 229: ...PCU cleaning unit and around the drum potential sensor 10 On the front end of the PCU remove the shaft cap A and lock plate B x 3 Important After you remove the shaft cap never turn the shaft C of the development roller 11 On the rear end of the PCU remove the lock plate D x 4 NOTE The long screws for the plates A B and D have washers 12 Remove the development unit E from the PCU B132R210 WMF A B ...

Page 230: ...tridge E from the development unit Important The development unit is top heavy and it tips easily Be sure to steady it with one hand as you remove the old cartridge Discard the old cartridge Please obey the local laws and regulations regarding the disposal of such items The screws removed from the cartridge do not have washers Do not confuse these screws for the plate screws that were removed in t...

Page 231: ... special tool B must fit over the D shaped shaft tip C 18 If the hole of the special long tool and shaft are not aligned rotate the D shaped shaft tip C in the direction of the arrow D to position the shaft so the special long tool can be attached Important Always rotate the shaft in the direction of the arrow D To avoid damaging the entrance seal never rotate the lock gear in the opposite directi...

Page 232: ...k gear in the direction indicated by the arrow To avoid damaging the entrance seal do not rotate the lock gear in the opposite direction 21 After dumping as much developer as possible vacuum the remaining developer and toner Important Be sure to vacuum completely especially around the development roller 22 Remove the lock gear and long special long tool from the PCU 23 Shake the new developer cart...

Page 233: ...le B 25 Slide the developer cartridge down C on the left so the holes and tabs D are aligned 26 Press in on the middle of the developer cartridge E to lock the tabs inside F 27 Press down on the left end D and right end G to lock the tabs B132I106 WMF B132I106A WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 234: ...developer cartridge edge C should be flat and not bulging or floating away from the side of the development unit Pull gently on the developer cartridge at D to make sure that it does not part from the development unit 29 Attach the cartridge E x2 IMPORTANT DO NOT REMOVE THE FILM SEAL F ON THE DEVELOPER CARTRIDGE AT THIS TIME B132I106B WMF B132I106C WMF A B C D F E ...

Page 235: ...ate at the front and rear 32 Push the PCU fully into the slot to reinstall it 33 To release the developer in the PCU pull out the film seal A NOTE Place your other hand on the PCU B to steady it while you pull on the film seal Reinstallation Important YOU MUST DO SOME SPS OR A FATAL ERROR WILL OCCUR 3 5 7 B132I101 WMF A B ...

Page 236: ...TS 3 49 3 5 2 DEVELOPMENT GEARS Remove PCU 3 2 7 Development unit 3 5 1 A TD sensor connector x1 this is a tapping screw B Development gear cover x1 C Development roller idle gear D Development roller gear C ring x1 B132R225 WMF A B C D ...

Page 237: ...T Remove PCU 3 2 7 A Charge roller unit x2 This unit contains the charge roller and charge roller cleaning roller B Weight NOTE The weight must be used during the full service life of the machine Be sure to reinstall it C Lubricant bar B132R203 WMF B132R224 WMF A B C ...

Page 238: ...nit 3 5 3 A Rear bracket x1 B Front bracket x1 C Rotate the cleaning unit to the right 90 degrees D OPC drum Slide to the front to remove Important Set the removed OPC drum on a clean piece of paper and cover it to protect it from light Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R205 WMF A B C D ...

Page 239: ... 3 5 3 Drum 3 5 4 Open the upper cover of the cleaning unit 90 degrees to the right A Bracket B Cleaning blade x2 Important After you replace the cleaning blade always coat the drum with Lubricant Powder B1329700 For more see the next page This must be done even if the drum is not replaced B132R206 WMF A B ...

Page 240: ...of the drum first Never rotate the drum after reinstalling it Always dust the drum before reinstallation after it was removed to replace or service other parts in the PCU If the Lubricant Powder B1329700 is not available If the lubricant powder is not available coat the drum with this model s Yellow toner Important NEVER USE THE YELLOW TONER OF ANOTHER MODEL NEVER USE TONER TAKEN FROM THE YELLOW P...

Page 241: ...t B Rear bracket x1 C Long sleeve D Leaf spring E Short sleeve F Bracket and 2 gears x1 G Cleaning unit When you remove the cleaning unit the mylar can catch on the PCU frame and will scatter toner To prevent this rotate then lift The cleaning unit contains these PM parts lubricant brush toner brush 2 1 B132R208 WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 242: ... at the rear and front There must be no gap B between the edge of a seal and the edge of the cleaning blade There must be no overlap C at the edge of the seal and the edge of the cleaning blade Check that the cleaning blade does not catch on the edges of the seals as shown in the drawing at OK B132R208C WMF OK NG NG B132R208B WMF A B C ...

Page 243: ...door Remove the PCU from the machine 3 2 7 A Connector bracket x1 B TD sensor x2 Reinstallation After replacing the TD sensor Replace the developer in the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced 3 5 1 Do SP3801 001 006 only for the PCU where the TD sensor was replaced B132R223 WMF A B ...

Page 244: ...1 2 SP3820 002 Manual Procon 3 4 SP3810 001 005 ClngInitSetExe and SP3820 002 Manual Procon Before reinstallation cover the drum completely with Lubricant Powder Do NOT do these SPs which initialize the TD sensor SP3801 001 to 006 SP3811 001 to 006 5 SP3801 001 006 Init TD Sensor Before reinstallation cover the drum completely with Lubricant Powder Do these SPs to initialize the TD sensor only for...

Page 245: ...will get toner scattering inside the machine Here is a summary of the important difference between SP3801 001 006 Init TD sensor and SP3811 001 006 Dev Setup Exe SP3801 001 006 Init TD sensor only initializes the TD sensor SP3811 001 006 Dev Setup Exe initializes the TD sensor and sends toner to the sub hopper of each PCU This covers the PCU drum with a layer of toner Covering the drum with toner ...

Page 246: ...lder front cover A x2 3 Remove the STC bottom cover B Pawls x2 4 Wrap a clean cloth around the tip of a small screwdriver then scrape away any toner that has collected inside the bottom holder front cover 5 Use a clean cloth to clean the bottom of the holder front cover C and the bottom of the holder D B132R215 WMF A B C D ...

Page 247: ...PPLY UNIT August 2006 3 60 3 6 2 CONNECTOR BOARD CNB Remove Open the front door Remove the toner hopper 3 2 7 A Support bracket x2 B CNB x8 x1 Slide the PCB assembly to the right and remove it B132R216 WMF A B ...

Page 248: ...PLY UNIT 3 61 3 6 3 TONER PUMP Remove Open the front door Toner hopper 3 2 7 Support bracket 3 6 2 Connector Board 3 6 2 A Toner pump assembly x3 x3 Bushing x1 x1 Pull the assembly straight down and remove it B132R217 WMF A ...

Page 249: ...TONER SUPPLY UNIT August 2006 3 62 3 6 4 TONER END SENSOR Remove Open the front door Toner hopper 3 2 7 A Toner end sensor x1 x2 B132R213 WMF A ...

Page 250: ...August 2006 TONER SUPPLY UNIT 3 63 3 6 5 TONER HOPPER MOTOR Remove Open the front door Toner hopper 3 2 7 A Motor cover x1 B Toner hopper motor x4 x1 B132R211 WMF A B ...

Page 251: ...IT August 2006 3 64 3 7 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT 3 7 1 RELAY SENSOR Pull out the drawer unit 3 2 9 A Sensor bracket x1 B Relay sensor x1 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R615 WMF A B ...

Page 252: ...SENSOR REGISTRATION SENSOR Pull out the drawer unit 3 2 9 Open the guide plate A Remove B Sensor support plate x2 C Double feed detection sensor x1 x1 D Registration sensor x1 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R616 WMF B C D A ...

Page 253: ...R UNIT Pull out the drawer unit 3 2 9 Remove A Paper transport unit cover x2 B Timing belt gear x1 NOTE Do not loosen or remove the paint locked screws C Press the release forward D Raise the handle to the vertical position B132R302 WMF B132R302A WMF A B C D ...

Page 254: ...all pliers to remove the connector E Bracket x2 F Paper transfer unit PTR unit The handle should be up Raise the front Pull the rear Reinstallation Be sure to set springs A B and C in their original positions before you re install the PTR unit Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 1 2 B132R303 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 255: ...ISCHARGE PLATE Remove Paper transfer unit 3 7 3 A Paper discharge plate x2 B Paper transfer roller x2 Gear x1 Shaft bearings x2 Reinstallation When you install the roller the long end C is at the rear Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R304 WMF A C B ...

Page 256: ...RICANT BAR Remove Paper transfer unit 3 7 3 A Entrance guide plate x2 B Lubrication bar x2 Important Work carefully to avoid scratching the paper transfer roller Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R305 WMF A B ...

Page 257: ...ANSFER UNIT August 2006 3 70 3 7 6 CLEANING BLADE Remove Paper transfer unit 3 7 3 Lubrication bar 3 7 5 A Cleaning blade x2 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R306 WMF A ...

Page 258: ...R Remove Paper transfer unit 3 7 3 Transfer exit guide paper transfer roller 3 7 4 A Gear x1 B Brush roller cover x3 C PTR cleaning brush roller Gear x1 Washer x1 Shaft bearing x1 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R307 WMF B A C ...

Page 259: ... 9 Remove Paper transport unit lever and cover 3 7 3 Fusing unit 3 9 2 A Timing belt x1 Gear x1 Shaft bearing x1 B Clip ring x1 Shaft bearing C Paper transport belt x2 x2 D Cover E Separation power pack x6 x2 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R308 WMF B132R308A WMF B C A D E ...

Page 260: ...ON MOTOR Remove Drawer unit 3 2 9 A Drawer unit connector bracket x1 x3 x2 B Gear cover x1 C Registration gear x1 Spring pin x1 D Registration motor assembly x3 x1 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R618 WMF A B C D ...

Page 261: ... unit connector bracket 3 7 9 Registration motor assembly 3 7 9 Sensor support plate 3 7 2 A Upper stay x2 x1 Gear x 1 Pin x1 B Lower stay x2 x1 C Sensor bracket x2 D Double feed detection LED x1 x1 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R619 WMF B132R620 WMF A B C D ...

Page 262: ... of paper NOTE Keep the unit flat when you remove it lift it carry it and put it down Otherwise waste toner will spill out and will spill inside the unit and this can cause copying problems 3 Disconnect the image transfer belt unit connector and screw A x1 1x 4 Push the image transfer unit to the rear to disengage the front pins B 5 Pull the unit to the front to disengage the rear pin C 6 Lift the...

Page 263: ...mportant When you install the new ITB the edge of the belt with the encoder film strip must be at E The encoder must be at the rear side The encoder edge of the ITB is silver Be sure to reattach the ID sensor MUSIC sensor plate C before you reassemble the ITB x2 x1 Make sure that the belt flange F does not touch the roller edge B132R314 WMF B132R317A WMF C A D B E F ...

Page 264: ... one sheet of A4 LT paper A at the corner as shown NOTE The paper protects the corner seal B of the belt cleaning unit 2 Lower the belt unit C onto the cleaning unit D 3 Push the belt unit and belt cleaning unit together 4 Connect the belt unit and belt cleaning unit x1 x1 B132R315 WMF B132R316 WMF B A C D ...

Page 265: ... out the paper A slowly 6 Check the paper If the paper is unmarked go to the next step or If the paper is creased or torn separate the image transfer belt and cleaning unit Inspect the seal If the seal is damaged replace it NG OK B132R317 WMF A ...

Page 266: ...TAKEN FROM THE TONER SUPPLY PORT OF THE YELLOW PCU BECAUSE THIS TONER HAS DEVELOPER MIXED WITH IT IF THE LUBRICANT POWDER B1329700 IS NOT AVAILABLE COAT THE ITB WITH THIS MACHINE S YELLOW TONER DO NOT USE ANOTHER MODEL S YELLOW TONER 2 While rotating the knob A in the direction indicated by the arrow B apply Lubricant Powder B1329700 at C with a soft dry cloth 3 Rotate the ITB indicated by the arr...

Page 267: ... covering the surface of the ITB with lubricant power be sure to rotate the ITB through one full rotation in the opposite direction This allows the cleaning blade edge F to be covered with sufficient lubricant powder Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R319 WMF B132R320 WMF F ...

Page 268: ...sfer unit 3 2 8 Belt cleaning unit 3 8 1 A ITB cleaning blade x2 B Dust collection unit x3 Reinstallation After reinstallation of the dust collection unit confirm that the seal C is covered by the bracket D Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R311 WMF OK NG B132R312A WMF A B C D ...

Page 269: ...mage transfer unit ITB cleaning unit 3 8 1 ITB cleaning blade dust collection unit 3 8 2 A Rear bracket coupling x1 B Front bracket x1 Gear x1 C ITB cleaning roller D ITB cleaning scraper blade x2 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R313 WMF A B C D ...

Page 270: ... TRANSFER UNIT 3 83 3 8 4 MUSIC AND ID SENSORS Remove the ID sensor music sensor plate 3 8 1 A Cover x2 B Music and ID sensors x4 x1 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R332 WMF A B ...

Page 271: ... idle roller plate D Image transfer power pack x6 x6 Reinstallation Connect the color coded connectors at the correction positions Red Blue Yellow When you reattach the support bracket A rotate the screw E up as shown then tighten it Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 1 2 2 B132R333 WMF B132R334 WMF E A B C D ...

Page 272: ...ust 2006 IMAGE TRANSFER UNIT 3 85 3 8 6 BELT POSITION SENSORS Remove the ITB 3 8 1 A Belt position sensor assembly x3 x2 Reinstallation Do the forced MUSIC adjustment with SP 2111 001 3 19 4 B132R335 WMF A ...

Page 273: ...USING BELT STRIPPERS Pull out the drawer unit 3 2 9 A Raise lever until it stops B Fusing cleaning unit cover x2 C Fusing unit exit guide x2 D Hot roller stripper Press the sides in to disconnect the strippers and remove B132R403 WMF B132R402 WMF A B C D ...

Page 274: ...er source 2 Open the front door 3 Pull out the drawer unit 3 2 9 4 Allow the machine to cool for at least 10 minutes 5 Loosen the fusing unit screw A x1 6 Grip the fusing unit at B and C and lift the unit to remove it Important Do not touch the reference pin D when lifting the fusing unit B132R401 WMF A B C D ...

Page 275: ...FUSING UNIT August 2006 3 88 3 9 3 FUSING EXIT SENSOR ACCORDION JAM SENSOR Remove Fusing unit 3 9 2 A Sensor bracket x2 B Fusing exit sensor x1 C Accordion jam sensor x1 B132R405 WMF A B C ...

Page 276: ...SING UNIT 3 89 3 9 4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS THERMISTOR Remove Fusing unit 3 9 2 A Lower entrance guide cover x2 B Pressure roller thermostats x4 C Pressure roller thermistor x1 x1 B132R407 WMF B132R410 WMF A B C ...

Page 277: ...FUSING UNIT August 2006 3 90 3 9 5 FUSING CLEANING UNIT Remove Fusing unit 3 9 2 A Fusing unit upper cover x3 B Fusing cleaning unit Spring x1 B132R408 WMF A B ...

Page 278: ... Fusing unit 3 9 2 Fusing cleaning unit 3 9 5 A Two left thermostats x4 B Two right thermostats x4 NOTE The thermostats installed in line with one another are of two types One is marked with a red mark but their order of installation is not important B132R411 WMF A B ...

Page 279: ...e Fusing unit 3 9 2 Fusing unit upper cover 3 9 1 Fusing cleaning unit 3 9 5 A Fusing unit belt cover x2 B Hot roller thermistor x1 C Heating roller thermistor x1 D Heating roller temperature sensor x2 Spring plates x2 E Wire x1 F Connector leads Pull through the frame B132R409 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 280: ...t 3 9 5 1 Remove the fusing belt lubrication roller A Springs x 2 Bushing x2 x2 2 Remove the cleaning roller B NOTE Press on each end of the roller to release the springs C Reinstallation When you install the fusing belt lubrication roller the end with the serial number must be toward the rear of the machine B132R404 WMF A B C ...

Page 281: ...3 9 9 PRESSURE ROLLER CLEANING FELT ROLLER Remove Fusing unit 3 9 2 A Exit sensor bracket x2 x2 B Lower exit guide assembly x2 C Lower exit guide x2 D Pressure roller strippers x7 E Cleaning felt roller Assy B132R406 WMF C D E A B ...

Page 282: ...August 2006 FUSING UNIT 3 95 Remove E Cleaning felt roller Assy F Cleaning felt roller G Bracket H Springs I Bushings E F G H H I I ...

Page 283: ... 2006 3 96 3 9 10 HOT ROLLER HEATING ROLLER FUSING LAMPS Remove Fusing unit 3 9 2 Fusing unit upper cover 3 9 1 Fusing cleaning unit 3 9 5 A Bracket B Rear lamp bracket x2 C Front lamp brackets x1 each B132R413 WMF A B C ...

Page 284: ...nectors to ensure that you match their connection points correctly at reinstallation Disconnect at front and rear A Heating roller fusing lamp connectors x4 B Hot roller fusing lamp connectors x2 Remove C Heating roller fusing lamps x2 D Hot roller fusing lamp x1 B132R414 WMF A B C D ...

Page 285: ...ROLLER FUSING LAMP Remove Fusing unit 3 9 2 Fusing unit upper cover 3 9 1 Fusing cleaning unit 3 9 5 Brackets 3 9 10 A Pressure roller lamp front bracket x1 B Pressure roller lamp rear bracket x1 C Pressure roller fusing lamp x2 B132R412 WMF A B C ...

Page 286: ...2 HEATING ROLLER FUSING BELT HOT ROLLER Remove Fusing unit 3 9 2 Fusing unit upper cover 3 9 1 Fusing cleaning unit 3 9 5 Hot roller fusing lamp heating roller fusing lamp x3 3 9 10 A Release levers Press down to release B132R415 WMF A ...

Page 287: ... the front and rear of the heating roller remove E Lock rings F Bushings G Bearings 4 Remove the heating roller H 5 At the front and rear of the hot roller remove I Lock rings J Shaft bearings K Gears 6 Remove the fusing belt L and hot roller M B132R416 WMF B E F G E F G A L M I K J I H J K C D ...

Page 288: ...ar of the heating roller NOTE Make sure the bearing flange is on the outside Attach the heating roller H Length N O Attach the lock rings E bushings F and bearings G to the front and rear of the heating roller NOTE Make sure the bearing flange is on the outside Rotate the flame D to the left Tight the three screws A B and C E B E G G A L M I J I H J K C D N O K F F ...

Page 289: ... roller fusing lamp x1 3 9 11 A Lower fusing entrance guide x2 B Front screw x2 C Rear screw x1 D Hot roller fusing lamp x1 heating roller fusing lamps x2 E Rotate the frame to the right in the direction shown by the arrow F Pressure roller NOTE Lift pressure roller and remove without detaching shaft bearing and gears B132R417 WMF A B C F E D B ...

Page 290: ...August 2006 FUSING UNIT 3 103 3 9 14 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER Remove Fusing unit 3 9 2 Lower exit guide assembly 3 9 9 A Pressure roller strippers B132R418 WMF A ...

Page 291: ...X UNIT August 2006 3 104 3 10 DUPLEX UNIT 3 10 1 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR Pull out the duplex unit A Duplex unit front cover x3 B Duplex inverter motor x3 x1 Timing belt x1 Gear x1 B132R500 WMF B132R504 WMF A B ...

Page 292: ...DUPLEX UNIT 3 105 3 10 2 DUPLEX TRANSPORT MOTOR Pull out the duplex unit Release the lower guide plate with knob F Remove Duplex unit front cover 3 10 1 A Duplex transport motor x3 x1 Timing belt x 1 B132R506 WMF A ...

Page 293: ...10 3 DUPLEX UNIT SENSORS Duplex Entrance Sensor Pull out the duplex unit Remove A Bracket x 2 B Release harness clamp C Duplex entrance sensor x 1 Reinstallation Insert the anti static brushes into the roller holes B132R502 WMF A B C ...

Page 294: ... 1 2 Inverter Exit Sensor Remove the duplex unit 3 2 10 A Inverter unit x1 front x1 rear x1 B Reverse trigger roller assembly Rear x1 Shaft bushing x1 Front x1 Link gear x1 Spring x1 Shaft bushing x1 C Plate x2 D Cross stay x 4 B132R503 WMF A B D C ...

Page 295: ...s when re attaching To avoid breaking the tabs under the left edge of the table pull the table to the right to disengage the tabs and then remove C Transport sensor 1 x 1 x 1 D Transport sensor 2 x 1 x 1 E Inverter exit sensor x 1 x 1 x 1 Reinstallation Make sure the end tabs F of the left transport cover are engaged correctly B132R507 WMF A B C D E F F ...

Page 296: ... A Duplex unit front cover 3 10 1 B Cross stay x 1 C Right transport cover x 2 x 1 NOTE The front screw is a shoulder screw Insert the screws in the correct holes when re attaching D Transport sensor bracket x 2 E Transport sensor 3 x 1 B132R508 WMF A B C D ...

Page 297: ...DUPLEX UNIT August 2006 3 110 3 10 4 DUPLEX JOGGER MOTOR Remove A Duplex unit front cover 3 10 1 B Duplex jogger motor x2 x1 B132R505 WMF A ...

Page 298: ...3 10 3 Left transport cover 3 10 3 Duplex jogger motor 3 10 4 1 If you are replacing the belt set both jogger fence brackets at the center of the belt and tighten the screw A 2 If you are adjusting the belt loosen the screw and slide the plastic piece B on the belt to the left or right to adjust the position of the front fence then tighten the screw B140R819 WMF A B ...

Page 299: ... 11 TANDEM TRAY TRAY 1 3 11 1 TANDEM TRAY 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the tandem tray drawer A completely to separate the left B and right C sides of the tandem tray 3 Remove the left tandem tray D x 5 B140R820 WMF B140R821 WMF A B C D ...

Page 300: ...NOTE 1 When re installing the right tandem tray make sure that the wheels B ride on the slide rail C 2 When re installing the right tandem tray make sure that the tandem tray stopper D is set behind the stopper E on the frame B140R822 WMF B140R823 WMF A E D C B B ...

Page 301: ...TANDEM TRAY TRAY 1 August 2006 3 114 3 11 2 REAR FENCE RETURN SENSOR REPLACEMENT Pull out the tandem feed tray A Return sensor assembly x 1 x1 B132R623 WMF A ...

Page 302: ...Y TRAY 1 3 115 3 11 3 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR REPLACEMENT Pull out the tandem feed tray A Rear bottom plate x 1 B Back fence transport gear x 1 C Move the back fence to the right D Rear fence HP sensor x 1 B140R825 WMF D C A B ...

Page 303: ...6 3 11 4 TANDEM RIGHT TRAY PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT Remove the right tandem tray 3 11 1 A Inner cover x 2 B Side fences x 1 each C Bottom plate x 4 D Connector x 1 E Tandem right tray paper sensor x 1 B140R826 WMF B140R827 WMF A B C E D ...

Page 304: ...plate lift wire It is necessary to remove the shaft for replacing the rear bottom plate lift wire Remove the right tandem tray 3 11 11 A Remove the inner cover x 2 3 11 14 B Wire stoppers Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook C Wire covers x 1 each D Bracket x 1 x 1 bushing x 1 E Gear F Bottom plate lift wire B140R828 WMF B140R829 WMF A C D E F B ...

Page 305: ...st 2006 3 118 NOTE When re installing the bottom plate lift wire 1 Set the positioning pin A in the hole B and set the projection C in the hole D 2 Position the wire as shown E 3 Do not cross the wires B140R830 WMF E D B A C ...

Page 306: ...e used for tandem feed 1 Open the front cover 2 Completely pull out the tandem feed tray A to separate the right tandem tray B from the left tandem tray Right Tray 3 Remove the inner cover C x 2 4 Re position the side fences D x 1 each A4 Outer slot position LT Inner slot position 5 Re install the right tandem inner cover B140R831 WMF B140R832 WMF D C A B ...

Page 307: ...r A x 2 7 Remove the DC motor cover B x 5 8 Remove the rear side fence C and front side fence D x 4 ea 9 Re position the side fences x 4 ea A4 Outer slot position LT Inner slot position 10 Re install the DC motor cover and the tray cover B132R624 WMF B140R834 WMF A B C D ...

Page 308: ...position sensor bracket A x 1 For A4 set the screw in the left hole B For LT set the screw in the right hole C 12 Input the new paper size into SP5959 001 Reinstallation Do the scanner and registration adjustments see section 3 19 1 3 19 3 B132R836 WMF A A4 LT B C ...

Page 309: ...oller x 1 D Separation roller x 1 Important The operation of the FRR mechanisms for the tandem tray Tray 1 universal trays Tray 2 Tray 3 bypass tray and ARDF are similar However the only rollers that are interchangeable are the tandem and universal tray rollers Trays 1 2 3 Do not touch the surface of new rollers during replacement B132R601 WMF A B D C ...

Page 310: ... pull it away from the machine LCT entrance guide cover and right lower cover Pull out all three trays do not remove A Toner collection bottle B Vertical transport guide C Inner cover x 2 NOTE When re installing the vertical transport guide remove the lower right cover then insert from it B132R602A WMF B132R603A WMF A C B ...

Page 311: ... B Feed unit x 1 x 3 Insert your hand from the right and pull the feed unit forward NOTE To avoid hitting the unit on the sides of the machine remove it carefully and slowly Important If the paper feed motor must be replaced replace the feed unit B132R625 WMF B132R604 WMF A B ...

Page 312: ...t can be done When feeding special paper especially thick paper When the customer is experiencing feed problems 1 Remove the feed unit 3 12 2 2 Loosen the hex screw A 3 The separation roller gear B is positioned at the groove before shipping To adjust for thick paper move the separation roller gear to the left to decrease the pressure or To correct misfeeds move the separation roller gear to the r...

Page 313: ... 3 August 2006 3 126 3 12 4 PAPER END TRAY LIFT PAPER FEED SENSORS Remove Feed unit 3 12 2 A Sensor bracket x1 B Paper end sensor x1 C Tray lift sensor x1 D Sensor bracket x1 E Paper feed sensor x1 B132R606 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 314: ...August 2006 PAPER FEED TRAYS 2 3 3 127 3 12 5 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR Remove Feed unit 3 12 2 A Bracket x1 B Upper unit x4 C Vertical transport sensor x1 B132R607 WMF A B C ...

Page 315: ...IT 3 13 1 BYPASS PICK UP FEED SEPARATION ROLLER Remove right covers 3 2 5 Open the bypass tray Remove the bypass unit 3 13 3 Remove the upper unit cover 3 13 4 Remove A Pick up roller x1 B Feed roller x1 C Separation roller x1 B132R601A WMF A B C ...

Page 316: ...AUTO PAPER SIZE DETECTION SWITCHES Remove right covers 3 2 5 Open the bypass tray Disconnect A Front hinge B Rear hinge Remove C Bypass tray x1 D Bypass table x2 Pawls x2 E Paper size detection board Pawl x1 x1 B132R610 WMF B132R611 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 317: ...BYPASS UNIT August 2006 3 130 3 13 3 BYPASS UNIT Remove right covers 3 2 5 Open the bypass tray Remove A Bypass unit x4 x2 B132R626 WMF A ...

Page 318: ...August 2006 BYPASS UNIT 3 131 3 13 4 BYPASS PAPER END SENSOR FEED SENSOR Remove Bypass unit 3 13 3 A Unit upper cover Release x1 B Bypass paper end sensor x1 C Feed sensor x1 x1 B132R613 WMF A B C ...

Page 319: ...UNIT August 2006 3 132 3 13 5 BYPASS FEED CLUTCH Remove Bypass unit 3 13 3 A Bypass feed clutch x1 x1 Reinstallation Make sure the arm B fits correctly into the notch bracket C of the clutch B132R614 WMF A B C ...

Page 320: ...OARDS 3 133 3 14 BOARDS 3 14 1 CONTROLLER UNIT CAUTION Before you start this procedure turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord Remove A Disconnect the ARDF B Controller unit x3 B132R710 WMF A B ...

Page 321: ... Always touch a metal surface to discharge any static on your hands before you touch the controller board Work carefully when removing the NVRAM to avoid damaging other components on the controller board or short circuiting the pins of other chips A Options slot covers x 2 each B Controller board x 2 3 14 1 C NVRAM Pawls x2 D 256 MB memory Reinstallation If you replace the controller board put the...

Page 322: ...95 Machine Serial Number Error may appear If this occurs Enter the SP mode and do SP5801 001 to reset the memory to the defaults All Switch the machine off on and start from Step 1 Important WHEN SC195 OCCURS THE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE INPUT PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR 5 Execute SP5825 to download the data uploaded from the old NVRAM NOTE If the machine returns SC195 Machine Serial Num...

Page 323: ...BOARDS August 2006 3 136 3 14 4 CONTROLLER BOX COVER BICU IOB Remove Rear covers 3 2 6 A Controller box cover x17 B IOB x20 x9 C BICU x11 x9 1 2 B132R706 WMF B132R714 WMF A B C ...

Page 324: ... BICU make sure that the DIP switches are set to the correct positions 120V machines Make sure only DIP switch 1 is ON 220 230 240V machines Make sure only DIP switch 2 is ON Example A 220 230 240V machine only DIP SW 2 is ON the others are OFF ON OFF ...

Page 325: ...BOARDS August 2006 3 138 3 14 5 RDS BOARD JUMPER Remove Controller unit 3 14 1 Interface board 3 14 6 A RDS board x x B Jumper B132R709 WMF A B ...

Page 326: ...2006 BOARDS 3 139 3 14 6 INTERFACE BOARD MOTHER BOARD 1 Remove the controller unit 3 14 4 2 Remove the RAPI EXT board A x4 3 Remove the HDD 3 15 4 Remove the mother board B x5 x12 B132R708 WMF B132R713 WMF A B ...

Page 327: ...BOARDS August 2006 3 140 3 14 7 HVPS PFC BOARD Remove the rear lower cover 3 2 6 Remove A HVPS and PFC board assembly x22 x10 x23 B HVPS x8 C PFC board x6 B132R720 WMF A B C ...

Page 328: ...August 2006 BOARDS 3 141 3 14 8 PSU Remove the rear covers 3 2 6 Remove HVPS PFC board assembly 3 14 7 A PSU x7 x8 B132R722 WMF A ...

Page 329: ...BOARDS August 2006 3 142 3 14 9 AC DRIVE BOARD Remove left lower cover 3 2 3 A AC drive board x8 x6 B132R727 WMF A ...

Page 330: ... 14 10TRANSFER MOTOR DRIVE DRIVE MOTOR BOARDS Remove rear covers 3 2 6 Open and lock the controller box 3 2 11 A Board assembly x5 x21 x2 B DRB Drive Board C TMB Transfer Motor Board D DMB Drive Motor Board B132R716 WMF A B C D ...

Page 331: ...er 3 14 4 A HDD unit x8 x4 Important Mark the harness connectors before you disconnect them They must be reconnected at their connection points 1 Reassemble the machine 2 Enter the SP mode and do SP5832 001 to format the hard disks Formatting on the machine partitions the hard disks properly 3 Do SP5853 001 to download the fixed stamps from the ROM to the HDD 4 Switch the machine off and on to ena...

Page 332: ...ed in temporary files created automatically during copy job sorting and jam recovery Such data is stored on the HDD in a special format so it cannot normally be read but can be recovered with illegal methods Reinstallation Explain to the customer that the following information stored on the HDD is lost when the HDD is replaced Document server documents Fixed stamps Document server Address book The...

Page 333: ... PCU MOTOR DRUM MOTOR 1 Remove the rear covers 3 2 6 2 Open and lock the controller box 3 2 11 3 Remove the PCU stand A stored under the machine 4 Remove the drum motor shaft tool B shorter tool from the bottom of the PCU stand B132I718A WMF A B ...

Page 334: ... arrow C on the short tool counter clockwise until the holes are aligned NOTE You must fasten the short tool 10 Use the M3x9 screw to fasten the screws to lock the shaft D 11 Remove the drum motor screws E x3 12 Turn the drum motor hub F counter clockwise and remove the drum motor shaft 13 Remove the drum motor x1 Reinstallation 1 Attach the short tool to the drum shaft and fasten it with the scre...

Page 335: ...MOTORS August 2006 3 148 3 16 2 PAPER TRANSFER MOTOR Remove rear covers 3 2 6 Open and lock controller box 3 2 11 A Paper transfer motor x1 x4 B132R717 WMF A ...

Page 336: ...3 149 3 16 3 IMAGE TRANSFER MOTOR Remove rear covers 3 2 6 Open and lock controller box 3 2 11 Remove the image transfer board assembly 3 14 10 A Image transfer motor Spring x1 x1 x3 Timing belt x1 Gear x1 B132R718 WMF A ...

Page 337: ...TE TONER DISTRIBUTION MOTOR Remove rear covers 3 2 6 Open and lock the controller box 3 2 11 Remove the HVPS and PFC board assembly 3 14 7 A Waste toner motor assembly x4 B Waste toner transport motor x1 x2 C Waste toner distribution motor x2 x1 B132R721 WMF A B C ...

Page 338: ...Open the controller box and lock it 3 2 11 Remove HVPS and PFC board assembly 3 14 7 Remove PSU 3 14 8 Tray 1 A Bracket x1 B Bottom plate lift motor Tray 1 x3 x1 Trays 2 3 Remove HVPS and PFC board assembly 3 14 7 Remove PSU 3 14 8 Remove C Bottom plate lift motor Tray 2 3 x1 x2 B132R723A WMF A B C ...

Page 339: ...6 3 152 3 16 6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR Remove rear covers 3 2 6 Open and lock the controller box 3 2 11 Remove the Transfer board assembly 3 14 10 A Support stay x21 x1 x4 B ITB drive motor x3 x1 B132R719A WMF B132R725 WMF A B ...

Page 340: ...August 2006 AIR FILTERS 3 153 3 17 AIR FILTERS 3 17 1 TONER HOPPER FILTER Remove Toner hopper 3 2 7 Motor cover 3 6 5 A Toner hopper filter B132R212 WMF A ...

Page 341: ... 154 3 17 2 OZONE FILTER DUST FILTERS Remove A Cover x1 B Inner cover C Dust filters x3 D Ozone filter Reinstallation Make sure you install the filters as shown If you do not you cannot reattach the cover B B132R729 WMF A B C D ...

Page 342: ...August 2006 AIR FILTERS 3 155 3 17 3 SCANNER FILTER Remove A Top left cover x1 B Scanner filter B132R730 WMF A B ...

Page 343: ...ARDF August 2006 3 156 3 18 ARDF 3 18 1 ARDF COVERS A Open the feed cover B Front cover x 3 Tabs x4 Press down the tabs C Rear cover x 2 Tabs x2 Press down the tabs B132R104 WMF A B C ...

Page 344: ... ARDF 3 157 3 18 2 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT A Open the feed cover B Remove the snap fitting C Pull toward you slightly to disconnect the rear end of the shaft D Disconnect the front end of the shaft B132R105 WMF A B C D ...

Page 345: ...2 A E ring B Cover C Slide bushings out Reassembly Make sure that the tab on the front guide plate is above the pick up roller unit D E Feed belt holder F Feed belt NOTE Remove slowly Do not let the springs fall G ARDF pick up roller B132R106 WMF B132R107 WMF B132R106A WMF A B C E F G D ...

Page 346: ...st 2006 ARDF 3 159 3 18 4 BOTTOM PLATE POSITION SENSOR Remove Remove front cover 3 18 1 Original feed unit 3 18 2 A Pin screw x1 B Raise the bottom plate C Bottom plate position sensor x1 B132R117 WMF A B C ...

Page 347: ...IDTH SKEW CORRECTION SEPARATION SENSORS A Open the feed cover B Guide plate x 3 C Width sensor bracket x 2 D Original width sensors x 5 E Interval sensor x 1 F Skew correction sensor x 1 G Separation sensor x 1 B132R110 WMF B132R111 WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 348: ...INAL LENGTH SENSORS Remove Front rear covers 3 18 1 Clip rings x2 A Remove the original tray B Lower cover x4 C Original length sensors B5 original length x1 A4 original length x1 LG original length x1 B132R109A WMF B132R109B WMF A B C ...

Page 349: ...ust 2006 3 162 3 18 7 FEED COVER ORIGINAL SET BOTTOM PLATE PICK UP ROLLER HP UPPER INVERTER SENSORS Remove Front rear covers 3 18 1 A Original tray x1 x2 Bushings x2 B Lift tray x1 Pin screw x1 B132R116 WMF A B ...

Page 350: ...August 2006 ARDF 3 163 A Original set sensor x1 x1 B Upper inverter sensor x1 x1 C Feed cover sensor x1 D Pick up roller HP sensor x1 E Bottom plate position sensor x1 B132R118 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 351: ...F August 2006 3 164 3 18 8 ARDF POSITION SENSOR APS START SENSOR A Raise the ARDF to the vertical position Remove B APS bracket x1 C ARDF position sensor x1 x1 D APS start sensor x1 x1 B132R125 WMF A B D C ...

Page 352: ... ARDF 3 165 3 18 9 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION EXIT SENSORS Remove the front and rear covers 3 18 1 Remove the original feed unit 3 18 2 A Rotate the inverter guide 180 degrees B Original guide plate x4 B132R112 WMF A B ...

Page 353: ...ARDF August 2006 3 166 Remove A Bracket x1 B Original registration sensor x1 C Bracket x1 D Original exit sensor x1 B132R113 WMF B132R115 WMF A B C D ...

Page 354: ...3 18 10 ARDF SEPARATION ROLLER Open the feed cover Remove the original feed unit 3 18 2 Remove A Separation roller cover Use the tip of a small flathead screwdriver B Separation roller x 1 C Torque limiter B132R108 WMF A B C ...

Page 355: ...t cover 3 18 1 3 Raise the ARDF A to the vertical position 4 Pull off the white cover B Velcro fasteners 5 Release the stopper pin C of the transport guide D 6 Remove the transport belt assembly E Pin screw x1 Timing belt x1 Reinstallation Attach the timing belt as shown then insert the pin screw F as shown B132R102 WMF B132R126 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 356: ...nter E then squeeze the belt to bring the rollers together 6 While squeezing the belt and rollers together in the center tighten screws C and D This compresses the spring and releases tension on the belt Important To avoid stripping the threads of the screws do not apply excessive torque to these screws 7 Release the belt and make sure that the belt is loose and that the rollers do not move Repeat...

Page 357: ...the shaft E over the top of the bracket 13 Pull the shaft F out of the belt 14 Pull the belt G toward the front to remove it 15 Slide the new belt over the assembly 16 Insert the shaft F into the new belt snap the shaft into its brackets and push in the shaft bearings 17 Make sure that studs on the underside of the belt H are aligned with the grooves of the Teflon rollers on each end of the shaft ...

Page 358: ...oid stripping the threads of the screws do not apply excessive torque 5 Remove the special tool and fit it onto the REAR NOTE If the Teflon sleeve has been reattached at D remove it Do not reattach the sleeve until after adjusting the belt tension The special tool does not fit over the rear end with the Teflon sleeve attached 6 Slowly loosen the rear lock screw E until you see the tip of the shaft...

Page 359: ...g the White Cover 1 With its white side down set the cover A on the exposure glass 2 Make sure the upper left corner is aligned with the arrow at the corner of the exposure glass 3 Close the ARDF B on top of the cover B132R103 WMF A B ...

Page 360: ...August 2006 ARDF 3 173 3 18 12 ARDF CONTROL BOARD Remove ARDF Rear cover 3 18 1 A ARDF control board x17 x4 B132R124 WMF A ...

Page 361: ...ARDF August 2006 3 174 3 18 13ARDF BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR Open the feed cover Remove ARDF rear cover 3 18 1 A ARDF bottom plate lift motor x1 x2 Timing belt x1 B132R121 WMF A ...

Page 362: ...e removed before the transport motor A Screw x1 B Feed motor bracket x4 x1 Timing belt x1 Spring x1 C Feed motor x2 D Transport motor bracket x2 x1 Timing belt x1 Spring x1 E Transport motor x2 Reinstallation Reinstallation is easier if you first set the spring tension with the screws and then fasten the motor bracket with screws B132R123 WMF A D E B C ...

Page 363: ...ARDF August 2006 3 176 3 18 15ARDF PICK UP ROLLER LIFT MOTOR Open the feed cover Remove ARDF rear cover 3 18 1 A Pick up roller lift motor x2 x1 Timing belt x1 B132R120 WMF A ...

Page 364: ... on the exposure glass and make a copy 2 Check the magnification ratio 3 Use SP4008 Sub Scan Mag to adjust if necessary Standard 1 0 Scanner leading edge and side to side registration 1 Place the test chart C 4 on the exposure glass and make a copy 2 Check the leading edge and side to side registration 3 Adjust with the following SP modes if necessary Standard 0 2mm SP mode Sub Scan Reg SP4010 001...

Page 365: ... photo mode Color displacement cannot be checked correctly in text mode 5 Use a magnification scope to check the yellow and cyan vertical lines If they exactly overwrite the black line at the edges of the copy exit the SP mode No adjustment is necessary If the yellow and cyan lines significantly extend beyond the black lines go to the next step 6 Press SP Mode to return to the SP mode 7 Do SP4932 ...

Page 366: ...ble and make a copy 2 Check the registration and adjust using the following SP modes if necessary SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range SP6006 001 ADF Main Reg Adj 3 0 mm SP6006 003 ADF Sub Reg Adj 29 steps SP6006 005 ADF Buck Adj Front 20 steps SP6006 006 ADF Buck Adj Back 20 steps SP6006 007 ADF TEdge EMargin 20 steps B146R964 WMF B A B146R965 WMF A Leading edge registration B Side to side regis...

Page 367: ...ation for each paper feed station The side to side registration for the LCT can be adjusted with SP1002 006 Adjustment Standards Leading edge sub scan direction 3 0 mm Side to side main scan direction 2 0 mm Paper Registration Standard The registration in both main and sub scan directions may fluctuate within the following tolerance 1st side Sub scan direction 0 1 5 mm Main scan direction 0 2 mm 2...

Page 368: ...leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1001 Select the adjustment conditions paper type and process line speed Input the value and press the key Check the leading edge adjustment by printing Pattern 10 with SP2109 4 Do the side to side registration adjustment Check the side to side registration and adjust it with SP1002 Select the adjustment conditions for the paper feed station Input the ...

Page 369: ...djustment Before you start this procedure make sure that the exposure glass is clean Also make sure that the ITB is installed correctly especially at the edge 1 Load A3 DLT paper and select full color mode 2 Start SP2109 002 and select pattern 1 1 dot line then press the OK button 3 Press the Copy Window button Then select A3 DLT paper and press the Start button to print the pattern NOTE Make sure...

Page 370: ...e display to switch to the normal copier screen 4 Select the paper size and color then press the Start key to print the pattern 5 Press the SP Screen 6 Do SP2109 002 and select pattern 0 and press the Execute button 7 Check the test pattern to determine whether the image is perpendicular at the corners If the image pattern is correct no further adjustment is necessary or If the pattern is not corr...

Page 371: ...resembles the left pattern 1 turn the laser unit slightly counter clockwise in the B direction If the skew resembles the right pattern 2 turn the laser unit slightly clockwise in the A direction Boss 1 Boss 2 provides the reference points for correct alignment 6 Reassemble the copier and print another trim pattern to confirm that the skew has been corrected A B B132R902 WMF TE TE TE LE LE LE Corre...

Page 372: ...nce Adjustment The adjustment uses only Offset values Important Never change Option values default value is 0 Highlight Low ID Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10 level scale Middle Middle ID Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10 level scale Shadow High ID Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10 level scale ID max Level 10 in the C4 chart 10 level scale affects the entire image density Offset The ...

Page 373: ... level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C 4 chart 2 Middle Middle ID K C M and Y Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C 4 chart 3 Shadow High ID K C M and Y Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C 4 chart 4 Highlight Low ID K C M and Y Adjust the offset value so that dirty background is not visible o...

Page 374: ...ble on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that of level 3 on the C 4 chart Text Letter Mode Full Color Step Item to Adjust Level on the C 4 chart K Adjustment Standard 1 ID max K C M and Y Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C 4 chart 2 Middle Middle ID K C M and Y Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matche...

Page 375: ...e C 4 chart 3 Shadow High ID K Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C 4 chart 4 Highlight Low ID K Adjust the offset value so that dirty background is not visible on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter that of level 3 on the C 4 chart After Shadow adjustment if text in the test pattern does not print clearly Check to determine wh...

Page 376: ...42 SP1104 043 SP1104 044 SP1104 061 SP1104 062 SP1104 063 SP1104 064 Adjustment Procedure 1 Do the ACC adjustment for the printer mode 2 Turn the main power off and on 3 Enter SP mode 4 Touch Printer SP 5 Select SP1102 001 and select the print mode that you want to adjust 6 To review the image quality for these settings do SP1103 001 to print out a tone control test sheet 7 Adjust the color densit...

Page 377: ...0 x 600 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 16 Photo 1200 x 1200 1 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 16 600 x 600 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 1800 x 600 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 16 K Test sheet Text 1200 x 1200 1 3 5 6 9 11 12 15 16 C 4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 600 x 600 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 13 14 1800 x 600 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 12 13 Photo 1200 x 1200 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13 600 x 600 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13 1800 x 600 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 12 14 C Test sheet Tex...

Page 378: ...ear press 1993 press and then press Clear Stop 5 times 2 Press Touch Screen Adjust or press 1 3 Use a pointed not sharp tool to press the upper left mark 4 Press the lower right mark after it appears 5 Press a few spots on the touch screen to confirm that the marker appears exactly where the screen is touched If the mark does not appear where the screen is touched press Cancel and repeat from Step...

Page 379: ... be corrupted Because of this it may not be possible to restart the downloading program In addition if the GW controller software cannot be downloaded other software on other SD cards cannot be downloaded However it may be possible to restart the program without replacing the board by setting DIP SW 1 on the controller to ON and re starting 4 1 2 RECOVERY METHODS When an error occurs during downlo...

Page 380: ... Set DIP SW 1 to ON and retry Replace RAM DIMM Replace controller board Controller ROM update error 5 05 Download Error E05 Power OFF ON Error occurs when writing to the device Cycle the machine OFF ON Set DIP SW 1 to ON and retry Replace RAM DIMM Replace controller board Controller ROM update error 6 06 Download Error E06 Power OFF ON CPU clock error Turn the machine power OFF ON Set controller D...

Page 381: ...rd is not correct or power failure interrupted download Use the correct card If power failure caused the failure remove the card and insert another Download dysfunction 4 33 No Valid Data E33 Card version error Attempted to download program using a card with the wrong version number Use the correct card Download dysfunction 5 34 No Valid Data E34 Specification error DOM card set in EXP machine or ...

Page 382: ...ot be accessed Turn the machine power OFF Then install a new System SD Card into SD card slot 1 Download invalid 50 No Valid Data E50 The source data for the update could not be authenticated Use the correct SD card Remote ROM update failure 1 51 no display The source data for the ROM update is corrupted because the machine is operating and an SC code has been issued Turn the machine power OFF ON ...

Page 383: ... to cancel a fusing unit SC code to return the machine to normal operation after you repair the machine SP5990 SMC Printout Prints the SMC Report Some SC codes logged SPs are listed only in the SMC Report and do not appear on the operation panel display SP7401 SC Codes Displays the total number of SCs logged SP7403 SC History Displays information about the 10 most recent service calls Code Total D...

Page 384: ...ge amount of K skew Large amount of skew in every color Print a trim pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 10 Density too light Print a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 1 Check the images 2 Failure ITB scratched Replace the ITB ITB misaligned Reinstall ITB SP2153 023 set to 1 OFF Set SP2153 023 to 0 ON Image density too light Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 1 Check the images 1...

Page 385: ... Pattern 1 Check the images ITB misaligned Reinstall ITB Image density too light Output a coverage pattern with SP2109 002 Pattern 1 Check the images 41 43 Intersecting lines of the grid pattern Dirty abnormal images Output Pattern 1 18 or 20 with SP2109 002 and check the images ITB misaligned Reinstall ITB SP2153 023 set to 1 OFF Set SP2153 023 to 0 ON The settings of sensor lights 1 2 3 are diff...

Page 386: ...ngs of sensor lights 1 2 3 are different from the default setting which is 2050 These settings are done with SP2153 020 022 Dirty abnormal images Output Pattern 1 18 or 20 with SP2109 002 and check the images 61 Time out of detecting MUSIC pattern Connector loose Connector dirty Harness defective Other Check the ID sensor and its connection 07 04 ...

Page 387: ...to 0 3 Do SP2109 002 Test Pattern then select and print pattern 10 Trim Area 4 Do SP2101 001 so the left and right margins are 1 5 mm If the image is cut off at the edge use the 1 dot pattern 5 If any color is separated from black more than 1 mm do SP2101 002 004 to bring each color closer to K Important Black skew can cause part of the image to shift off the paper Normally the settings of SP2102 ...

Page 388: ... the Copy Window button Then select A3 DLT paper and push the Start button to print the pattern NOTE Make sure that Full Color Mode is selected before you push the Start button In the example above the dotted lines are magenta cyan or yellow and the solid lines are black 3 Lay the test pattern flat and use a lupe to examine the grid patterns B132R930 WMF B132R942 WMF Paper Feed Direction ...

Page 389: ...line is to the right of the black line on the test pattern SP Action Decrease the value 2101 002 M 2101 003 C 2101 004 Y Unit of adjustment One dot 43 2 µm Increase the value 5 Correct the errors in the horizontal lines this corrects errors in the sub scan direction See the following table for how to do this SP Action Increase the value 2101 013 M 2101 014 C 2101 015 Y Unit of adjustment One line ...

Page 390: ...ush the Start button to print the pattern NOTE Make sure that Full Color Mode is selected before you push the Start button In the example above the dotted lines are magenta cyan or yellow and the solid lines are black 3 Correct the skew See the following table for how to do this Right SP Action Increase the value 2104 001 M 2104 002 C 2104 003 Y Decrease the value B132R931 WMF Paper Feed Direction...

Page 391: ...olor was aligned correctly If 1 is not shown then please see section 4 2 1 Color Registration at the Left and Right Folds of the Test Pattern Do this procedure after you complete Color Registration Error Correction and Color Skew Error Correction 1 Do SP 2109 002 and print pattern 1 1 dot line on A3 DLT paper NOTE Make sure that Full Color Mode is selected before you press the Start button 2 Fold ...

Page 392: ...and right folds If there is a gap between the black lines and a colored line measure it and correct it with SPs as shown in the tables below Left Right Remarks SP Action Gap on the left is different from the gap on the right Gaps are the same or different 2112 001 M Left Fold 2112 002 M Right Fold 2112 003 C Left Fold 2112 004 C Right Fold 2112 005 Y Left Fold 2112 006 Y Right Fold Unit of adjustm...

Page 393: ...he operation panel for a developer set error SC336 SC339 Check the PCUs and confirm that all the film seals have been removed to release the developer from the developer cartridge 4 Did Not Execute SP Default Displayed when you open this SP code No action is necessary 8 Toner Supply Abnormal At the end of the toner filling cycle the toner end sensor detected no toner Check the toner supply unit 9 ...

Page 394: ...sensor SC436 to SC439 A problem is detected with a potential sensor during calibration Potential Control SC410 to SC413 The development gamma is out of range not between 0 3 and 6 0 for a color SC414 to SC417 Vk is out of range not within 150V for a color If the development potential is less than Vk toner is not applied to the drum SC420 to SC423 Vd cannot be adjusted to the target voltage for a d...

Page 395: ...epresents a color K M C Y If a problem occurs the code will appear in the column for the color PCU where the error has occurred For example If a Vdhome error Code 15 see folloeing table occurs in the M PCU the display will look like this 10151010 Or if an ID sensor error Code 21 see following table occurs in the Y PCU 10101021 NOTE 99 displays while SP3821 executes Important Noise and static elect...

Page 396: ...gain If the replaced PCU does not function normally then the problem is on the machine side or the potential sensor relay board is malfunctioning If the replaced PCU functions normally then there may be a problem with the drum or the charge unit Replace the PCU Potential Sensors 17 VdHome Calculation Error VdHome could not be calculated This is a software calculation error not a hardware problem S...

Page 397: ...fter 20 attempts Bias path defective Charge gap abnormal too large Charge roller dirty Drum coated with film Make sure that the bias path and drum are grounded correctly Check the drum and both ends of the charger roller for any foreign matter Check the gap between the charge roller and the drum to confirm that it is not too large If the grounds and gap is normal clean the charger roller or replac...

Page 398: ... do the procedure again If the machine returns SC410 to SC413 and process control does not end normally do this procedure 1 Change the settings for SP3301 001 to 004 from 1 PID to 0 Fixed 2 Do SP2109 002 and select Pattern 12 3 Change the settings of SP2109 005 to 008 from 63 to 0 except for the color which showed a development gamma error 4 Return to the copy window and do the test print at least...

Page 399: ... the machine ON and repeat Steps 1 to 3 to print the coverage test pattern 8 If normal operation cannot be recovered Replace the image transfer power pack Open the development unit to see if there is too much or too little developer If the developer supply is normal remove the toner end sensor to see if there is toner in the sub hopper If the sub hopper is empty the powder pump is defective Replac...

Page 400: ...n If the machine fails to return SC240 to SC243 you can eliminate a defective LD as the cause of the problem 62 Vr Error Vr residual voltage greater than 200V Drum deteriorated Toner shield glass dirty Open the front door remove the toner supply unit and check the toner shield glass for dirt Clean the glass then do SP3820 001 If this does not solve the problem replace the drum 63 Vd Adjust Error V...

Page 401: ... or image processing components The following two adjustments calibrate these differences to within acceptable standards 1 Color Adjustment with Connection Kit Color Test Chart P N VSST9501 This adjusts the scanner gamma curve of each machine A B connected with the Copy Connector B328 The scanner gamma curve is adjusted to equalize the scanner input with the scanner output 2 ACC Auto Color Calibra...

Page 402: ...e Completed message appears Important If Completed appears immediately after pressing Execute the adjustment may have failed Do the procedure again 3 After doing SP4954 001 do the ACC procedure For more see Section 1 Installation Pg 1 33 To adjust the sub machine 4 Do Steps 1 to 3 for the sub machine Compare the results 5 Set the two machines for full color and do some sample color copies 6 Compar...

Page 403: ...rvice Mode Lock to OFF After he or she logs in Operator Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Service Mode Lock OFF This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes The Service engineer can do servicing on the machine and turn the machine OFF and ON It is not necessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned ON 2 If you must use the printer ...

Page 404: ... and ON or the machine reboots automatically See below When a Level D SC code occurs When a Level D SC occurs a screen opens on the operation panel to tell the operator An error occurred The job in progress will be erased The machine will reboot automatically after approximately 30 seconds The operator can wait until the machine reboots automatically or press Reset on the screen to reset the machi...

Page 405: ...ay the SC number If this occurs check the SC number after leaving the SP mode The machine reboots automatically when the machine issues a Level D SC code This is done for Level D SC codes only 4 3 2 CAUTION Never turn OFF the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory press the operation switch to switch the power OFF wait for the power LED to...

Page 406: ...sensor defective Harness between scanner motor and scanner I O board disconnected or broken Scanner home position error 2 SC121 D The scanner home position sensor did not go ON after the scanner moved forward 1 mm and the feeler entered the HP sensor Scanner motor defective Scanner HP sensor disconnected defective Black level detection error SC141 D During AGC the value for black level was not wit...

Page 407: ...occurs IDU is not recognized within the prescribed time during scanning IPU board defective defective connection between ASIC and DFID defective LSYNC signal Scanner fan lock SC180 D 001 One of the fan motors next to the exposure lamp did not switch ON within 0 5 sec after the CPU issued the ON signal 002 The scanner fan motor next to the SIOB did not switch ON within 0 5 sec after the CPU issued ...

Page 408: ...GH inactive while the laser diode is firing Harness to polygon motor driver board disconnected defective Polygon motor defective Polygon motor driver board defective Polygon motor error 4 Polygon motor lock signal unstable SC205 D When the polygon motor switches ON or after the speed of the motor changes the polygon motor lock signal goes HIGH inactive Harness to polygon motor driver board disconn...

Page 409: ...on GAVD ASIC ASIC on the BICU defective LD driver defective LDB defective BICU defective Check board connections replace Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1 Y Leading Edge LD0 SC222 D While the polygon motor is rotating normally no synchronizing detection signal is output for LD0 yellow leading edge even after the laser diode has been firing for 2 sec Harness between the laser synchronizing det...

Page 410: ...o detection GAVD ASIC on the BICU defective LD driver defective LDB defective BICU defective Check board connections replace Laser Synchronization Detector Error 1 C Leading Edge LD0 SC226 D While the polygon motor is rotating normally no synchronizing detection signal is output for LD0 cyan leading edge even after the laser diode has been firing for 2 sec Harness between the laser synchronizing d...

Page 411: ...ssert even after 5 sec when Images are created on the drum MUSIC patterns are created on the transfer belt The BICU received a LOW feedback signal but the signal remained LOW indicating the lasers were still operating even after creation of the next image should have started GAVD ASIC on the BICU defective PCI I F on the IPU defective ASIC on the IOB defective Check board connections replace FGATE...

Page 412: ...reated on the drum MUSIC patterns are created on the transfer belt The BICU received no feedback LOW signal from the LD unit to indicate that the lasers started firing at the prescribed time to create the patterns GAVD ASIC on the BICU defective PCI I F on the IPU defective ASIC on the IOB defective Controller board disconnected defective Harness between the BICU LDB unit disconnected loose or def...

Page 413: ...ack remains LOW for C write SC237 After the start of timing to create the cyan image the PFGATE register of the GAVD ASIC does not assert even after 5 sec when Images are created on the drum MUSIC patterns are created on the transfer belt The BICU received a LOW feedback signal but the signal remained LOW indicating the lasers were still operating even after creation of the next image should have ...

Page 414: ...ec or It detected a temperature higher than 100 C for more than 1 sec Thermistor disconnected causes extremely low temperature reading Thermistor damaged and short circuited causes extremely high temperature reading BICU defective SC270 C Mirror motor upper lower limit Y Yellow SC271 C Mirror motor upper lower limit M Magenta SC272 C Mirror motor upper lower limit C Cyan The pulse rate of the mirr...

Page 415: ...PC unit and the ground If there is no conductivity between the OPC unit and ground replace the OPC unit 5 If there is no charge PWM signal replace the harness and or BICU SC312 D Charge development error 1 K SC313 D Charge development error 2 M SC314 D Charge development error 3 C SC315 D Charge development error 4 Y 500 ms after the black magenta cyan and yellow drums start to rotate the machine ...

Page 416: ... is no output from the terminal replace the high voltage power supply or If there is output from the terminal test the resistance between the high voltage cable and the ground If resistance is 0 or nearly 0 check the high voltage harness for defects and replace it if necessary If replacing the harness does not solve the problem 4 Test the resistance between the development unit terminal and the gr...

Page 417: ...he TD sensor for cyan SP3801 006 to initialize the TD sensor for yellow SC340 D Toner cartridge set error 1 K SC341 D Toner cartridge set error 2 M SC342 D Toner cartridge set error 3 C SC343 D Toner cartridge set error 4 Y The machine cannot read the ID chip of the black magenta cyan or yellow toner cartridge Black magenta cyan or yellow toner cartridge set incorrectly 1 Open the front door 2 Pre...

Page 418: ...alize the new black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor Execute SP3820 001 to do auto process control manually SC364 D TD sensor Vt low error 1 K SC365 D TD sensor Vt low error 2 M SC366 D TD sensor Vt low error 3 C SC367 D TD sensor Vt low error 4 Y The Vt value of the black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor is below 0 5V for 10 counts TD sensor harness disconnected loose defective A drawer connector...

Page 419: ...zed correctly 4 Check the TD sensor connector 5 Check the TD sensor connector and harness between the TD sensor and PCU for damage Replace it if necessary 6 Check the drawer PCU connector 7 Replace the TD sensor 8 After replacing the TD sensor Do SP3801 003 006 to initialize the new black magenta cyan or yellow TD sensor Execute SP3820 001 to do auto process control manually SC396 D Drum motor err...

Page 420: ...ta cyan or yellow is not within range 0 3 to 6 0 Process control halts when this SC is issued Toner density not normal Refer to the procedure for process control self check error codes 55 to 59 to 59 and 61 section 4 2 4 Potential sensor defective Laser diode not firing ITB separation for CMY abnormal Transfer power pack defective ID sensor defective SC414 D ID sensor error 6 Development start vol...

Page 421: ...ter exposure of the ID sensor patterns Toner density low SC432 C Potential sensor error 1 Vr K SC433 C Potential sensor error 2 Vr M SC434 C Potential sensor error 3 Vr C SC435 C Potential sensor error 4 Vr Y Vr 200V The residual voltage Vr the amount of voltage that remains on the surface of the drum after the Quenching Lamp fires is greater than 200V Toner density low SC436 D Potential sensor er...

Page 422: ...oard defective ITB overloaded Encoder strip on the front edge of the belt damaged ITB lift motor error SC446 D The state of the ITB lift sensor does not change its state switching from OFF to ON or vice versa even after the ITB lift motor starts rotating ITB lift sensor dirty disconnected defective ITB lift motor disconnected defective Transfer power pack output error SC450 D An interrupt checks t...

Page 423: ...t the waste toner bottle is full Remove waste toner bottle empty it Waste toner transport motor error SC485 D The lock signal of the waste toner transport motor remains HIGH for more than 600 ms Waste toner transport motor defective Waste toner bottle set error SC487 D The set sensor of the waste toner bottle remains LOW for more than 500 ms The sensor goes HIGH when the bottle is installed correc...

Page 424: ...lack PCU was not within the prescribed range 0 5V to 4 2V Temperature and humidity sensor harness disconnected loose defective Temperature and humidity sensor defective Temperature and humidity sensor error 2 SC498 C The thermistor output of the temperature and humidity sensor at below the waste toner bottle was not within the prescribed range 0 5V to 4 2V Temperature and humidity sensor harness d...

Page 425: ...ers the tray lift sensor does not go off within 1 5 sec The lower limit sensor of the tandem tray does not detect the lower limit within 10 sec Tray lift motor defective or disconnected Paper or other obstacle trapped between tray and motor Pick up solenoid disconnected or blocked by an obstacle Tray 1 feed error SC503 B The lift sensor is not activated within 10 seconds after the tray lift motor ...

Page 426: ...in 500 ms Paper loaded incorrectly Back fence motor harness disconnected loose defective Back fence motor defective Paper blocking sensors Paper stuck between tray and motor Back fence close back fence open sensor harnesses disconnected loose or defective Back fence close back fence open sensor defective Paper or other obstacle is interfering with movement of the fence LCT tray error SC510 B When ...

Page 427: ...K signal is not detected for a duration of one second after the motor START signal is sent Fusing Exit Motor connecter is not connected correctly Fusing Exit Motor torque is too high or too low Fusing Exit Motor is defective Fan error 1 fusing cooling fan motor SC530 D The BICU does not receive the lock signal 5 seconds after the fusing unit fan switches ON Fusing cooling fan disconnected defectiv...

Page 428: ... has been ON for 3 hours Peltier Cooling Fan Motor is defective Heating roller thermistor 1 error 1 Poor connection SC541 A The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor does not reach 130 C after 10 tries and 65 sec have elapsed Heating roller thermistor harness connection loose disconnected defective Defective heating roller thermistor Heating roller thermistor 1 error 2 No warmup SC...

Page 429: ...hermistor damaged or out of position Fusing lamp disconnected broken Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code Heating roller thermistor 2 error 1 Thermistor disconnected SC546 A The temperature measured by the heating roller thermistor does not reach 0 C after 45 sec and remains over this temperature for 10 readings Loose connection of the heating roller thermistor Defective heating roller thermisto...

Page 430: ...5810 to cancel the SC fusing code Heating roller thermistor 2 error 4 Hardware High Temperature SC550 A The thermistor detected a temperature over 260 C TRIAC short IOB defective BICU defective Fusing temperature control is erratic Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code Pressure roller thermistor error 1 SC551 A The temperature measured by the pressure roller thermistor does not reach 0 C for 200 ...

Page 431: ...ains ON SC556 A After hot roller reaches warmup temperature the pressure roller fusing lamp remains for 6 sec while the hot roller is not rotating Thermistor damaged or out of position Fusing lamp disconnected broken Hot roller thermistor error 1 Thermistor disconnected SC561 A The temperature measured by the hot roller thermistor does not reach the prescribed warm up temperature within 100 sec Lo...

Page 432: ... temperature control is erratic Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code Hot roller thermistor error 5 Lamp remains ON SC565 A After hot roller reaches warmup temperature the hot roller fusing lamp remains for 6300 sec while the hot roller is not rotating Thermistor damaged or out of position Fusing lamp disconnected broken Do SP5810 to cancel the SC fusing code Double feed sensor error SC585 C The ...

Page 433: ...tries failed Connection cable between mailbox and finisher disconnected defective Finisher main board defective BICU defective PSU defective LCT communication error SC622 D Communication between the copier and LCT is interrupted An ACK NCK signal was not received within 100 ms after a data frame is sent and 3 retries failed Connection cable between the LCT and copier is disconnected defective LCT ...

Page 434: ...lation of the device a message alerts user to a backup RAM error Device control board defective Device control board backup battery defective Key card counter device error 4 Not use SC635 B After installation of the device a message alerts user to a battery voltage abnormal error Device control board defective Device control board backup battery defective Engine startup error SC670 D Engine does n...

Page 435: ...ithin 5 sec and three attempts failed UART communication failure replace the BICU Memory address command error SC687 D The BICU does not receive a memory address command from the controller 120 seconds after paper is in the position for registration BICU Controller connection loose defective BICU defective Controller defective 07 04 ...

Page 436: ... bottom plate ARDF feed motor disconnected defective Bottom plate HP sensor disconnected defective ARDF main board defective Finisher lower transport motor error SC720 D No encoder pulse signal is detected for the transport motor within the prescribed time The 1st failure issues an original jam message and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Lower transport motor disconnected defective Finisher co...

Page 437: ...ected defective Finisher exit guide plate motor error SC725 D After moving away from the guide plate position sensor the exit guide is not detected at the home position within the prescribed time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Guide plate motor disconnected defective Guide plate motor overloaded due to obstruction Guide plate position sensor di...

Page 438: ...stapler motor error SC740 B The stapler motor does not switch off within the prescribed time after operating The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Staple jam Number of sheets in the stack exceeds the limit for stapling Stapler motor disconnected defective Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error SC741 B The stapler does not return to its home posi...

Page 439: ...es a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code Tray lift motor disconnected defective Upper tray paper height sensor disconnected defective Finisher main board connection to motor loose Finisher main board defective Finisher tray 2 lower tray lift motor error SC751 B The lower tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified time after the tray raises or lowers The 1s...

Page 440: ...ailure issues this SC code Folder plate HP sensor disconnected defective Folder plate motor disconnected defective Folder plate motor overloaded due to obstruction Finisher pressure plate motor error SC762 B Pressure plate motor operating but the plate is not detected at the home position within the specified time The 1st detection failure issues a jam error and the 2nd failure issues this SC code...

Page 441: ... harness disconnected loose defective Motor overload Motor defective Cover interposer tray bottom plate motor error SC770 B After the motor starts to raise the bottom plate the bottom plate position sensor does not detect the plate at the specified time 3 s After the motor starts to lower the bottom plate the bottom plate HP sensor does not detect the bottom plate Bottom plate position sensor disc...

Page 442: ...connected defective Z Fold upper stopper motor Japan Only SC782 B The upper stopper motor does not attain the prescribed speed within the specified time Upper stopper motor disconnected defective Upper stopper motor overloaded due to obstruction Upper stopper HP sensor disconnected defective Finisher staple waste hopper full SC790 B The staple waste hopper is full of cut staples If the hopper is f...

Page 443: ...pt program goes into an endless loop preventing any other programs from executing System program defective switch OFF ON or change the controller firmware if the problem cannot be solved Controller board defective Controller option malfunction Fatal kernel error Due to a control error a RAM overflow occurred during system processing One of the following messages was displayed on the operation pane...

Page 444: ...or execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code The error code is not displayed on the operation panel Self diagnostic error 3 HDD 3003 Check performed when HDD is installed HDD device busy for over 31 s After a diagnostic command is set for Sthe HDD but the device remains busy for over 6 s A diagnostic command is issued to the HDD device but the result is an erro HDD defec...

Page 445: ... board defective ROM defective NOTE For more details about this SC 833 SC834 error execute SP5990 to print an SMC report so you can read the error code The error code is not displayed on the operation panel The additional error codes 0F30 0F31 etc are listed in the SMC report SC833 D Self diagnostic error 8 Engine I F ASIC 0F30 0F31 ASIC Mandolin for system control could not be detected After the ...

Page 446: ...machine can get access to the board that holds the wireless LAN but not to the wireless LAN card 802 11b or Bluetooth Wireless LAN card missing was removed Wireless LAN error 3 Not use SC855 B An error was detected on the wireless LAN card 802 11b or Bluetooth Wireless LAN card defective Wireless LAN card connection incorrect Wireless LAN error 4 Not use SC856 B An error was detected on the wirele...

Page 447: ...uery Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD HDD defective HDD access error SC865 D HDD responded to an error during operation for a condition other than those for SC863 864 HDD defective SD card error 1 Confirmation SC866 B The machine detects an electronic license error in the application on the SD card in the controller slot immediately after the machine i...

Page 448: ...matting User Information Replace the HDDs Boot the machine from the SD card HDD mail send data error SC873 B An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned ON or power was turned OFF while the machine used the HDD Do SP5832 007 Format HDD Mail TX Data to initialize the HDD Replace the HDD Delete All error 1 HDD SC874 D A data error was detected for the HDD NVRAM after th...

Page 449: ...troller E 7000 error 5 SC914 B The external controller E 7000 sends an error message Turn the machine power OFF ON External controller E 7000 down SC919 D The EAC received an interrupt signal from the FLUTE serial driver during print jobs in progress and the connection between the copier and external controller E 7000 was broken Note The EAC is the External Api Converter Switch the machine OFF and...

Page 450: ...and other network functions cannot be used HDD status codes are displayed below Refer to the four procedures below Recovery from SC 925 Here is a list of HDD status codes Display Meaning 1 HDD not connected 2 HDD not ready 3 No label 4 Partition type incorrect 5 Error returned during label read or check 6 Error returned during label read or check 7 filesystem repair failed 8 filesystem mount faile...

Page 451: ...be erased Documents on the document server and scanned documents will not be erased The first time that the network gets access to the machine the management information must be configured again this will use a lot of time Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832 011 do these steps 1 Go into the User Tools mode and do Delivery Settings to print all received fax documents that are sc...

Page 452: ... file name line number and so on 1 is the recommended method because another SC could write over the information for the previous SC Software error 4 Undefined SC992 C An error not controlled by the system occurred the error does not come under any other SC code Software defective Turn the machine power OFF and ON The machine cannot be used until this error is cleared Cannot select application fun...

Page 453: ...llowing countermeasures Format the address book by using SP5 832 008 all data in the address book including the user codes and counters is initialized Initialize the user data by using SP5 832 006 and 007 the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned ON Replace the hard disk the user codes and counters are recovered when the main switch is turned ON Printer error 920 D T...

Page 454: ...e LCD Sometimes this causes a jam to occur CAUSE The operator did not set the side fence or end fence correctly Note This can cause the machine to detect the wrong paper size when Auto Paper Size Detection is ON ACTION Advise users to Make sure to set the end fence A and side fences B correctly Make sure to lock the side fence lock C A B C Side fence lock is unlocked Side fence lock is locked ...

Page 455: ...Misfeed J099 is displayed on the operation panel CAUSE J098 The Paper Type Detect setting is ON and The paper type or thickness setting does not match that of the first sheet J099 The Double Feed Detect setting is ON and The paper type or thickness setting does not match that of the second or later sheets A ...

Page 456: ...displayed 2 Do one of the following Make sure the type and thickness of the paper match the type and thickness settings in the machine OR Turn OFF the Paper Type Detect and Double Feed Detect settings see next page Important After you turn this setting OFF if the type or thickness of the paper does not match the settings in the machine poor fusing can occur No error message will be displayed ...

Page 457: ...tings screen 2 4 2 Press B to change the paper type and press C to change the paper thickness How to Change the Paper Type Detect or Double Feed Detect Setting 1 Access User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings screen 4 4 2 Press D to change the Paper Type Detect setting ON OFF 3 Press E to change the Double Feed Detect setting ON OFF B C D E ...

Page 458: ...d damages the bushing NOTE For the location of this bushing see callout 25 on pg 100 of the Parts Catalog 43 Transfer Entrance 2 SOLUTION Check the rear bushing of the registration roller If the bushing is damaged replace it with a new one Check the position of the rear registration pressure spring see procedure below If the spring is in the NG position change the spring to the OK position NOTE Fo...

Page 459: ...April 2007 ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS 4 81 2 Pull out the lower drawer unit C 3 Remove the 3 clamps D 4 Remove 2 clamps E and disconnect the connector F C D F E ...

Page 460: ...ADDITIONAL INFORMATIONS April 2007 4 82 5 Remove the bracket G 1 screw 6 Remove the harness cover H 1 screw G H ...

Page 461: ...sition of rear registration pressure spring I If the spring is in the NG position change the spring to the OK position J I NG position The area where the spring loops meet J is facing up J I OK position The area where the spring loops meet J is facing down ...

Page 462: ...et into the development unit and then get stuck between the doctor blade and development sleeve ACTION When the symptom occurs 1 Remove the developer from the development unit s that shows the symptom 2 Remove the extra toner and developer from the development unit s with a vacuum cleaner 3 Install the new developer When you install the developer cartridge or replace the developer Make sure to put...

Page 463: ...er low temperature low humidity conditions temperature 10 C or 50 F humidity 15 ACTION Remove the drum charge roller from the PCU and clean it according to the procedure explained below 1 Remove the PCU whose color has the symptom See APPENDIX of this section for details on how to print out the K M C or Y halftone test pattern NOTE Make sure you put the removed PCU on the PCU stand when you do the...

Page 464: ...charge roller and the charge roller cleaning roller 3 Remove the drum charge roller with gear and bushing 4 Remove the drum charge roller gear B and the bushing C at the same time See below figure NOTE Do not remove the bushing on the non gear side A Do not touch the black part of the drum charge roller B C ...

Page 465: ...r any solvent 3 Then wipe the drum charge roller with a clean dry cloth again Wait for the drum charge roller to dry 6 Clean the charge roller cleaning roller D with vacuum cleaner if it is also dirty NOTE Make sure you do not to touch the charge roller cleaning roller with the vacuum cleaner nozzle E NG Water drop such as this should not remain D E NG If the vacuum nozzle touches the cleaning rol...

Page 466: ...ler unit 1 bushing 1 gear NOTE Make sure bushing is inserted correctly inside the molding guide F Also make sure the charging terminal G touches the charge roller end correctly 8 Reinstall the charge roller unit onto the PCU 2 screws F G Bushing is not inserted correctly inside the molding guide ...

Page 467: ...ult value 63 variable range 0 to 63 SP 2109 6 Density M default value 63 variable range 0 to 63 SP 2109 7 Density C default value 63 variable range 0 to 63 SP 2109 8 Density Y default value 63 variable range 0 to 63 For example if you want to print out Magenta half tone change the settings as shown below SP 2109 5 Density K to 0 SP 2109 7 Density C to 0 SP 2109 8 Density Y to 0 4 Press Copy Window...

Page 468: ... the STC is brought to an elevation of 1000m 3 280ft or higher the difference in air pressure makes the STC expand ACTION 1 Wait 24 hours for the STC to return to its normal size naturally 2 If the customer cannot wait 24 hours advise them to use the STC Air Release Kit service parts P N B1329710 NOTE This is a customer usable part The instructions are inside the kit 06 10 ...

Page 469: ...ut to reach 41 C 105 8F or higher The temperature of the installation environment is 30 C 86F or higher AND The machine prints for 2 hours non stop in full color mode 3 If the user makes 100 black and white copies prints ONLY this feature can be turned OFF in SP9405 001 ACTION 1 Please explain the following points to end users The basic meaning of the System Stop Control feature The machine will s...

Page 470: ... temperature in Stand by mode Default value 50 means that the hot roller temperature in Low Power Mode is Hot Roller temperature in Stand by mode minus 50 degrees This setting is correct Example If you set 30 the hot roller temperature in Low Power Mode will be Hot Roller temperature in Stand by mode minus 30 degrees This setting is not good for Hot Roller yield Example If you set 80 the hot rolle...

Page 471: ...rming Up 9 min Fixed ON SP 1105 2 Operation OFF Stand by Mode ON MM SP 1105 36 LL SP 1105 37 HH SP 1105 38 Panel off Mode Panel off Timer Default 60 sec 10 to 999 sec ON Same with Stand by Mode Low Power Mode Energy Saver Timer Default 15 min 1 to 240 min ON SP 1202 11 Auto Off Mode Auto Off time Default 90min 1 to 240 min OFF Refer the diagram in the service manual 6 17 4 ENERGY SAVER MODE ...

Page 472: ...e of the fusing roller SOLUTION Add the Middle Thickness Paper Mode by the following action ACTION Confirm the following Firmware version and then follow the procedure described from the next page Engine Ver 1 20 2_08 B1325402Q or newer System Copy Ver 1 23 B1325750M or newer IMPORTANT Update both the Engine and System Copy firmware at the same time Never change the setting for Sp1105 036 Hot Roll...

Page 473: ...2 Scan FC Change to 83 default 66 2 Toner Maximum Limitation If the customer agrees to the toner maximum limitation change reduce the value as follows For machines that use a PostScript3 unit type3260 B761 printer driver Set SP1106 001 to a value of 200 Printer SP Number Description Default Settings Final Solution NOTE 1106 001 Toner Limit Photo 260 200 Toner maximum limitation for Photo mode For ...

Page 474: ...ture in FC mode 4 SP1200 008 1st CPM Down CPM Low Temp FC Change to 35 default 25 NOTE This is to change the paper feed interval condition for Low Temperature in FC mode 4 Select the Special Paper for the tray to which you need to apply Middle Thickness Paper Mode User Tools Æ System Settings Æ Tray Paper Settings Æ Paper Type Tray XX XX tray number Special Paper default No display NOTE This setti...

Page 475: ... Middle Thickness Paper Mode 1 is not enough for the poor fusing However with this setting it is easier for stripper streaks to occur Change the following SP setting as a set SP1105 013 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 1 S Thk3 FC NS CPM Change to 185 default 180 SP1105 021 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 2 S Thk3 FC NS CPM Change to 185 default 180 3 Middle Thickness Paper Mode 3 NOTE This setting should be selected if the eff...

Page 476: ...utions Previous Temporary Solution Side Effects Solution A Solution B Solution B Final Solution in this RTB 1 Stripper streaks X X X See above table 2 Color reproduction None None X X 3 Paper curl with Normal paper X X X X Only for the tray for which Middle Thickness Paper Mode is selected 4 System stop control condition X X X X Only for the tray for which Middle Thickness Paper Mode is selected 5...

Page 477: ...re for normal paper duplex FC 1105 016 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 2 S Trace 1C 160 deg Heating Roller Temperature for thin paper duplex 1C 1105 017 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 2 S Trace FC 160 deg Heating Roller Temperature for thin paper duplex FC 1105 029 PressRoll Sensor Wait Temp Norm 152 deg Pressure Roller Temperature for Stand by mode 1107 007 Mode Shift Press Temp Norm 5 deg Additional Temperature for heating ...

Page 478: ...815 is used and Collate is ON in the E 7000 printer driver and Multiple sets are printed out and one set one sheet of paper CAUSE Under the above conditions the EFI printer controller E 7000 G815 sends the shift command to the shift tray for every sheet and the shift tray is not able to respond quickly enough SOLUTION Advise the user to turn the Collate setting OFF in the E 7000 printer driver if ...

Page 479: ...using separation pawls position This symptom occurs especially on the solid image on the Thick paper 2 Type B Very sharp lines the width is less than 0 5 mm in the paper feeding direction corresponding in position to the fusing separation pawls This is also visible especially on the Thick paper 3 Type C The streaks the width is 1 through 2 mm are in the same position as the edge of the previous pa...

Page 480: ... is effective However it takes a certain amount of time to effect for Type A It depends on the type of paper the condition of fusing belt when this kit is applied See next page Type B The fusing belt is scratched by some foreign objects which are stuck between the separation pawls and paper Very sharp scar line s are made on the fusing belt This scar line made a visible line on the fused solid ima...

Page 481: ...t the line speed of the fusing belt is 6 faster than the line speed of the pressure roller Default Same speed As a result the yield of the fusing belt changes from 600K to 300K 4 After you install the kit make a visible mark on the outside of the fusing unit Example Write Fusing anti glossy streaks kit installed on the outside of the fusing unit This is because the parts in this kit are not availa...

Page 482: ...3 13 101 101 12 11 10 24 22 1 27 1 3 27 2 15 102 21 20 19 23 18 103 101 101 22 12 11 26 25 24 103 28 17 16 26 29 103 30 A B 9 14 103 103 19 105 20 21 103 106 22 13 107 103 105 104 103 24 25 23 103 26 27 101 29 28 18 16 108 24 11 23 105 106 22 26 105 20 103 31 103 103 103 32 33 30 103 18 17 10 11 103 103 6 103 103 6 D C 06 10 ...

Page 483: ...ntroller E 7000 is on the firmware update will not start This is because the e STUDIO4500c 5500c cannot perform the update while it receives the boot up status information from the E 7000 PROCEDURE Do the following when you update the Copier Engine firmware on e STUDIO4500c 5500c machines connected to a Color Controller E 7000 1 Press the operation switch until the On indicator turns off Important...

Page 484: ...ower switch of the Color Controller E 7000 5 Put the firmware SD card into Slot 3 and turn on the e STUDIO4500c 5500c main power switch 6 After the firmware update is finished turn off the e STUDIO4500c 5500c main power switch and remove the SD card 7 Turn on the e STUDIO4500c 5500c main power switch 8 Turn on the main power switch of the Color Controller E 7000 Main Power Switch Diagnostic LEDs S...

Page 485: ...o the surface of the fusing roller SOLUTION Add the Middle Thickness Paper Mode by the following action Important Never change the setting for Sp1105 036 Hot Roller Wait Temp Norm default 145 deg After you finish the procedure below turn the machine main power OFF ON Solution Middle Thickness Paper Mode 1 Power Supply Voltage Check when using before applying the final solution Check the Power Supp...

Page 486: ...oh PS driver Set SP1106 001 to a value of 200 Printer SP Number Description Default Settings Final Solution NOTE 1106 001 Toner Limit Photo 260 200 Toner maximum limitation for Photo mode For the Fiery E 7000 controller 1 Open the E 7000 PS Document Properties dialog 2 Click on the Fiery Printing tab then select the Image Quality option 3 Change the Toner Reduction setting to ON 07 04 ...

Page 487: ...PM Norm Hi FC Change to 40 default 30 NOTE This is to change the paper feed interval condition for High Normal Temperature in FC mode 4 SP1200 008 1st CPM Down CPM Low Temp FC Change to 35 default 25 NOTE This is to change the paper feed interval condition for Low Temperature in FC mode 4 Select the Special Paper for the tray to which you need to apply Middle Thickness Paper Mode User Tools Æ Syst...

Page 488: ...ective both for poor fusing and the sponge image separation pawl streaks You do NOT have to change any SP settings Default settings are OK a SP1105 013 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 1 S Thk3 FC NS CPM Default 180 b SP1105 021 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 2 S Thk3 FC NS CPM Default 180 2 Middle Thickness Paper Mode 2 NOTE NOTE This setting should be selected if the effectiveness of Middle Thickness Paper Mode 1 is not enou...

Page 489: ...not enough for the poor fusing However with this setting it is easier for separation pawl streaks to occur Change the following SP setting as a set a SP1105 013 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 1 S Thk3 FC NS CPM Change to 190 default 180 b SP1105 021 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 2 S Thk3 FC NS CPM Change to 190 default 180 c SP1105 021 Htg Roll Sn1 Ctr 2 S Thk3 FC NS CPM Change to 0 default 5 07 04 ...

Page 490: ...e remove it before you begin these procedures MEASURING THE NIP WIDTH 1 Load one OHP sheet 3M PP2500 Transparency Film in the bypass tray 2 Turn OFF Paper Type Detect and Double Feed Detect for the bypass tray 3 Make sure the following SP modes are set to their defaults Sp1111 002 Stop Time Default 60 Sp1111 003 Stop Interval Default 200 4 Do Sp1111 001 Nip Width Mode Execute 07 04 ...

Page 491: ...pecification NOTE Note See Nip Width Specifications below NIP WIDTH SPECIFICATIONS All of the following must be true 1 E F 2 11 1 0 3mm and 2 The difference between A and C is 0 5mm or smaller and 3 The difference between B and D is 0 5mm or smaller Feed Direction A B C D E F OHP sheet Center of OHP sheet 07 04 ...

Page 492: ...rs are not in the upper position pressure will not be applied between the fusing belt and pressure roller 3 Turn screws G and H to bring the nip width to within specification To increase the nip width turn the screws clockwise To decrease the nip width turn the screws counter clockwise NOTE One turn of the screw changes the nip width about 0 3mm G H G H Clockwise direction Clockwise direction I J ...

Page 493: ...akes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator 1 If you cannot go into the SP mode ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and then set Service Mode Lock to OFF After he or she logs in User Tools System Settings Administrator Tools Service Mode Lock OFF This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes The service engineer c...

Page 494: ...the copy window copier mode to select the appropriate settings paper size etc for the test print 3 Press the Start key to execute the test print 4 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1 Using the SP Mode SP command numbers can be entered directly if you know the number or the command can be selected from the menus Direct Entry SP5831 an executable SP that ...

Page 495: ...ess The small entry box on the right is activated and displays the default or the current setting below 5 To enter a setting Press to enter a minus sign Then use the keypad to enter the appropriate number The number you enter will write over the previous setting Press to enter the setting If you enter a number that is out of range the key press is ignored When you are prompted to complete the sele...

Page 496: ...window to resume normal operation 6 SPnxxx Press any group number to open a list of SP codes and titles for that group For example to open the SP code list for SP1 nnn press SP1XXX If an SP has sublevels it is marked with a right pointing triangle 7 Group Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group 8 Page Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the scr...

Page 497: ...t Select A4 LT Sideways or larger to make sure that all the information is printed Press SP Window to go back to the SP mode select the necessary SP Print Mode and press Execute 001 All Data List 002 SP Mode Data List 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non Default Prints only SPs that are set to values other than defaults 007 NIB Summary Configuration Systemlog Nvramlog 00...

Page 498: ... SMC Report before initializing or adjusting the SP settings The SMC Report provides a concise list of all the SP commands and their current settings The report can be used for reference if the service manual is not available Executing Memory All Clear resets all the settings stored in the NVRAM to their default settings except the following SP8381 Electrical total counter value SP5811 002 Machine...

Page 499: ...lizes the Job login ID Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 11 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings IP addresses also the SmartNetMonitor for Admin settings WebStatusMonitor settings and the TELNET settings NCS Network Control Service 14 Clear DCS Setting Initializes the DCS Delivery Control Service settings 15 Clear U...

Page 500: ...by mode 2 Press the User Tools key 3 Hold down the key and press System Setting on the display 4 A confirmation message will be displayed then press Yes Resetting Copy Document Server Features Only The copy document server settings in the UP mode can be reset to their defaults with this procedure 1 Make sure that the machine is in the copier standby mode 2 Press the User Tools key 3 Hold down the ...

Page 501: ...copy window then select the settings for the test print paper size etc 5 Press the Start key twice ignore the Place Original messages to start the test print 6 After checking the test pattern press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode display 7 Press Exit twice to exit the SP mode Test Pattern Table These patterns can be selected with SP2109 002 0 Off 14 Horizontal Cross Stitch 1 1 Dot Lin...

Page 502: ...s 4 Press Copy Window to open the copy window then select the settings for the test print paper size etc 5 Press the Start key to start the test print 6 Press SP Mode highlighted to return to the SP mode display Here is a list of the text patterns you can select 0 Scanned Image 13 Grid Pattern CMYK 1 Gradation Main Scan A 14 Color Patch CMYK 2 Gradation Main Scan B 15 Gray Pattern 1 3 Gradation Ma...

Page 503: ... Server software NFA Net File software Printer application software Scanner application software DESS encryption module software Important Always obey these rules when handling and using SD cards Never connect or remove an SD card with the machine powered ON Never turn the power OFF while the machine is downloading data from an SD card The SD card is a precision item Use it carefully Do not keep t...

Page 504: ...5730 3 Turn the main switch OFF 4 Remove the SD card slot cover A from the controller x2 5 Hold the SD card B the surface with printing must be away from the front of the machine and insert the SD card in Slot 3 B 6 Open the front door of the copier 7 Turn the main power switch ON You see Please Wait NOTE Opening the front door during the firmware update prevents motor rotation and the generation ...

Page 505: ...ake new ones While the Update Is in Progress Remain with the machine Do not leave it unattended The Start key flashes RED during firmware update and then lights GREEN when the update is finished Never switch the machine OFF while the Start key is flashing RED If the machine is switched OFF or accidentally unplugged before the update is finished do not remove the SD card Just switch the machine on ...

Page 506: ...screen goes off during the operation panel update If a problem occurs you will not be aware of it 10 Press Update or press on the 10 key pad Here is what happens on the screen The top bar tells you what the machine is doing Loading The middle bar shows the name of the module that the machine is presently updating The example above shows that the machine is updating the Printer module The bottom ba...

Page 507: ...he front door of the copier 2 With the System SD card in Slot 3 turn the main power switch ON You see Please Wait and then the door open alert The first screen appears after about 10 sec 3 Press Firmware 4 Select the items that you updated and then press the Verify button 5 If there are no errors the machine displays the Verify done message for each updated item Go to the next step or If you see V...

Page 508: ... repeat the installation procedure 33 Incorrect SD card version The ROM data on the SD card is not correct or data is damaged 34 Module mismatch Correct module is not on the SD card The data on the SD is not correct Get the correct data Japan Overseas OEM etc then install again 35 Module mismatch Module on SD card is not for this machine SD update data is not correct The data on the SD card is for...

Page 509: ...s been formatted or has been replaced and formatted Then these stamps can be used by the system If this is not done the user will not have access to the fixed stamps Confidential Secret etc 1 Go into the SP mode 1 Select SP5853 then press Execute 2 Obey the instructions on the screen to complete the procedure 3 Switch the machine OFF and remove the SD card ...

Page 510: ...upload fails and tells you the serial number of the machine 2 Turn the copier main power switch OFF 3 Put the SD card into Slot 3 then turn the copier ON 4 Do SP5824 001 then press the Execute key When uploading is completed a file is coped to the NVRAM folder on the SD card The file is saved to this path and filename NVRAM serial number NV Here is an example for Serial Number B0700017 NVRAM B0700...

Page 511: ...en the front door of the copier and keep it open 4 Turn the copier main power switch ON If the NVRAM is new SC195 Machine Serial Number Error may appear If this occurs Enter the SP mode and do SP5801 001 to set the memory to the defaults All Switch the machine OFF ON and start from Step 1 Important WHEN SC195 OCCURS THE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE INPUT PLEASE CONTACT YOUR TECHNICAL SUPERVISOR 5 Do SP58...

Page 512: ... default setting can be adjusted in 0 1mm steps in the range 9 Note The default setting for each SP mode is shown on the screen in the Initial box immediately below the entry box DFU Denotes Design or Factory Use Do not change this value Japan only The feature or item is for Japan only Do not change this value LEF Long Edge Feed SEF Short Edge Feed ...

Page 513: ...Circulation M Magenta StrTemp Start Temperature Cnt Count Meas Measurement Sub Sub Hopper Coeff Coefficient Mem Memory SWT Switch Timing Col Color MH Medium High Syn Synchronization Cont Continuous Operation ML Medium Low T1 Tray 1 Cor Correction MM Medium Medium Medium T2 Tray 2 Ctrl Control Norm Normal Paper T3 Tray 3 Den Density NS Normal Speed T4 Tray 4 Dev Development Opt Optical Tan Tandem D...

Page 514: ...02 Tray 2 003 Tray 3 004 Tray 4 Japan Only 005 Bypass Tray 006 LCT 007 Dupx Tray 1003 Reg Buckle Adj Registration Buckle Adjustment Adjusts the registration motor timing This timing determines the amount of paper buckle at registration A higher setting causes more buckling 001 Trays LCT 9 9 1 mm 002 Dupx Tray 9 9 1 mm 003 Bypass Tray 9 9 1 mm 1007 Bypass Size Disp Bypass Paper Size Detection Displ...

Page 515: ...010 Image Transfer Motor 011 PTR Motor Normal is normal speed for copying 3 3 0 1 012 Fusing Motor 5 5 0 1 Motor Adj Half Motor Speed Fine Adjustment Half Speed 013 Drum Motor K 014 Drum Motor M 015 Drum Motor C 016 Drum Motor Y 017 PCU Motor K 018 PCU Motor M 019 PCU Motor C 020 PCU Motor Y 021 Image Transfer Motor 022 PTR Motor 023 Fusing Motor Half Speed is the half speed mode 3 3 0 1 Motor Adj...

Page 516: ... During copying in half speed mode 130 200 1 deg 011 1 S Thk1 FC HS During copying in half speed mode 130 200 1 deg 012 1 S Thk3 1C NS CPM During copying in normal speed mode on thick paper in black and white 130 200 1 deg 013 1 S Thk3 FC NS CPM During copying in normal speed mode on thick paper in full color 130 200 1 deg 014 2 S Norm 1C During normal speed copying 130 200 1 deg 015 2 S Norm FC D...

Page 517: ...essRoll Pressure Roller 028 Reload Temp Until warmup reload ends 70 180 1 deg 029 Wait Temp Norm At normal standby temperature 50 180 1 deg 030 Wait Temp Low At low standby temperature 50 180 1 deg 031 Wait Temp High At hight standby temperature 50 180 1 deg 032 1 S Norm Target temperature 70 180 1 deg 033 2 S Norm Target temperature 70 180 1 deg 034 Cont OHP During continuous OHP copying 130 200 ...

Page 518: ...sensors are low 0 20 1 deg 002 High Temp SW The calculated value for the specified temperatures when the readings of the environmental sensors are high 20 0 1 deg 003 Pres Roll Reload This function in not used in this model 004 Idle Temp On Off The hot roller temperature that determines whether the fusing unit rollers are rotated freely during warmup 80 200 1 deg 005 Idle Time Extend The length of...

Page 519: ...ec Stand Cool On Off Standby Ventilation Cooling On Off 013 Thk2 0 Off 1 On Switches ON OFF standby for cooling after printing thick paper 0 Off 1 On To Cooling Mode Standby Ventilation Cooling Setting 014 Thk2 OHP Cool End Sets the temperature to end the cool down period after printing with thick paper or OHP 0 40 1 deg 015 Trace Cool End Sets the temperature to end the cool down period after pri...

Page 520: ...olor copying and printing Scan Norm 1C Black and white scanning Scan Norm FC Full color scanning At ProCon Reload Reload temperature after completing the process control cycle Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 1 001 At Reload 0 100 100 0 1 002 Wait Time 003 Norm 1C 004 Norm FC Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 2 005 Wait Time 0 1000 0 1 006 Norm 1C 0 1000 1000 0 1 007 Scan Norm 1C 0 100 0 1 008 Norm FC 009 Scan...

Page 521: ...Tray 4 Japan Only 005 Bypass 006 LCT Double Feed 007 Tray 1 008 Tray 2 009 Tray 3 010 Tray 4 Japan Only 011 Bypass 002 LCT 1111 Nip Width Mode Nip Width Measurement Setting Mode 001 Execute Determines whether the nip at the hot roller and pressure roller is calibrated Press Execute 002 Stop Time Determines the down time of the fusing exit motor in the fusing nip band calibration mode 1 100 1 sec 0...

Page 522: ...wn 2nd CPM Down 009 CPM Norm Hi 1C Normal high temperature environment A4 SEF 10 60 5 cpm 010 CPM Norm Hi FC Normal high temperature environment A4 SEF 10 60 5 cpm 011 CPM Low 1C Low temperature environment A4 SEF 10 60 5 cpm 012 CPM Low FC Low temperature environment A4 SEF 10 60 5 cpm 3rd CPM Down Thk 3rd CPM Down Thick Paper 013 1C 60 45 30cpm CPM down settings based on A4 SEF for black and whi...

Page 523: ...n of the fusing exit sensor 001 FuseExitSn On Off Display indicates whether the fusing exit sensor is ON or OFF 0 OFF 1 ON 002 FuseExitSn Timing Displays the time interval from when the registration motor goes OFF to when it restarts 0 5000 1 msec 003 FuseExitSn ON Display indicates whether the fusing paper remains sensor is ON or OFF 0 5000 1 msec 004 FuseExitSn Disp Dsiplays whether the paper re...

Page 524: ...d OFF for thick paper and index sheet feed from the bypass tray 001 0 No 1 Yes Bypass Feed Thick Paper Mode Switches the thick paper mode ON OFF for feed from the bypass tray 0 OFF 1 ON 002 0 No 1 Yes Bypass Feed Thick Paper Mode Switches the thick paper mode ON OFF for feed of index sheets from the bypass tray 0 OFF 1 ON ...

Page 525: ...2 MainScan Dot Y 0 1 013 SubScan Line K M 63 63 1 sub dot 014 SubScan Line K C 015 SubScan Line K Y 016 SubScan M Adj K M 33 33 1 step 017 SubScan M Adj K C 018 SubScan M Adj K Y 2102 Prt Mag Adj Print Magnification Adjustment No information is available at this time 001 Main Scan Mag 100 100 0 01 005 Mag Rate K 0 1 006 Mag Rate M 0 1 007 Mag Rate C 0 1 008 Mag Rate Y 0 1 63 63 1 sub dot 2103 Prt ...

Page 526: ...on motor turns OFF if the machine receives no print job for the time specified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed 0 180 1 sec 2107 Prt Param On Off Printer Parameter Settings On Off No information is available at this time 005 Shade Corr Flag 0 OFF 1 ON 006 Phase Ctrl Flage 0 OFF 1 ON 2108 Col Prt Stop Specify Color to Stop Printing This SP switches OFF printing of a color 001 K ...

Page 527: ...ot Vertical Line 18 1 Dot 20 mm Grid 5 1 Dot Horizontal Line 19 1 Dot 20 mm Slant Grid 6 1 Dot Vertical Line 20 Horizontal Grayscale 7 1 Dot Independent 21 Horizontal Grayscale White Stripes 8 2 Dot Independent 22 Not Used 9 4 Dot Independent 23 Not Used 10 Trim Area 24 Not Used 11 Belt Pattern 25 Not Used 12 100 Coverage 26 Not Used 13 Vertical Cross Stitch 27 Not Used 004 Col Select YCMK 0 255 1...

Page 528: ...lly When the machine is turned ON or returns from an energy save mode At the interval prescribed by SP2153 015 Default 8 min After completion of the process control cycle When the machine receives a job after remaining idle for a long period After the fusing unit exceeds the prescribed temperature 2112 Mag Point Adj Maginification Point Adjustment Corrects the difference in magnification for each ...

Page 529: ...17 M SmallArea7 037 Y SmallArea7 018 M SmallArea8 038 Y SmallArea8 2152 Shading Coeff Shading Correction Coefficient DFU These SPs set the shading correction coefficient for Areas 01 to 19 for each color For a list of the ranges and default settings print the SMC report with SP5990 001 019 K Area01 Area19 021 039 M Area01 Area19 041 058 C Area01 Area19 061 079 Y Area01 Area19 2153 MUSIC Settings M...

Page 530: ...interval for MUSIC to execute after the front door is opened and then closed to remove a paper jam or perform some other task 2 99 1 min 016 Clear Main Slip Clears the skew correction amount for MUSIC in the main scan direction 0 1 1 020 Sensor Light 1 Sets the light intensity of MUSIC sensor 1 0 65535 1 021 Sensor Light 2 Sets the light intensity of MUSIC sensor 2 0 65535 1 022 Sensor Light 3 Set...

Page 531: ...t this time 2154 2 Point Target 2 Point Interval Target Setting These 2 point target settings done at the factory affect the characteristics of the lenses These target values must be entered when when the laser unit is replaced The correct settings are printed below the first barcode on one A5 sheet of paper provided with the replacement laser unit 001 K 60700 63230 61984 1 002 M 003 C 004 Y 2155 ...

Page 532: ...r magenta in the sub scan direction at sensor 2 007 M Sub Skew 3 Amount of shift correction for magenta in the sub scan direction at sensor 3 011 C Skew Amt The amount of skew correction for cyan 012 C Main Skew 1 Amount of shift correction for cyan in the main scan direction at sensor 1 013 C Main Skew 2 Amount of shift correction for cyan in the main scan direction at sensor 2 014 C Main Skew 3 ...

Page 533: ...d The dc bias an absolute value is set to 200 making the default values for each color 700 The dc bias is normally adjusted by the process control self check but when automatic process control is switched OFF by setting SP3501 001 to 1 these values are used for the charge potential 001 Std Speed K 999 to 200 1V 002 Std Speed M 003 Std Speed C 004 Std Speed Y 006 Low Speed K 007 Low Speed M 008 Low...

Page 534: ...K 017 MH Target M 018 MH Target C 019 MH Target Y 021 HH Target K 022 HH Target M 023 HH Target C 024 HH Target Y 100 350 1 mA 2211 Set LD Power LD Power Fixed Setting These SPs set the power levels of the laser diodes in the exposure unit for the standard speed mode and low speed mode for each color but take effect only when SP3501 001 is set to 1 Fixed With the setting at 0 the LD output is 100 ...

Page 535: ... recover normal operation of a color toner supply when image density becomes light After you press Execute the toner supply switches ON for 0 1 sec and then OFF for 0 45 sec four times for the select color or colors 001 Execute K 002 Execute M 003 Execute C 004 Execute Y Executes forced toner supply to the selected development unit 005 Execute Col Executes forced toner supply to the Y M C developm...

Page 536: ... Check This SP executes a check of all or one selected potential sensor 001 All Colors Select and press Execute 002 K Display the results with SP2261 001 to 012 003 M 004 C 005 Y 2261 Pot Sn Chk Disp Potential Sensor Check Results Display Displays results of the potential sensor check executed with 2260 001 Vd K 007 Vr C 002 Vd M 008 Vr Y 003 Vd C 009 Voffset K 004 Vd Y 010 Voffset M 005 Vr K 011 ...

Page 537: ...k ID Sensor Check Execution This SP executes a check of the ID sensors 2265 ID Sn Chk Disp Displays the most recent ID sensor Vsg and Voffset readings Notes Vsg_reg is the reading of the direct sensors in the black and color ID sensors that detect the reflectivity of the bare surface of ITB If Vsg_reg is less than 3 8V the ID sensor may be dirty damaged or disconnected F Front refers to the color ...

Page 538: ...cess control when this SP is set to zero the default The value of the absolute humidity reading displayed by SP2302 003 as well as the other readings of the conditions around the machine displayed with SP2302 are used in the process control calculations If you press any key 1 to 5 below the value you select is used and the readings of the temperature humidity sensor are ignored Note After you pres...

Page 539: ...pecial Paper 2 5 Special Paper 3 2308 Set Psize Thresh Set Paper Size Thresholds Sets the correction values Threshold 1 2 3 4 for paper size 001 Thresh 1 0 25 1 mm 002 Thresh 2 0 25 1 mm 003 Thresh 3 0 25 1 mm 004 Thresh 4 0 25 1 mm 2312 Margin K Bias Margin K Bias Setting Full Speed 52 to 128 g m normal paper Half Speed 128 to 256 g m thick paper 005 Full Spd ITB Sets the value of image transfer ...

Page 540: ...016 Full Spd PTR 6 0 1µA 6 0 1µA 6 0 1µA 017 Full Spd SepDC 0 100 0 1µA 0 100 0 1µA 0 100 0 1µA 018 Full Spd SepAC 80 120 0 1µA 70 100 0 1µA 80 120 0 1µA 020 Half Spd ITB K 0 500 0 1µA 0 500 0 1µA 0 500 0 1µA 021 Half Spd ITB M 0 500 0 1µA 0 500 0 1µA 0 500 0 1µA 022 Half Spd ITB C 0 500 0 1µA 0 500 0 1µA 0 500 0 1µA 023 Half Spd ITB Y 0 500 0 1µA 0 500 0 1µA 0 500 0 1µA 025 Half Spd PTR 100 0 1µA...

Page 541: ...pe K HH Paper Type K HH This SP sets image transfer bias for HH Highest speed during black and white copying in areas where black is used to develop the image 006 Full Spd ITB 10 250 1 011 Half Spd ITB 10 250 1 2391 Ptype FC LL Paper Type FC LL This SP sets image transfer bias for LL Lowest speed during full color copying in areas where each color is used to develop the image 2392 Ptype FC ML Pape...

Page 542: ...ts the standard value of bias voltages at image transfer and paper separation in areas where black is used on plain paper during black and white printing 001 ITB 0 500 0 1 µA 007 Side1 PTR 100 0 0 1 µA 008 Side1 SepDC 0 100 0 1 µA 009 Side1 SepAC 80 120 0 1 kV 012 Side2 PTR 100 0 1 µA 013 Side2 SepDC 0 100 0 1 µA 014 Side2 SepAC 80 120 0 1 kV 2406 Norm FC Bias Set Bias for Plain Paper FC Full Colo...

Page 543: ...n the paper size of SP2308 003 Threshold 3 and are applied only to 1 areas where image is created 2 plain paper at full speed only 3 both black and white or full color mode 007 Side1 Size3 PTR Applies to Side 1 of duplex page 100 600 1 012 Side2 Size3 PTR Applies to Side 2 of duplex page 100 600 1 2414 Size Coeff Norm Size Correction Coefficient for Plain Paper Size 4 These settings apply to paper...

Page 544: ...hese settings 1 apply only to black printing on plain paper at full speed even when full color is selected and 2 apply to to both sides of a duplex page 001 ITB 0 30 1 mm 002 PTR 0 30 1 mm 003 SepDC 0 30 1 mm 004 SepAC 2423 TEdgeCor Norm K Trailing Edge Correction for Plain Paper K This SP sets the coefficient used to correct bias at image to paper transfer for each side of the paper These setting...

Page 545: ...lected is the number of mm from the leading edge of the paper These settings 1 apply only full color printing on plain paper at full speed and 2 apply to to both sides of a duplex page 001 ITB 0 30 1 mm 002 PTR 0 30 1 mm 003 SepDC 0 30 1 mm 004 SepAC 0 30 1 mm 2428 TEdgeCor Norm FC Trailing Edge Correction for Plain Paper FC This SP sets the coefficient used to correct bias at image to paper trans...

Page 546: ...Side1 PTR 10 250 1 10 250 1 10 250 1 008 Side1 SepDC 10 250 1 10 250 1 009 Side1 SepAC 10 250 1 10 250 1 012 Side2 PTR 10 250 1 10 250 1 013 Side2 SepDC 10 250 1 10 250 1 014 Side2 SepAC 10 250 1 10 250 1 2434 Norm K MH Plain Paper K Medium High 2435 Norm K HH Plain Paper K High These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated bas...

Page 547: ...aper FC Medium High 2445 Norm FC HH Plain Paper FC High These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 SP2444 More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3 up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4 SP2445 More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4 ...

Page 548: ...nly 3 apply to thick paper mode 1 2 speed 128 to 256 g m 007 Side1 Size PTR 100 600 1 012 Side2 Size PTR 2512 Size Coeff Thk Size Correction Coefficient Thick Paper These settings 1 apply to above 2308 002 Threshold 2 and below SP2308 003 Threshold 3 2 apply to image areas only 3 apply to thick paper mode 1 2 speed 128 to 256 g m 007 Side1 Size2 PTR 100 600 1 012 Side2 Size2 PTR 100 600 1 2513 Siz...

Page 549: ...522 LEdge SWT Thk K Leading Edge Switch Timing for Thick Paper K This SP sets switch timing that switches OFF the application of SP2521 for thick paper The value selected is the number of mm from the leading edge of the paper These settings 1 apply only to black printing on thick paper at half speed 128 256 g m2 and 2 apply to to both sides of a duplex page 001 ITB 0 30 1 mm 002 PTR 0 30 1 mm 003 ...

Page 550: ...mber of mm from the leading edge of the paper These settings 1 apply only full color printing on thick paper 128 256 g m2 at half speed and 2 apply to to both sides of a duplex page 001 ITB 0 30 1 mm 002 PTR 0 30 1 mm 003 SepDC 0 30 1 mm 004 SepAC 2528 TEdge Cor Thk FC Trailing Edge Correction for Thick Paper FC This SP sets the coefficient used to correct bias at image to paper transfer for each ...

Page 551: ...10 250 1 008 Side1 SepDC 10 250 1 10 250 1 009 Side1 SepAC 10 250 1 10 250 1 012 Side2 PTR 10 250 1 10 250 1 013 Side2 SepDC 10 250 1 10 250 1 014 Side2 SepAC 10 250 1 10 250 1 2534 Thk K MH Thick Paper K Medium High 2535 Thk K HH Thick Paper K High These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absol...

Page 552: ...44 Thk FC MH Thick Paper FC Medium High 2545 Thk FC HH Thick Paper FC High These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 SP2544 More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3 up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4 SP2545 More than SP23...

Page 553: ...lack and white or full color mode 100 600 1 2621 LEdge Cor OHP K Leading Edge Correction for Transparency K These SPs do the following settings when printing on OHP in the black and white mode at half speed 128 256 g m2 1 ITB Sets strength timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB 2 PTR Sets the strength timing correctio...

Page 554: ...s the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is transferred from ITB 3 SepDC SepAC Set the dc ac charges applied to neutralize the charges on the belt and paper so they will separate more easily Note SP2626 selects the strength of the bias coefficient and SP2627 sets the start timing of the bias application 2627 LEdge SWT OHP FC Leading Edge Switch Timing for Transparenc...

Page 555: ...0 250 1 10 250 1 10 250 1 2634 2635 002 PTR 10 250 1 10 250 1 003 SepDC 10 250 1 10 250 1 004 SepAC 10 250 1 10 250 1 2641 OHP FC LL Transparency FC Low 2642 OHP FC ML Transparency FC Medium Low 2643 OHP FC MM Transparency FC Medium 2644 OHP FC MH Transparency FC Medium High 2645 OHP FC HH Transparency FC High These SPs set the paper size correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias...

Page 556: ...0 1 µa 013 Side2 SepDC 0 100 0 1 µa 014 Side2 SepAC 80 120 0 1 kV 2756 Sp1 K Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 1 K These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1 create bias for image transfer from drum of each color Y M C K to the ITB 2 create bias for image transfer from ITB to paper PTR and 3 neutralize the charges on the both sides of the paper to separate the ...

Page 557: ...cient for Special Paper 1 007 Side1 Size3 PTR 012 Side2 Size3 PTR SP2308 003 Threshold 3 SP2308 002 Threshold 2 100 600 5 2764 Size Coeff Sp1 Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 1 007 Side1 Size4 PTR 012 Side2 Size4 PTR SP2308 004 Threshold 4 SP2308 003 Threshold 3 100 600 5 2765 Size Coeff Sp1 Size Correction Coefficient for Special Paper 1 007 Side1 Size5 PTR 012 Side2 Size5 PTR Up to ...

Page 558: ...tings when printing on Special Paper 1 in the full color mode 1 ITB Sets strength timing of the correction coefficient for the application of bias when the image is transferred from the drum to the ITB 2 PTR Sets the strength timing of thecorrection coefficient for the application of bias when the image is transferred from ITB 3 SepDC SepAC Set the strength timing of the dc and ac charges applied ...

Page 559: ...correction coefficient for the image to paper transfer bias threshold values calculated based on the reading of the absolute humidity from the temperature humidity sensor and the thresholds set with SP2304 SP2781 Up to SP2304 001 Threshold 1 SP2782 More than SP2304 001 Threshold 1 up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2 SP2783 More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2 up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3 SP2784 More than SP2...

Page 560: ...e1 PTR 10 250 5 10 250 5 10 250 5 008 Side1 SepDC 009 Side1 SepAC 012 Side2 PTR 013 Side2 SepDC 014 Side2 SepAC 2794 Sp1 FC MH Special Paper 1 FC Medium High 2795 Sp1 FC HH Special Paper 1 FC High 2794 2795 017 Side1 PTR 10 250 5 10 250 5 018 Side1 SepDC 10 250 5 019 Side1 SepAC 10 250 5 10 250 5 027 Side2 PTR 028 Side2 SepDC 029 Side2 SepAC 2801 Sp2 K Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 2 K These SPs...

Page 561: ... Thresh All of hese settings Apply to printing on Special Paper 2 in the black and white mode Apply only to the image area The title of each SP tells you the side and size where the setting is applied at ITB to paper transfer for example Side1 Size1 PTR means the setting applies to only Side 1 of Size 1 when the image is transferred from belt to paper at the PTR 2811 Size Coeff Sp2 Size Correction...

Page 562: ...leading edge Applies only to printing in black and white mode on Special Paper 2 001 ITB 0 30 1 mm 002 PTR 003 SepDC 004 SepAC 2823 TEdge Cor Sp2 K PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 2 K Sets the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to paper by setting the start timing for SP2824 002 at the trailing edge Applied to the trailing edge for black and whi...

Page 563: ...de1 PTR 008 Side1 SepDC 009 Side1 SepAC 012 Side2 PTR 013 Side2 SepDC 014 Side2 SepAC 2827 LEdge SWT Sp2 FC Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 2 FC Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2826 The selected value is the number of mm from the leading edge Applies only to printing in full color mode on Special Paper 2 001 ITB 0 30 1 mm 002 PTR 003 SepDC 004 SepAC 2828 TEdge Cor Sp2 FC PTR Trailing ...

Page 564: ...04 001 Threshold 1 up to SP2304 002 Threshold 2 SP2833 More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2 up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3 SP2834 More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3 up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4 SP2835 More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4 These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 2 in black and white mode 2831 2832 2833 007 Side1 PTR 10 250 5 10 250 5 10 250 5 008 Side1 SepDC 009 Sid...

Page 565: ...e2 SepAC 2844 Sp2 FC MH Special Paper 2 FC Medium High 2845 Sp2 FC HH Special Paper 2 FC High 2844 2845 017 Side1 PTR 10 250 5 10 250 5 018 Side1 SepDC 10 250 5 019 Side1 SepAC 10 250 5 10 250 5 027 Side2 PTR 10 250 5 028 Side2 SepDC 029 Side2 SepAC 2851 Sp3 K Bias Set Bias for Special Paper 3 K These SPs set the standard values of the electrical charges that are applied to 1 create bias for image...

Page 566: ... Thresh All of hese settings Apply to printing on Special Paper 3 in the black and white mode Apply only to the image area The title of each SP tells you the side and size where the setting is applied at ITB to paper transfer for example Side1 Size1 PTR means the setting applies to only Side 1 of Size 1 when the image is transferred from belt to paper at the PTR 2861 Size Coeff Sp3 Size Correction...

Page 567: ...ading edge Applies only to printing in black and white mode on Special Paper 3 001 ITB 0 30 1 mm 002 PTR 003 SepDC 004 SepAC 2873 TEdge Cor Sp3 K PTR Trailing Edge Correction for Special Paper 3 K Sets the bias applied at the trailing edge when the image is transferred from ITB to paper by setting the start timing for SP2874 002 at the trailing edge Applied to the trailing edge for black and white...

Page 568: ...de1 PTR 008 Side1 SepDC 009 Side1 SepAC 012 Side2 PTR 013 Side2 SepDC 014 Side2 SepAC 2877 LEdge SWT Sp3 FC Leading Edge Switch Timing for Special Paper 3 FC Sets the switch OFF timing of SP2876 The selected value is the number of mm from the leading edge Applies only to printing in full color mode on Special Paper 3 001 ITB 0 30 1 mm 002 PTR 003 SepDC 004 SepAC 2878 TEdge Cor Sp3 FC PTR Trailing ...

Page 569: ...ld 2 SP2883 More than SP2304 002 Threshold 2 up to SP2304 003 Threshold 3 SP2884 More than SP2304 003 Threshold 3 up to SP2304 004 Threshold 4 SP2885 More than SP2304 004 Threshold 4 These settings apply only to the image area printed on Special Paper 3 in black and white mode 2881 2882 2883 007 Side1 PTR 10 250 5 10 250 5 10 250 5 008 Side1 SepDC 10 250 5 009 Side1 SepAC 012 Side2 PTR 10 250 5 10...

Page 570: ...2 PTR 10 250 5 028 Side2 SepDC 10 250 5 029 Side2 SepAC 10 250 5 10 250 5 2894 Sp3 FC MH Special Paper 3 FC Medium High 2895 Sp3 FC HH Special Paper 3 FC High 2894 2895 017 Side1 PTR 10 250 5 10 250 5 018 Side1 SepDC 10 250 5 10 250 5 019 Side1 SepAC 10 250 5 10 250 5 027 Side2 PTR 10 250 5 028 Side2 SepDC 029 Side2 SepAC 10 250 5 2901 Disp T H Sn K_PCU Temperature Humidity Sensor PCU This SPs dis...

Page 571: ...Note This function is OFF Changing this setting is normally not required for this machine 001 Pattern Interval Sets the number of pages between patterns 0 200 1 pg 002 Pattern Light Sets the density of the pattern 0 63 1 003 Page Cnt Disp Displays the count for the number of blade prevention patterns 0 200 1 pg 2905 Used Toner Mtr 2 Used Toner Motor 2 Waste toner distribution motor Control The was...

Page 572: ... the supply of toner to the PCUs For more see Toner Supply Control in Section 6 11 4 Details of the Service Manual 001 Current Val K 0 00 5 00 00 00 0 1 V 002 Current Val M 003 Current Val C 004 Current Val Y 3002 Vtcnt Disp Set Display Vtcnt TD Sensor Control Voltage Use SP 3002 001 to 004 to display and confirm the present Vtcnt setting Vtcnt is the TD sensor control voltage If there is a large ...

Page 573: ...er limit of coverate The result of this calculation is used to calculate Vtref Note Vtref is the TD sensor reference voltage It is frequently updated to stabilize the toner concentration in the development unit 001 Current Val K 002 Current Val M 003 Current Val C 004 Current Val Y 0 5 00 0 V 005 Initial Val K 006 Initial Val M 007 Initial Val C 008 Initial Val Y 0 5 00 0 V 3021 Set Vt Shift Set V...

Page 574: ...etween pages 002 Corr Amt k 003 Corr Amt M 004 Corr Amt C 005 Corr Amt Y 0 100 0 V 006 Corr Amt k 007 Corr Amt M 008 Corr Amt C 009 Corr Amt Y 0 100 0 V 010 Vtref Corr Target K 011 Vtref Corr Target M 012 Vtref Corr Target C 013 Vtref Corr Target Y 100 0 cm2 014 Corr Thresh M 015 Corr Thresh C 016 Corr Thresh Y 017 Corr Thresh K 100 0 cm2 3101 ID Pattern Disp ID Sensor Pattern Coverage Display Dis...

Page 575: ...e level of the ID sensor LED after Vsg has been adjusted Normal Vsg readings of the ITB bare surface reflectivity should be in the range 4 0 0 2V 001 lfsg Col Ctr 002 lfsg K Last 0 4096 1 003 lfsg Col Ave Not used 004 lfsg K Ave Not used 3141 ID Sn Vmin Vmin Value Read by ID Sensor Displays the minimum values read from the 10 grade patterns read by the ID sensors during process control The Front i...

Page 576: ...K 002 M 003 C 004 Y 0 10000 1 sec 005 Toner Pump CL K 006 Toner Pump CL M 007 Toner Pump CL C 008 Toner Pump CL Y Use these SPs to display the accumulated drive time for each powder pump clutch before installing a new one These SPs are reset to zero after the clutches are replaced 3301 Tnr Supply Select Toner Supply Method 001 K 002 M 003 C 004 Y 0 1 1 0 Fixed toner supply 1 PID Toner Supply 3302 ...

Page 577: ... or 2 is selected for SP3301 to enable fuzzy logic as the toner supply method The machine reads 1 the maximum and minimum settings of this SP and 2 the toner consumption of the output image surface pixel count data Then it calculates the maximum and minimum amount of toner for that image After this is done toner supply amount will not change during the job even if Vt or any other measurement deter...

Page 578: ...hever limit is exceed first page count 003 004 or coverage 005 006 001 TE Sheets Min K 002 TE Sheets Min Col Sets the minimum number of pages to print black or color after the toner near end alert until toner end 0 50 1 003 TE Sheets Max K 004 TE Sheets Max Col Sets the maximum number of pages to print black and white or full color after the toner near end alert until toner end based on page count...

Page 579: ... 008 Dev DC Control SP3576 000 008 Chrg DC Control SP3577 000 008 Chrg AC Control SP3581 000 008 LD Power Control SP3551 001 002 Procon Int SP3554 001 Init ProCon Set SP3801 001 DevSetup Execute SP3811 001 006 DevSetup Execute Reference SPs with Fixed Selected SP2201 001 009 Set DC Charge SP2202 001 009 Set AC Charge SP2211 001 009 Set LD Power SP2212 001 009 Set Dev DC 002 Potential Ctrl Switches...

Page 580: ...e drum and then transferred to the ITB On the drum the potential sensor uses their readings of this pattern to determine development potential On the ITB the ID sensors use their readings of this pattern to determine the amount of toner coverage necessary For more about process control see Process Control in Section 6 11 of the Service Manual 001 K Value 002 M Value 003 C Value 004 Y Value Display...

Page 581: ... Sets fusing temperature threshold for execution of the process control self check execution after a cold start If the machine is switched OFF and then switched ON again the automatic process control self check will not execute if the fusing temperature remains above 100 o C default Note Use SP3554 001 to display the results of the process control self check 0 150 1 deg C 3561 Dev Disp Set Set Dis...

Page 582: ...e laser The existence of this residual voltage is used as an indicator to determine the level of deterioration of the drum Vr becomes larger as the drum deteriorates Normal range for Vr 200V to 0V 001 K 002 M 003 C 004 Y 300 to 300 1 V 3571 Display V0 Display Vd Value for Control of Charge Potential Displays the value for V0 the measure of drum potential on dark areas of the drum before laser expo...

Page 583: ...e machine performs a calculation using development gamma Vk and the maximum coverage and then uses the result to lookup and retrieve the correct voltage from the Potential Table This retrieved value is used to raise the input current of the laser diode 001 K 002 M 003 C 004 Y 999 0 1 V 3575 Dev DC Control Display Value for Control of Development DC Displays the deveopment bias that was referenced ...

Page 584: ...ow Spd half speed Paper weight 128 o 256 g m2 3581 LD Power Control Display Value for Control of LD Power Displays the LD power that was referenced during processing control and used in the previous jobs Process control is set for Auto with SP3501 001 001 Std Spd K 002 Std Spd M 003 Std Spd C 004 Std Spd Y 117 127 1 Std Spd normal speed 52 to 128 g m2 006 Low Spd K 007 Low Spd M 008 Low Spd C 009 ...

Page 585: ...5 C 006 Y 3802 TD Sn Init OK Display Result of TD Sensor Initialization This SP displays the results of the TD sensor initialization with SP3801 001 006 The machine returns the status of the previous initialization with numbers 1 digit for each PCU The numbers are read in order as K M C Y Four numbers are used to indicate the status of the execution 1 OK success 2 Cancelled door opened etc 4 Not e...

Page 586: ...ecuted correctly SP3811 001 is done only at machine installation or after a drum and cleaning blade has been replaced in the PCU SP3801 001 to 006 is done after developer replacement for one or more PCUs Never do TD sensor initializations SP3801 001 to 006 after SP3811 001 Developer Set Up See also the relating pages chapters 1 32 ch 3 1 6 and ch 3 5 7 001 Devr Setup All 0 1 1 002 Devr Setup Col 0...

Page 587: ...cution Use this SP to display the history of process control executions These SP codes are used to troubleshoot processing control For more see 4 2 4 Process Control Troubleshooting in Section 4 Troubleshooting 0 99999999 1 001 History Last 006 History Last 6 002 History Last 2 007 History Last 7 003 History Last 3 008 History Last 8 004 History Last 4 009 History Last 9 005 History Last 5 010 His...

Page 588: ...Mask for Scale Edge Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gap between the original and the scale This can be done for both scanning on the exposure glass book mode and the ADF ADF for the leading and trailing edges 001 Book Sub LEdge 002 Book Sub TEdge 003 Book Main LEdge 004 Book Main TEdge 005 ADF Sub LEdge 007 ADF Main LEdge 008 ADF Main TEdge 0 30 0 1...

Page 589: ...ease the level of sensitivity If warnings are issued when you see no black streaks in copies lower the setting 0 8 1 003 Dust Reject Lvl Sets the level for vertical line correction caused by dust A high setting can eliminate unwanted vertical lines caused by dust but it can also thin vertical lines of the original 0 4 1 4205 B W ADS Lvl Black and White ADS Level This SP sets the background level f...

Page 590: ...tern CMYK 1 Gradation Main Scan A 14 Color Patch CMYK 2 Gradation Main Scan B 15 Gray Pattern 1 3 Gradation Main Scan C 16 Gray Pattern 2 4 Gradation Main Scan D 17 Gray Pattern 3 5 Gradation Sub Scan 1 18 Shading Pattern 6 Grid Pattern 19 Thin Line Pattern 7 Slant Grid Pattern 20 Scanned Grid Pattern 8 Gradation RGBCMYK 21 Scanned Grayscale 9 UCR Pattern 22 Scanned Color Patch 10 Color Patch 16 1...

Page 591: ...ght areas for ACC correction For more see 4 2 5 Color Adjustment for Connected Copiers 4506 ACC Cor Dark ACC Correction Dark Areas Sets correction for dark areas for ACC correction 001 004 Master K M C Y 005 008 Slave K M C Y 128 128 1 4540 Print Coverage Print Coverage Correction This SP corrects printer coverage of 12 hues RY YR YG etc x 4 Colors K C M Y for a total of 48 parameters 001 004 RY K...

Page 592: ... Application sRGB Color Photo Paper 4562 SApli Auto Col Scanner Application Auto Color 005 MTF Lvl 0 15 Sets the MTF level Modulation Transfer Function designed to improve image contrast Set higher for stronger effect lower for weaker effect 0 15 1 006 Smooth 0 7 Use to remove jaggies if they appear Set higher for smoother 0 7 1 007 Brightness 1 255 Set higher for darker set lower for lighter 1 25...

Page 593: ... 0 1 1 4631 Gain Adj Range R Gain Adjustment Range R DFU When switched ON this SP displays the current range for the E EVEN or O ODD gain of RED in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time the machine is switched ON 001 RE 002 RO 0 1 1 4632 Gain Adj Range G Gain Adjustment Range G DFU When switched ON this SP displays the current range for E EVEN or O ODD gain of GREEN or B W in...

Page 594: ...fter white level adjustment every time the machine is switched ON 001 RE 002 RO 0 1023 1 4681 Fact Gain Adj G Factory Gain Adjustment at Factory Green DFU When switched ON this SP displays the setting done at the factory for GREEN and black and white O ODD and E EVEN gain in the ASCI on the SBU after white level adjustment every time the machine is switched ON 001 Color GE 002 Color GO 005 B W GE ...

Page 595: ...93 Black Lvl Scan R Black Level Scan Value Red DFU When switched ON these SP codes display E EVEN or O ODD for the black level check done in the SBU for RED after the machine is switched ON 001 REE 002 ROE 003 REO 004 ROO 0 255 1 4694 Black Lvl Scan G Black Level Scan Value Green DFU When switched ON these SP codes display E EVEN or O ODD for the black level check done in the SBU for GREEN after t...

Page 596: ...is SP tests the components of the BICU Test 1 performs write and read tests the CPU by conducting a compare check that reads and writes to each register of the ASIC Test 2 performs a check of the image paths and connections and displays the location of a defect of an error is detected 001 Test 1 002 Test 2 0 65535 1 4905 Select Dithering Select Dithering Type This SP changes the threshold paramete...

Page 597: ... 004 Set Std Chart DFU 4991 Image Path SW Image Path Switch Use this SP to use the 10 key pad to enter the number to determine the image path 001 IPU 0 14 1 0 DFID input RGB images upper 8 bits 1 Synchronous RGB images in DFID 2 Data with shading correction on 3 Data with shading correction OFF 4 Data before black offset correction 5 Data after black offset correction 6 Shading data 7 Test pattern...

Page 598: ...M C and black K 1 Paper counter Shows the total page counts for Color Total Black Total Color Copies Black Copies Color Prints Black Prints 5047 Reverse Paper Display Determines whether the tray loaded with paper printed on one side is displayed 0 1 1 0 Not displayed 1 Displayed 5051 Toner Refill Detection Display Japan Only 5112 Non Std Paper Sel Determines whether a non standard paper size can b...

Page 599: ... 0 None 1 Expansion Device 1 2 Expansion Device 2 3 Expansion Device 3 5118 Disable Copying Temporarily denies access to the machine Japan Only 0 1 1 0 Release for normal operation 1 Prohibit access to machine 5120 Mode Clear Opt Counter Removal Do not change Japan Only 0 2 1 0 Yes Normal reset 1 Standby Resets before job start after completion 2 No Normally no reset 5121 Counter Up Timing Determi...

Page 600: ...p the bypass tray for long paper 0 1 1 0 Off 1 On Sets the tray for feeding paper up to 600 mm long With this SP selected on paper jams are not detected in the paper path 5154 Exit Tray Set 001 Limitless Allows limitless paper output 0 1 1 0 Off 1 On Once the initial paper exit is full another will be selected automatically Switch this SP on only in the job queuing mode i e when printing jobs in t...

Page 601: ...ches can be adjusted 5212 Page Numbering 003 Duplex Printout Left Right Position Horizontally positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing 10 10 1 mm 0 is center minus is left is right 004 Duplex Printout High Low Position Vertically positions the page numbers printed on both sides during duplexing 10 10 1 mm 0 is center minus is down is up 5302 Set Time DFU Sets the time cloc...

Page 602: ...igit If 0 is selected for Sunday for example and the selected Sunday is the start of the 2nd week then input a 2 for this digit 5th 6th The time when the change occurs 24 hour as hex code Example 00 00 Midnight 00 01 00 1 a m 01 and so on 7th The number of hours to change the time 1 hour 1 8th If the time change is not a whole number 1 5 hours for example digit 8 should be 3 30 minutes 001 Setting...

Page 603: ...he length of time to determine the length of an unattended paper jam 03 30 1 This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 012 Jam Detection Continuous Count Sets the number of continuous paper jams required to initiate a call 02 10 1 This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is enabled set to 1 013 Door Open Time Length Sets the length of time the remains opens to determine ...

Page 604: ... to sound for the number of copies 1 999 1 K 5513 002 DF Sets the parts replacement alarm counter to sound for the number of scanned originals 1 999 1 K 5514 Parts Alarm Level Japan Only 001 Normal 002 DF 5610 ACC Factory Setting DFU 004 Recall 005 Overwrite 005 Previoius Setting 5611 2 Col Tnr Ratio Adjust Toner Ratio Between 2 Colors DFU Adjusts the toner ratio between color pairs Black Cyan Mag...

Page 605: ...nter Not used 009 Scanner application Initializes the defaults for the scanner and all the scanner SP modes 010 Web Service Network application Deletes the Netfile NFA management files and thumbnails and initializes the Job login ID Netfiles Jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and the DeskTopBinder software 011 NCS Initializes the system defaults and interface settings IP addres...

Page 606: ...SC542 SC545 Heating roller thermistor 1 SC547 Zero Cross SC548 SC550 Heating roller thermistor 2 SC551 Pressure roller thermistor SC553 SC555 Pressure roller thermistor SC662 SC565 Hot roller thermistor 5811 Machine No Setting Displays the machine serial number 5812 Service Tel No Setting 001 Service Inputs the telephone number of the CE displayed when a service call condition occurs 002 Facsimile...

Page 607: ...d Item initial setting not shown 1 Disable Item for initial setting shown 007 SSL Disable Controls if RCG Remote Communication Gate confirmation is done by SSL during an RCG send for the NRS over a network interface 0 1 1 0 Yes SSL not used 1 No SSL used 008 RCG Connect Timeout Sets the length of time seconds for the time out when the RCG Remote Communication Gate connects during a call via the NR...

Page 608: ... connection between the machine and a computer 0 1 1 0 Off 1 On 052 ECP Centro Disables and enables the ECP feature 1284 Mode for data transfer 0 1 1 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 065 Job Spool Setting Switches job spooling spooling on and off 0 No spooling 1 Spooling enabled 066 Job Spool Clear This SP determines whether the job interrupted at power off is resumed at the next power on This SP operates onl...

Page 609: ...the network it can be used immediately by every computer on the network No special setup procedures or configuration settings are required 1 Enable 0 Disable 5832 HDD Formatting Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize then press When the execution ends cycle the machine off and on 001 HDD Formatting All 002 HDD Formatting IMH 003 HDD Formatting Thumbnail 004 HDD Formatting Job Log 005 ...

Page 610: ...e Format Converter MLB Media Link Board is installed 0 1 1 0 Disable 1 Enable 071 Reduction for Copy Color 0 3 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 DFU 072 Reduction for Copy B W Text 0 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 6 2 3 073 Reduction for Copy B W Other 0 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 6 2 3 074 Reduction for Printer Color 0 3 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 DFU 075 Reduction for Printer B W 0 6 1 0 1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 1 4 6 2 3 ...

Page 611: ...s for high quality sent to the Document Server with the MLB Media Link Board 5 95 1 093 Low Quality for JPEG Sets the quality level of JPEG images for low quality sent to the Document Server with the MLB Media Link Board 5 95 1 094 Default Format for Backup Files Sets the format of the backup files 0 2 1 0 TIFF 1 JPEG 2 For printing This feature can be selected only if SP5836 3 is set to 1 095 Def...

Page 612: ...sts the ID Node_Unique_ID assigned to the device by the system administrator Bit0 Off Bit1 On OFF Does not list the Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator Instead the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is used ON The Node_Unique_ID assigned by the system administrator is used and the Source_ID of the GASP header in the ARP is ignored Also when the serial bus is reset extra bus tr...

Page 613: ...equest while logging in the request is refused and the initiator logs out Note Displayed only when the wireless LAN card is installed 5841 Supply Name Setting Press the User Tools key These names appear when the user presses the Inquiry button on the User Tools screen 001 Toner Name Setting Black 002 Toner Name Setting Cyan 002 Toner Name Setting Yellow 004 Toner Name Setting Magenta 011 StapleStd...

Page 614: ...02 IP Address Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address The IP address under the transfer tab can be used with the initial system setting 0 FFFFFFFF 1 006 Delivery Error Display Time Use this setting to set the length of time that the message is shown when a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external device 0 999 1 008 IP Address Secondary Sets ...

Page 615: ...IEEE 1394 EUI The ID is displayed as either 6 byle or 8 byte binary 6 byte 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 8 byte 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 02X 002 Machine ID Clear Delivery Server Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable After clearing the ID the ID will be established again auto...

Page 616: ... card 052 Download All Directory Info Downloads all directory information from the IC card 053 Update Info Clear Deletes the address book uploaded from the SD card in the slot Deletes only the files uploaded for that machine This feature does not work if the card is write protected Note After you do this SP go out of the SP mode turn the power off Do not remove the SD card until the Power LED stop...

Page 617: ...d option installed 5 95 1 Web Service 5848 5847 2 sets the 4 bit switch assignment for the access control setting Setting of 0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router 5847 100 sets the maximum size of images that can be downloaded The default is equal to 1 gigabyte 001 Access Control NetFile Lower 4 Bits Only Bit switch settings 0000 No access control 0001 Denies access to DeskTop...

Page 618: ...during a remote ROM update This setting is reset to zero after the machine is cycled off and on Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable 0 1 1 0 Not allowed 1 Allowed 5857 Save Debug Log 001 On Off 1 ON 0 OFF Switches on the debug log feature The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on 0 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON 002 Target 2 HDD 3 SD Card Selects the destin...

Page 619: ...unt of space available on the SD card 014 Copy SD to SD Latest 4MB Copies the last 4MB of the log written directly to the card from shared memory onto an SD card 015 Copy SD to SD Latest 4MB Any Key This SP copies the log on an SD card the file that contains the information written directly from shared memory to a log specified by key number 5 10 016 Make HDD Debug This SP creates a 32 MB file to ...

Page 620: ...eived during this prescribed time 021 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail 0 1 1 0 No 1 Yes 022 SMTP Auth From Field Replacement Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated account after the SMTP server is validated 0 1 1 0 No From item not switched 1 Yes From item switched 025 SMTP Auth Direct ...

Page 621: ...or code If the same SC occurs again the machine does not reboot 1 The machine does not reboot when an SC error occurs The reboot does not occur for Type A SC codes 5878 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security Unit B735 Setup Press Execute to initialize the Data Overwrite Security option for the copier For more see 1 15 MFP Controller Options in Section 1 Installation 5880 ACS High Performance Mode Th...

Page 622: ...rrently controlling the display is not operating because a key has not been pressed 3 30 1 s Print Application Set No information is available at this time 102 0 1 1 1 5959 Set Size Set Size Tray 1 tandem tray and the LCT do not have automatic paper size detection Use these SP codes to set the paper size for Tray 1 and the optional LCT 001 Tray 1 Tandem The following paper sizes can be set If the ...

Page 623: ...installed 0 1 0 1 step 0 Light version supplied with this machine 1 Full version optional 5990 SP Print Mode SMC Print In the SP mode press Copy Window to move to the copy screen select the paper size then press Start Select A4 LT Sideways or larger to ensure that all the information prints Press SP Window to return to the SP mode select the desired print and press Execute 001 All Data List 002 SP...

Page 624: ...s more buckling 8 0 8 0 25 mm 8 0 8 0 25 mm 8 2 mm 8 2 mm 007 ADF TEdge EMargin These settings adjust the erase margin for the trailing edges for the front back 20 20 0 5 mm 20 10 mm 20 10 mm 6007 ADF Input Chk ADF Input Check Displays signals received from sensors and switches in the ADF 5 7 1 6008 ADF Output Chk ADF Output Check Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing 5 7...

Page 625: ...sizes to correct for skew a second time 0 1 1 6050 Adj Staple Pos Staple Position Adjustment Adjusts the position of the staples during corner stapling 6090 LCT Output Chk LCT Output Check Performs the output check for the optional LCT 001 LCT Feed Motor 002 LCT Pick up SOL 6101 Adj Punch Pos 1 Punch Position Adjustment Adjusts the punch hole positions in the direction of paper feed NA North Ameri...

Page 626: ...ole Registration Adjustment This SP corrects punch hole alignment by correcting the skew of each by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while the exit roller of the machine remains on This buckles the leading edge of the sheet slightly against the finisher entrance roller while it remains off 001 A3 SEF 500 500 0 3 mm 002 B4 SEF Value Increases time finisher entra...

Page 627: ...the finisher stapling tray 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEF 004 A4 LEF 005 B5 SEF 006 B5 LEF 007 DLT SEF 008 LG SEF 009 LT SEF 010 LT LEF 011 12 x18 012 Custom Size 15 15 0 5 mm Value Increases distance between jogger fences and the sides of the stack Value Decreases the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the stack 6106 Fine Adj Out Jog Fine Adjust Output Jogger Unit Fences This S...

Page 628: ...1 1 0 8 Kai 1 DLT 007 EU Taiwan 0 1 1 0 16 Kai SEF 1 LT 008 EU Taiwan 0 1 1 0 16 Kai SEF 1 LT SEF 6108 Adj Fold 1 Sheet Adjust Fold Position 1 Sheet Japan Only 001 A3 SEF 75 75 0 5 mm 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEf 004 B5 SEF 005 DLT SEF 006 LG SEF 007 LT SEF 008 12 x18 009 Custom Size 6109 Adj Corner Staple Adjust Staple Position of Corner Stapler This SP corrects the stapling position of the corner stapl...

Page 629: ...folding postion when paper is stapled and folded 001 A3 SEF 002 B4 SEF 003 A4 SEf 004 B5 SEF 005 DLT SEF 006 LG SEF 007 LT SEF 008 12 x18 009 Custom Size 3 3 0 2 mm Value Shifts staple position toward the crease Value Shifts staple position away from the crease Feed Out B132S924 WMF 6114 Book Fold Repeat Set Number of Folds This SP sets the number of times the folding rollers are driven forward an...

Page 630: ...eets This SP allows you to switch on punching of OHP sheets Normally OHP sheets cannot be punched If this SP is switched on 1 the performance of the finisher cannot be guaranteed the sheets may jam 0 1 1 6118 Output Jog On Output Jogger Operation Off On This SP switches the jogging operation of the output jogger attached to the side of the finisher off and on 0 1 1 0 Off 1 On Note After installati...

Page 631: ...Finisher 1 B700 B701 5 8 2 These are the output checks for the 2000 Sheet 3000 Sheet Finishers B700 B701 6124 Output Chk Fin3 Output Check Finisher 3 Japan Only These are output checks for the 3000 Sheet Finishers 001 Proof JG SOL 002 Stp JG SOL 003 End Roll SOL 004 Main M 1 005 Main M 2 006 Exit M 007 Stapler M 008 Punch M 009 Tray Lift M 010 Jogger M 011 Stp Shift M 012 Feed Out M 013 Shift M 01...

Page 632: ...ub Scan 006 LG SEF Sub Scan 007 LT SEF Sub Scan 008 12 x18 Sub Scan 009 Custom Sub Scan 6900 ADF Bottom Lift ADF Bottom Lift Plate This SP setting determines whether the bottom plate lift motor of the of the ARDF switches on when the original is set in the ARDF original tray or when the Start key is pressed The ARDF bottom plate lift motor raises the bottom plate that pushes up the original tray a...

Page 633: ... Displays the total number of SCs logged SC History 001 Latest 002 Latest 1st 003 Latest 2nd 004 Latest 3rd 005 Latest 4th 006 Latest 5th 007 Latest 6th 008 Latest 7th 009 Latest 8th 7403 010 Latest 9th Displays the latest 10 SC codes 7502 Total Paper Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy jams 7503 Total Original Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy jams ...

Page 634: ...sor 3 023 Dup Ent Sn Late Duplex Entrance Sensor 024 LCT Relay LCT Relay Sensor Late 034 Bypass PE Sn Off Bypass Paper End Sensor 053 1st Feed Sn Lag 1st Paper Feed Sensor Lag 054 2nd Feed Sn Lag 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Lag 055 3rd Feed Sn Lag 3rd Paper Feed Sensor Lag 056 4th Feed Sn Lag 4th Paper Feed Sensor Lag 057 LCT Feed Sn Lag LCT Paper Feed Sensor 058 Trans 1 Sn Lag 1st Vertical Transport Se...

Page 635: ...2 Stapler Shift M Stapler Shift Motor 133 Stapler M Stapler Motor Unit 2 134 Folder Plate M Folder Plate Motor 135 Feed Out Belt M Feed Out Belt Motor 136 Paper Punch Motor Paper Punch Motor 137 Z Folding Z Fold Jam 7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred Press the appropriate key to display the jam cou...

Page 636: ...he failure of a sensor to activate On Operation Panel Actual Component Name 166 Paper Feed Sn Paper Feed Sensor 167 Vert Transport Path Vertical Transport Path 168 BotPlt Pos Sn Bottom Plate Position Sensor 7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations 3000 Sheet Finisher B701 Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for th...

Page 637: ...05 Feed Out Belt Motor Feed Out Belt Motor 206 Paper Punch Motor Paper Punch Motor 7504 Paper Jam Loc Paper Jam Locations Z Folding Unit B660 Japan Only Displays the list of possible locations where a jam could have occurred Press the appropriate key to display the jam count for that location These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate On Operation Panel Actual Component Name 211 ...

Page 638: ...or that location These jams are caused by the failure of a sensor to activate On Operation Panel Actual Component Name 001 At Power On At Power On 003 Separation Sn Late Separation Sensor Late 004 Skew Cor Sn Late Skew Correction Sensor Late 005 Interval Sn Late Interval Sensor Late 006 Reg Sn Late Registration Sensor Late 007 Exit Sn Late Exit Sensor Late 008 Inv Switch Sn Late Inverter Switchbac...

Page 639: ...Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 009 Latest 8 010 Latest 9 Displays the following items for the last 10 copy paper jams 1 Jam code 2 Paper size 3 Total count when jam occurred 4 Date of jam The jam codes are listed in the SMC report under SP7504 7508 Original Jam History 001 Original Latest 002 Latest 1 003 Latest 2 004 Latest 3 005 Latest 4 006 Latest 5 007 Latest 6 008 Latest 7 00...

Page 640: ...ter Reset Press Start to reset the SC and jam counters 7826 MF Error Counter Japan Only Displays the number of counts requested of the card key counter 001 Error Total A request for the count total failed at power on This error will occur if the device is installed but disconnected 002 Error Staple The request for a staple count failed at power on This error will occur if the device is installed b...

Page 641: ...ear Counter 7901 Assert Info DFU 001 Filename 002 Line No 003 Value Used for debugging 7931 Toner Info K Toner Information Black 7932 Toner Info M Toner Information Magenta 7933 Toner Info C Toner Information Cyan 7934 Toner Info Y Toner Information Yellow Displays detailed information about the toner used in the machine 001 Model ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Production ID 006...

Page 642: ...d Motor 011 Fusing Exit Mot Fusing Exit Motor 7936 TtldrvtimeDisp Total Drive Time Display This SP displays the total drive time of the K drum motor before the last reset 7937 MotdrvtimeRst Motor Drive Time Reset These SPs allow you to reset to zero the total drive time for each motor listed below 001 OPCMot K 002 OPCMot M 003 OPCMot C 004 OPCMot Y Drum Motors 005 DrvMot K 006 DrvMot M 007 DrvMot ...

Page 643: ...ith others can provide useful information SP Numbers What They Do SP8 211 SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server SP8 401 SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server SP8 691 SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server Specifically the following questions can be answered How is the document server actually being used What application is using the do...

Page 644: ...cuted for each application when the job was not stored on the document server L Local storage document server Totals jobs pages etc for the document server The L counters work differently case by case Sometimes they count jobs pages stored on the document server this can be in document server mode from the document server window or from another mode such as from a printer driver or by pressing the...

Page 645: ...y Generation Copy Mode GPC Get Print Counter For jobs 10 pages or less this counter does not count up For jobs larger than 10 pages this counter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10 e g for an 11 page job the counter counts up 11 10 1 IFax Internet Fax ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI e g border removal adding stamps page numbers etc K Black YMCK LS Local ...

Page 646: ...t Used Rez Resolution SC Service Code Error SC code displayed Scn Scan Sim Simplex Simplex printing on 1 side S to Email Scan to E mail SMC SMC report printed with SP5990 All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the SMC report Svr Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send Transmission YMC Yellow Magenta Cyan YMCK Yellow Magenta Cyan BlacK NOTE All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with S...

Page 647: ...r are counted Jobs executed by the service engineer using the SP modes are not counted When using secure printing when a password is required to start the print job the job is counted at the time when either Delete Data or Specify Output is specified When a copy job on the document server is printed SP8022 also increments and when a print job stored on the document server is printed SP8024 also in...

Page 648: ...s reveal how files printed from the document server were stored on the document server originally 0 9999999 1 The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with another application the C counter increments When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was sto...

Page 649: ...ument server that were later accessed for transmission over the telephone line or over a network attached to an e mail 0 9999999 1 Note Jobs merged for sending are counted separately The L counter counts the number of jobs scanned from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel When a stored copy job is sent from the document server the C counter increments When images stored on...

Page 650: ...de screen at the operation panel The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode O FIN Jobs 0 9999999 1 8 067 These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external application over the network The finishing method is specified by the application 8 06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode When a stored copy job is set for Sort and then stored o...

Page 651: ...by size based on the number of pages in the job 8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21 50 Pages 8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51 100 Pages 8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101 300 Pages 8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301 500 Pages 8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 700 Pages 8 07x 6 6 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 1000 Pages 8 07x 7 11 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 Pages For example When a copy job stored on the document server is printed in document...

Page 652: ...ith color 8 131 3 ACS Count for the number of jobs using ACS mode These counters count jobs not pages If the job is stored on the document server after the job is stored it is determined to be color or black and white then counted If the job is cancelled during scanning or if the job is cancelled while the document is waiting to be sent the job is not counted If the job is cancelled during sending...

Page 653: ...f the job is cancelled during sending it may or may not be counted depending on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled Even if several files are combined for sending the transmission counts as one job T Deliv Jobs PC 0 9999999 1 8 151 These SPs count the total number of jobs scanned and sent to a folder on a PC Scan to PC Note At the present time 8 151 and 8 155 perf...

Page 654: ...lor charts to adjust color Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned Scans made in SP mode are not counted Examples If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored the S count is 4 If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File button in the...

Page 655: ... Scan PGS LS 8 215 S Scan PGS LS 8 216 L Scan PGS LS These SPs count the number of pages scanned into the document server 0 9999999 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen Reading user stamp data is not counted If a job is cancelled the pages output as far as...

Page 656: ...plex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1 If a jam occurs during the job recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting Also the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output Scan PGS Mode 0 9999999 1 8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work load on the ADF 8 231 1 Large Volume Selectable Large...

Page 657: ... the number of pages scanned and stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen 8 241 8 242 8 245 8 246 8 24x 1 Text Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 2 Text Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 3 Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 4 GenCopy Pale Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 5 Map Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 24x 6 Normal Detail Yes No No No 8 24x 7 Fin...

Page 658: ...and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen T Scn PGS ColCr 0 9999999 1 8 261 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by the color processing mode used 8 261 1 Color Conversion 8 261 2 Color Erase 8 261 3 Background 8 261 4 Other C Scn PGS ColCr 0 9999999 1 8 262 These SPs count the number of pages by the color processing mode used for Copy jobs only 8 262 1 Color Con...

Page 659: ...y application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output printing page size SP 8 442 S Scan PGS Size 0 9999999 1 8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application Use these totals to compare original page size scanning and output page size SP 8 445 L Scan PGS Size 0 9999999 1 8 306 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scann...

Page 660: ...e number of pages printed by the customer The counter for the application used for storing the pages increments 0 9999999 1 The L counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel Pages stored with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen go to the C counter When the A3 DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104 1 A...

Page 661: ... 8 404 P PrtPGS LS 8 405 S PrtPGS LS 8 406 L PrtPGS LS These SPs count the number of pages printed from the document server The counter for the application used to print the pages is incremented The L counter counts the number of jobs stored from within the document server mode screen at the operation panel 0 9999999 1 Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the L c...

Page 662: ...or printing from within the document server mode window at the operation panel O PrtPGS Dup Comb 0 9999999 1 8 427 These SPs count by binding and combine and n Up settings the number of pages processed for printing by Other applications 8 42x 1 Simplex Duplex 8 42x 2 Duplex Duplex 8 42x 3 Book Duplex 8 42x 4 Simplex Combine 8 42x 5 Duplex Combine 8 42x 6 2 2 pages on 1 side 2 Up 8 42x 7 4 4 pages ...

Page 663: ...PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 9999999 1 8 436 These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the document server mode window t the operation panel with the three features below O PrtPGS ImgEdt 0 9999999 1 8 437 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with Other applications 8 43x 1 Cover Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip sheets inserted The count for ...

Page 664: ...int paper size the number of pages printed by the scanner application L PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 1 8 446 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel O PrtPGS Ppr Size 0 9999999 1 8 447 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Other applications 8 44x 1 A3 8 44x 2 A4 8 44x 3 A5 8 44x 4 ...

Page 665: ...counter is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers However these counts are based on output timing Blank sheets covers chapter covers slip sheets are also counted During duplex printing pages printed on both sides count as 1 and a page printed on one side counts as 1 C PrtPGS Ppr Type 0 9999999 1 8 462 These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed b...

Page 666: ...ts done with printer drivers with PC applications such as Excel are also counted Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored on the document server are not counted Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce Enlarge copying are counted The magnification rates of blank cover sheets slip sheets etc are automatically assigned a rate of 100 8 481...

Page 667: ...the results of the ACS execute is used to increment the appropriate counter If a color stamp is selected for printing on a monochrome document the count is for B W If the output is black and white even if color print mode was selected the pages count as Full Color The color mode selected for a document stored on the document server is counted The color selection cannot be changed once the document...

Page 668: ... emulation mode the total number of pages printed 8 514 1 RPCS 8 514 2 RPDL 8 514 3 PS3 8 514 4 R98 8 514 5 R16 8 514 6 GL GL2 8 514 7 R55 8 514 8 RTIFF 8 514 9 PDF 8 514 10 PCL5e 5c 8 514 11 PCL XL 8 514 12 IPDL C 8 514 13 BM Links Japan Only 8 514 14 Other SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results as they are both limited to the Print application Print jobs output to the document server are no...

Page 669: ...t by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner application L PrtPGS FIN 0 9999999 1 8 526 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed from within the document server mode window at the operation panel 8 52x 1 Sort 8 52x 2 Stack 8 52x 3 Staple 8 52x 4 Booklet 8 52x 5 Z Fold 8 52x 6 Punch 8 52x 7 Other Note If stapling is selected for finishing and the s...

Page 670: ...Yes Yes SP7003 029 8 581 10 Total Color Yes Yes SP7003 030 8 581 11 Total B W Yes Yes SP7003 023 C Counter 0 9999999 1 8 582 These SPs count the total output broken down by color output for the Copy application only Note These SPs are supported by color copy MFP machines only These counters are displayed in the SMC Report and in the User Tools display on the copy machine MFP Color Replaced 8 582 1...

Page 671: ...ent server applications 8 651 1 B W 8 651 2 Color Supported by Color MFP machines only S S to Email PGS 0 9999999 1 8 655 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e mail for the Scan application only 8 655 1 B W 8 655 2 Color Supported by Color MFP machines only Notes The count for B W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD If the job is cance...

Page 672: ...ications 8 666 1 B W 8 666 2 Color Supported by Color MFP machines only Notes The B W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router server If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes the counts are not done The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server T Deliv PGS PC 0 9999999 1 ...

Page 673: ...ending the number of pages stored are counted for the application that stored them TX PGS Port 0 9999999 1 8 701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them For example if a 3 page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4 the count for ISDN G3 G4 is 12 8 701 1 PSTN 1 8 701 2 PSTN 2 8 701 3 PSTN 3 8 701 4 ISDN G3 G4 8 701 5 Network T Scan PGS Comp 0 9999999...

Page 674: ...d Toner Use Count Color 0 65 535 8 781 These SPs count the frequency of use number of rotations of the development rollers for black and other color toners 8 781 1 K Black toner 8 781 2 M Magenta toner 8 781 3 C Cyan toner 8 781 4 Y Yellow toner 8 791 1 LS Memory Remain This SP displays the percent of space available on the document server for storing documents 0 100 1 Toner Remain 0 100 1 8 801 T...

Page 675: ...toner 8 851 4 Y Yellow toner Toner Coverage 11 20 0 65 535 8 861 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners 8 861 1 K Black toner 8 861 2 M Magenta toner 8 861 3 C Cyan toner 8 861 4 Y Yellow toner Toner Coverage 21 30 0 65 535 8 871 These SPs count the percentage of dot coverage for black other color toners 8 871 1 K Black toner 8 871 2 M Magenta toner 8 871 3 C C...

Page 676: ...g 8 941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating Includes time while controller saves data to HDD Does not include time spent in Energy Save Low Power or Off modes 8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performing background printing 8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on Includes time while machine is performing background printing 8 941 5 Off Mode...

Page 677: ... registrations 8 951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrations for relay TX 8 951 6 F Code F Code box registrations 0 9999999 1 8 951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations with the Program job settings feature 8 951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations with the Program job settings feature 8 951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations with the Program job se...

Page 678: ...e temperature humidity sensor on the K PCU is 41 C 105 8F or higher Note This keeps the temperature of the toner in the development unit below 50 C 122F which prevents toner clumping and other machine failures 0 1 1 0 OFF 1 ON default 002 System Stop History Displays whether or not System Stop Control has ever stopped the machine in the middle of the job 0 default System Stop Control has never sto...

Page 679: ... disabled Enable this SP mode ONLY WHEN 1 The temperature in the room is low and 2 There is condensation on the drum or charge roller and 3 The images on the printouts are blurry To enable the Peltier unit 1 Set this SP mode to a value of 1 and 2 Turn OFF the AOF function in User Program Mode NOTE There are some environmental conditions that the Peltier unit needs to operate ex humidity of 60 or h...

Page 680: ...ings 1005 Disp Version Display Version Displays the version of the controller firmware 1006 Sample Locked Print Enables and disables the document server When you select 0 the document server is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5 967 When you select 1 the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service Mode SP5 967 0 Link With Doc Svr 1 Enable Data Recall 1101 Recall...

Page 681: ...n ID max 041 Magenta Highlight 042 Magenta Shadow 043 Magenta Middle 044 Magenta ID max 061 Yellow Highlight 062 Yellow Shadow 063 Yellow Middle 064 Yellow ID max 0 to 30 15 1 step Save Tone Control Value 1105 Stores the print gamma adjusted with the Gamma Adj menu item as the current setting Before the machine stores the new current setting it moves the data currently stored as the current settin...

Page 682: ... has scanned the edge of the original create a margin 0 to 5 1 mm step 1007 Store Priority This program specifies how scanned data is processed as default 1 Send 2 Store Only 3 Send Store 1009 Remote Scan Disable This SP enables and disables remote scanning 0 Enable 1 Diable Group 2 Scanner Compression Ratio of Gray Scale 2021 This SP sets the compression ratio of grayscale images 001 Normal Image...

Page 683: ...1 0 3 Check the status of each item against the corresponding bit numbers listed in the table below 001 Tray 1 Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Rear Side Fence Closed Sensor Tray 1 Off On Bit 6 Rear Side Fence Open Sensor Tray 1 Off On Bit 5 Front Side Fence Closed Sensor Tray 1 Off On Bit 4 Front Side Fence Open Sensor Tray 1 Off On Bit 3 Paper Near End Sensor Tray 1 Off On Bit 2 Paper Height Sensor 1 Tray 1 ...

Page 684: ...1 1 0 1 A5 LEF 0 1 1 0 1 DLT 11 x17 1 1 1 0 0 LG 8 x14 1 0 1 1 0 LT SEF 8 x11 1 1 0 1 0 LT LEF 0 1 1 0 0 HLT SEF 0 1 1 1 0 HLT LEF 1 1 1 1 0 F4 8 x 13 1 1 0 1 1 Folio 8 x 13 0 1 0 1 1 F 8 x 13 0 1 1 1 1 Executive SEF 7 x10 1 0 1 0 0 Executive LEF 0 0 1 1 1 8K SEF 0 0 1 1 0 16 SEF 1 0 0 1 0 16 LEF 1 0 1 1 1 004 Paper Feed 4 Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Paper Height Sensor Tray 2 Bit 4 Paper Heig...

Page 685: ...d Sensor Right Tray Off On Bit 0 Right Tray Set Sensor Tray 1 Off On 007 Paper Feed 7 Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Paper Feed Sensor Tray 1 On Off Bit 6 Bit 5 Paper Feed Sensor Tray 2 On Off Bit 4 Paper Feed Sensor Tray 3 On Off Bit 3 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 1 On Off Bit 2 Bit 1 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 2 On Off Bit 0 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 3 On Off On Paper present Off No paper 008 Pa...

Page 686: ...Bit 5 Duplex Transport Sensor 3 Off On Bit 4 Duplex Inverter Sensor Off On Bit 3 Duplex Entrance Sensor Off On Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 011 Paper Trans 2 Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 LCT Relay Sensor Off On Bit 6 Paper Exit Relay Sensor Off On Bit 5 Registration Sensor Off On Bit 4 Guide Plate Position Sensor Off On Bit 3 Bit 2 Paper Exit Sensor Off On Bit 1 Paper Exit Relay Sensor Off On Bit 0 Off On 012 Paper T...

Page 687: ... A5 SEF L H H H L 8 x 14 SEF 8 x 13 SEF L H H L H 8 x 14 SEF A4 SEF L H L L H 8 x 14 SEF A3 SEF L H L L H 11 x 17 SEF A3 SEF L L L H H A3 SEF A3 SEF L L H H H Paper Size Table 013 Bypass Tray Bit 3 Tray Sensor SW NA EU Asia 1 2 3 4 5 Postcard 100 x 148 mm Postcard 100 x 148 mm L H H H H 5 x 8 SEF A5 SEF L H H H L 5 x 8 SEF A5 SEF L H H H L 8 x 14 SEF 8 x 13 SEF L H H L H 8 x 14 SEF A5 LEF L H L L ...

Page 688: ...it 4 Waste Toner Transport Motor Lock Off On Bit 3 Waste Toner Distribution Motor Lock Off On Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Off No Lock On Locked 017 Fan System 1 Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Paper Exit Fan Motor Lock Off On Bit 6 Duplex Fan Motor Front Lock Off On Bit 5 Duplex Fan Motor Rear Lock Off On Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Off No Lock On Locked 018 Fan System 2 Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor L...

Page 689: ...l Abnormal Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 021 Hi Volt SC2 Development Bias Power Pack Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 High Voltage Output Y Normal Abnormal Bit 6 High Voltage Output M Normal Abnormal Bit 5 High Voltage Output C Normal Abnormal Bit 4 High Voltage Output K Normal Abnormal Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 022 Hi Volt SC3 Transfer Power Pack Separation Power Pack Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 High Voltage Output Y Normal ...

Page 690: ...1 Belt or Sensor Defective 024 Toner Supply Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Toner End Sensor Y Off On Bit 6 Toner End Sensor M Off On Bit 5 Toner End Sensor C Off On Bit 4 Toner End Sensor K Off On Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Off Toner On Toner End 025 Fusing Temp Detect Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Pressure Roller Thermostat High Temp Off On Bit 6 Hot Roller Thermistor High Temp Off On Bit 5 Heating Roller Temperataure S...

Page 691: ... Bit 1 Drawer Set Off On Bit 0 027 Door Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Front Door Switches Off On Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 028 Peltier Unit Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 Peltier Unit Abnormal Off On Bit 6 Peltier Unit Fan Motor Off On Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 201 DIP Switches Bit Input 0 1 Bit 7 DIP SW7 Off On Bit 6 DIP SW6 Off On Bit 5 DIP SW5 Off On Bit 4 DIP SW4 Off On Bit 3 DIP SW3 Off ...

Page 692: ...2 PT Fan NS M24 056 Chage ac Y PCB7 014 Dupx Fan NS M20 057 Chage ac M PCB7 015 Dupx Fan Front NS M29 058 Chage ac C PCB7 016 Dupx Fan Front HS M29 059 Chage ac K PCB7 017 Dupx Fan Back NS M30 060 Dev dc Y PCB6 018 Dupx Fan Back HS M30 061 Dev dc M PCB6 019 Exit Fan NS M28 062 Dev dc C PCB6 021 PCB Box Fan1 NS M41 063 Dev dc K PCB6 023 PCB Box Fan2 NS M42 064 Dev ac Y PCB6 025 PSU Fan 1 NS 065 Dev...

Page 693: ...0 Bypass Feed CL MC1 176 Drum Mtr Y Haf M42 131 Pick up SOL Tray 1 SOL5 177 PCU Mtr K M37 132 Pick up SOL Tray 2 178 PCU Mtr K Haf M37 133 Pick up SOL Tray 3 SOL1 179 PCU Mtr M M36 134 Pick up SOL Tray 4 SOL3 180 PCU Mtr M Haf M36 135 Bypass Pick up SOL SOL15 181 PCU Mtr C M39 136 Rev SOL Tray 1 SOL6 182 PCU Mtr C Haf M39 137 Rev SOL Tray 2 183 PCU Mtr Y M38 138 Rev SOL Tray 3 SOL2 184 PCU Mtr Y H...

Page 694: ...1 On 4 Separation Sensor 0 Off 1 On 3 Original Set Sensor 0 Off 1 On 2 B5 Detection Sensor 0 Off 1 On 1 A4 Detection Sensor 0 Off 1 On 0 LG Detection Sensor 0 Off 1 On Group 2 Bit Part Component Status 7 APS Start Sensor 0 Off 1 On 6 ARDF Position Sensor 0 Off 1 On 5 Exit Sensor 0 Off 1 On 4 Original Width Sensor 5 0 Off 1 On 3 Original Width Sensor 4 0 Off 1 On 2 Original Width Sensor 3 0 Off 1 O...

Page 695: ... off the output check currently executing 6008 ADF Output Chk ADF Output Check Turns on the ADF electrical components individually for testing Select the component to test then press the ON button Besure to press the OFF button as soon as you hear the component turn on 001 ADF Feed M Fwd 007 ADF Bot Inv M Fwd 002 ADF Feed M Rev 008 ADF Bot Inv M Rev 003 ADF Trans M Fwd 009 ADF Pick up M Fwd 004 AD...

Page 696: ... 007 Exit Sn 032 Clamp Roll HP Sn 008 Exit Guide HP Sn 033 Fold Entrance Sn 009 Low Tray Hgt Sn 034 Bot Fence HP Sn 010 Up Tray Hgt Sn 035 Fol Cam HP Sn 011 Up Tray Full Sn 036 Fold Plate HP Sn 012 Stack Roll HP Sn 037 Fold Exit Sn 013 Joggr HP Sn 038 Book Full Sn 1 014 Feed Out HP Sn 039 Book Full Sn 2 015 Stp Tray Ppr Sn 040 BStapler 1 Op 016 Stp Tray HP Sn 041 BStapler 1 In 017 Stp Rotate HP Sn...

Page 697: ...018 Stp Edge Plate SOL 003 Low Trans M 019 Book Press SOL 004 Exit M 020 Stack JG M 005 Pos Roll M 021 Fold Bot Fence M 006 Shift M 022 Book Stp M Front 007 Exit Guide M 023 Book Stp M Back 008 Tray Lift M 024 Fold Plate M 009 Stack Roller M 025 Fold Roll M 010 Jogger M 026 Clamp Roll M 011 Feed Out M 027 Punch M 012 Stp Shift M 028 Punch Move M 013 Stp Rot M 029 Reg M 014 Corner Stp M 030 Output ...

Page 698: ...y Bot Plt Sn 025 Stack Plate HP 006 Tray Near Bot Sn 026 Exit Guide HP Sn 007 Release HP Sn 027 Stapler Return Sn 008 Jogger HP Sn 028 Stapler Ready Sn 009 Shift HP Sn 029 Stack Plate HP Sn 1 010 Stapler Side HP Sn 030 Stack Plate HP Sn 2 011 Stapler HP Sn 031 Stp Hammer HP Sn 012 Staple Sn 032 Retrun Drv HP Sn 013 Staple Tray Sn 033 Paper Hgt Sn 014 Door Open Sn 034 Tray Limit SW 015 Punch Sn 035...

Page 699: ...xit M Cont 003 Shift Exit M Cont 016 Open Exit M Cont 004 Proof SW SOL Cont 017 Fold Plate M 1 Op 005 Tray Lift M 1 Op 018 PrestackJG SOL 1Op 006 Jogger M 1 Op 019 Guide JG SOL 1 Op 007 Stp M 1 Op Horiz 020 Stp Return 1 Op 008 Stp M 1 Op 021 Fold M Front 1 Op 009 Punch M 1 Op 022 Fold M Back 1 Op 010 Stp JG SOL Cont 023 Return Drv M 1 Op 011 Stp Hammer M 1 Op 024 Return TransM 1Op 012 Feed Out M 1...

Page 700: ... machine follow the procedure below to set up the machine so the error information is saved automatically to the HDD 5 10 1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG The debug information cannot be saved the until the Save Debug Log function has been switched on and a target has been selected 1 Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on Press then use the 10 key pad to enter Press...

Page 701: ... data when an engine related SC code is generated 2 Controller SC Error Saves debug data when a controller related SC Code is generated 3 Any SC Error Saves data only for the SC code that you specify by entering code number 4 Jam Saves data for jams NOTE More than one event can be selected Example 1 To Select Items 1 2 4 Press the appropriate items s Press ON for each selection This example shows ...

Page 702: ...2223 SRM 3 256 IMH 4 1000 ECS 5 1025 MCS 6 4848 COPY 4400 GPS 5375 Scan 5682 NFA 7 2224 BICU 4500 PDL 5682 NFA 6600 WebDB 8 4600 GPS PM 3000 NCS 3300 PTS 9 2000 NCS 2000 NCS 6666 WebSys 10 2224 BICU 2000 NCS NOTE The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero 0 Key to Acronyms Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer D...

Page 703: ...table You cannot mix settings for the groups COPY PRINTER etc for 006 to 010 For example if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select the settings from the 9 available selections for the PRINTER column only One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log The size of this area is limited to 4 MB 5 10 2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD Retrieve the debug log by copying it f...

Page 704: ...er must have previously switched on the Save Debug Feature SP5857 001 and selected the hard disk as the save destination SP5857 002 1 When the error occurs on the operation panel press Clear Modes 2 On the operationl panel enter 01 then hold down for at least 3 sec until the machine beeps then release This saves the debug log to the hard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service repr...

Page 705: ...on before the log can be created completely If you execute this SP to create the log file beforehand this will greatly reduce the amount of time required to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD With the file already created on the HDD for the log file the data only needs to be recorded a new log file does not require creation To create a new log file execute SP5857 011 to delete the d...

Page 706: ...Features Printer Features Scanner Features Inquiry Counter You can use these tools while the machine is operating during a jam or even when a warning is displayed However you cannot move to the user screen while in the SP mode but you can easily switch between the SP mode screen and the operation screen by pressing Copy Window During machine operation in the jam mode or while a warning message is ...

Page 707: ...ument Server Output Printer ADF Original Table Elevation Job List Display Time Tray Paper Settings Paper Tray Priority Copier Paper Tray Priority Printer Tray Paper Size Tray 2 Tray Paper Size Tray 3 Paper Type Bypass Tray Paper Type Tray 1 Paper Type Tray 2 Paper Type Tray 3 Paper Type LCT Front Cover Select Tray Back Cover Select Tray Slip Sheet Tray Designation Sheet Tray 1 Designation Sheet Tr...

Page 708: ...unday Interface Settings Network IP Address Gateway Address DNS Configuration DDNS Configuration Domain Name WINS Configuration Effective Protocol NW Frame Type SMB Computer Name SMB Work Group Ethernet Speed Ping Command Permit SNMP V3 Communication Permit SSL TLS Communication Host Name Machine Name File Transfer Delivery Option SMTP Server SMTP Authentication POP Before SMTP POP3 Setting Admini...

Page 709: ...end Change Unit Management Display Print Counter Display Clear Print Counter Per User Address Book Management Address Book Program Change Delete Delete Group Address Book Edit Title Address Book Change Order Print Address Book Destination List Address Book Select Title Auto Delete File Delete All Files Program Change Delete LDAP Server Use LDAP Server AOF Always ON Service Test Call 5 11 3 MAINTEN...

Page 710: ...l Copy Function Key F1 Copy Function Key F2 Copy Function Key F3 Copy Function Key F4 Copy Function Key F5 Document Server Storage Key F1 Document Server Storage Key F2 Document Server Storage Key F3 Document Server Storage Key F4 Document Server Storage Key F5 Document Server Print Key 1 F1 Document Server Print Key 1 F2 Document Server Print Key 1 F3 Document Server Print Key 1 F4 Document Serve...

Page 711: ... Order in Combine Image Repeat Separation Line Double Copies Separation Line Separation Line in Combine Stamp Background Numbering Size Density Stamp Color Preset Stamp Stamp Priority Stamp Language Stamp Position COPY Stamp Position URGENT Stamp Position PRIORITY Stamp Position For Your Info Stamp Position PRELIMINARY Stamp Position For Internal Use Only Stamp Position CONFIDENTIAL Stamp Position...

Page 712: ...Back Page Stamping Position Page Numbering in Combine Stamp on Designating Slip Sheet Stamp Position P1 P2 Stamp Position 1 5 Stamp Position 1 2 Stamp Position P 1 P 2 Stamp Position 1 2 Stamp Position 1 1 1 2 Superimpose Input Output Switch to Batch SADF Auto Reset Rotate Sort Auto Paper Continue Auto Sort Memory Full Auto Scan Restart Select Stapling Position Top Left Select Stapling Position Bo...

Page 713: ...nt Page PDF Config Font Page Hex Dump Maintenance 4 Color Graphic Mode System Print Error Report Auto Continue Memory Overflow Job Separation Memory Usage Duplex Copies Blank Page Print B W Page Detect Spool Image Reserved Job Waiting Printer Language Sub Paper Size Page Size Letterhead Setting Bypass Tray Setting Priority Edge to Edge Printing Default Printer Language Host Intervace I O Buffer I ...

Page 714: ...inter Features Map Continued PCL Menu Orientation Form Lines Font Source Font Number Point Size Font Pitch Symbol Set Courier Font Extend A4 Width Append CR to LF Resolution PS Menu Data Format Resolution Color Setting Color Profile ...

Page 715: ...witch to Batch Mixed Original Sizes Priority Change Initial Mode Background Density of ADS Full Color Destination List Settings Destination List Display Priority 2 Select Title Send Settings TWAIN Standby Time File Type Priority Compression Black White Compression Gray Scale Full Color Print Delete Scanner Journal Print Scanner Journal Max E Mail Size Divide Send E Mail E Mail Information Language...

Page 716: ...pair Toner Black Telephone No Toner Yellow Serial No of Machine Toner Magenata Sales Representative Toner Cyan Telephone No Print Inquiry List To print the Inquiry List press Print Inquiry List read the displayed message then press Start on the operation panel 5 11 8 COUNTER Total Counter Print Counter List ...

Page 717: ...2006 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6 1 Detailed Descriptions 6 DETAILS 6 1 GENERAL OVERVIEW 6 1 1 MAIN MACHINE M K C Y B132V102 WMF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 718: ...er Roller 13 ITB Unit 14 Transfer Belt 15 Registration Roller 16 PTR Roller 17 Grip Roller 18 Feed Sensor Paper Tray 19 Feed Roller Paper Tray 20 Separation Roller Paper Tray 21 Pick up Roller Paper Tray 22 Paper Size Switch Tray 3 23 Universal Tray Tray 3 24 Universal Tray Tray 2 25 Paper Size Switch Tray 2 26 Tandem Tray Tray 1 27 Inverter Exit Roller 28 Inverter Entrance Roller 29 Pressure Roll...

Page 719: ...s 6 1 2 PAPER PATH COVER INTERPOSER TRAY 1 Proof Tray 2 Cover Sheet Path 3 Original Path 4 Bypass Tray 5 LCT Feed 6 Vertical Transport Path 7 Duplex Transport Path 8 Finisher Lower Tray Booklet 9 Finisher Upper Tray 1 Shift B132V104 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 720: ...Bypass Feed 3 LCT Feed 4 Vertical Transport Path 5 Junction Gate Paper goes up to the mailbox or out to the finisher s proof tray 6 Selected Trays 7 Turn Gates 8 Mailbox Paper Path 9 Junction Gates Two junction gates control the paper path inside the finisher B132V105 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 721: ... 7 Drum Motor C 8 PCU Motor Y 9 Drum Motor Y 10 ITB Lift Motor 11 Duplex Inverter Motor 12 Fusing Exit Motor 13 Duplex Transport Motor 14 Paper Feed Motor 3 15 Paper Feed Motor 2 16 Lower Relay Motor 17 Paper Feed Motor 1 18 Bypass Feed Motor 19 Registration Motor 20 PTR Motor 21 ITB Drive Motor B132V106 WMF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 19 21 20 ...

Page 722: ...BOARDS August 2006 6 6 6 2 BOARDS 6 2 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM B132D981 WMF ...

Page 723: ... stores compressed data and controls these items Operation panel interface Storage of SC information in NVRAM The controller board also has SD card sockets These are used for these functions Download firmware for updates Copy optional firmware onto one SD card Copied from Slot 3 to Slot 2 Hold the firmware for the printer or printer scanner option The firmware is stored on the SD card in Slot 2 Ho...

Page 724: ...U controls this board through the interfaces on the SBU and the BICU LDB Laser Diode Drive Board This board contains the driver for the laser diodes DRB Drive Board This board contains the circuits for the stepper motors that drive the printer engine and distributes electrical power to all the other PCBs HDD Hard Disk Drives This board stores all the temporary files for job processing and all perm...

Page 725: ...fan B Controller box exhaust fan 1 C Controller box exhaust fan 2 Three fans cool the PCBs in the controller box The HDD cooling fan A pulls cool air into the bottom of the PCB box The controller box exhaust fans B and C pull the hot air out of the top of the controller box B132D968 WMF A B C ...

Page 726: ...w The ITB lift motor lowers the ITB for black and white copying Only the black PCU on the far right contacts the ITB below During black and white copying the drums of the other PCUs Y M C are separated from the ITB and do not rotate This reduces wear on the moving parts of these PCUs during black and white copying If a job contains black and white pages and full color pages the action of the ITB i...

Page 727: ...converted into an analog data signal This data is converted to a digital signal processed and stored in the memory At the time of printing the data is taken from the memory and sent to the laser diode For multi copy runs the original is scanned once and stored in a temporary file on the hard disk 3 LASER EXPOSURE The processed image data from the scanned original is taken from the hard disk and tw...

Page 728: ... next cycle 8 DRUM CLEANING First a soft cleaning brush roller removes toner from the drum Next a lubrication roller with a lubricant bar behind it cleans the drum Finally an opposing cleaning blade removes remaining toner 9 ID SENSORS MUSIC SENSORS Two ID sensors and three MUSIC sensors are in a straight line across the ITB At fixed intervals the laser in each PCU writes an ID sensor pattern on e...

Page 729: ... ARDF Exposure Glass 24 Registration Sensor 25 Scanning Entrance Roller 26 Interval Sensor 27 1st Transport Roller Original Separation and Feed The standard FRR system for paper separation and feed Handling Paper Handling Originals Document Feed FRR with Feed Belt Original Size Detection The combinations of 3 original length sensors on the original tray and 5 original width sensors in the paper fe...

Page 730: ... SEF 3 Interval Sensor 4 Skew Correction Sensor 5 Separation Sensor 6 Feed Cover Open Sensor 7 Bottom Plate Position Sensor 8 Original Length Sensors x3 9 Original Set Sensor 10 Upper Inverter Sensor 11 Lower Inverter Sensor 12 Exit Sensor 13 Bottom Plate HP Sensor 14 Registration Sensor B132D106 WMF 1 2 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 LG A4 B5 10 9 3 4 ...

Page 731: ...sors Other 1 Pick up Motor 2 Pick up Roller HP Sensor 3 Exit Motor 4 Feed Motor 5 Bottom Plate Lift Motor 6 ARDF Main Board 7 ARDF Position Sensor 8 APS Start Sensor 9 Upper Inverter Motor 10 ARDF Transport Motor 11 Lower Inverter Motor B132D107 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...

Page 732: ...t 2006 6 16 ARDF Components View 3 Drive Motors 1 Pick up Motor 2 Exit Motor 3 Bottom Plate Lift Motor 4 Upper Inverter Motor 5 ARDF Transport Motor 6 Lower Inverter Motor 7 Feed Motor B132D108 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 733: ...nsor the CPU reads the outputs from the original width sensors A Original width sensor 1 B Original width sensor 2 C Original width sensor 3 D Original width sensor 4 E Original width sensor 5 F B5 length sensor G A4 length sensor H LG length sensor B132D110 WMF 138 mm 5 4 191 5 mm 7 5 230 mm 9 1 263 5 mm 10 4 288 mm 11 3 1 2 3 4 5 B5 A4 LGL 318 mm 12 5 291 mm 11 5 240 mm 9 5 R B132D971 WMF A B C ...

Page 734: ... 1 1 x 8 x 13 SEF F 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 81 2 x 11 SEF LT 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 11 x 81 2 LEF LT 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 71 4 x 101 2 SEF 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x 101 2 x 71 4 LEF 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 x 8 x 10 SEF F 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x 51 2 x 81 2 SEF HLT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 81 2 x 51 2 LEF HLT 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 x 8 K SEF 267 x 390 mm 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 x 16 K SEF 195 x 267 mm 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 x 16 K LEF 267 x 195 mm 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 x 1 Ac...

Page 735: ...SP6016 On the screen you will see an 8 digit binary setting bar 00000000 The default settings are all 0 In North America the size recognition is changed with Bits 3 to 0 other bits are ignored Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 0 LG SEF 0 LT SEF 0 LT LEF 0 DLT SEF 1 SP 5126 default F4 SEF 1 8 x 10 SEF 1 EXE LEF 1 11 x 15 SEF In Europe the size recognition is changed with Bits 2 to 0 other bit...

Page 736: ...A Æ On Cam B releases lever C then pick up roller D drops onto the paper Pick up roller D feeds an original Æ feed belt and separation roller The pick up roller lowers when An original is put on the tray The trailing edge of the original passes the skew correction sensor if there are originals in the ARDF entrance for scanning The pick up roller rises when The leading edge of the original passes t...

Page 737: ...ate When the bottom plate reaches the correct feed height for feeding Bottom plate position sensor E on the previous page Æ On Æ Stops bottom plate lift Motor A stops During original feeding Pick up roller descends as the top of the stack lowers The descended pick up roller Æ bottom plate position sensor E on the previous page Æ Off Bottom plate lift motor A Æ On Æ motor A raises the stack to the ...

Page 738: ...EPARATION A Pick up roller B Feed belt C Separation roller D Separation sensor Because of this mechanism the machine does not feed more than one sheet at a time Handling Paper Handling Originals Document Feed FRR with Feed Belt B132D120 WMF A B C D ...

Page 739: ...r B for a set number of pulses to buckle the original and correct skew If the originals are small B6 A5 or HLT because small sizes skew easily and during duplex scanning for all original sizes Interval sensor D detects the leading edge of the original Scanning entrance roller E is stopped for the set number of pulses to buckle the original and correct skew Important The roller E stops when B6 A5 o...

Page 740: ...ed If the original arrives at the correct time it feeds normally If the original arrives late the machine enters the slip mode In the slip mode the machine measures the time for the leading edge of the original to move from the separation sensor to the skew correction sensor B The machine uses this time to adjust the length of time that the entrance roller stays off to correct skew This stops feed...

Page 741: ...faster and reduce the interval between the original that was just fed and the original ahead that is now being scanned When the interval sensor G detects the leading edge of the original approaching the scanning entrance roller H it slows the rotation of the scanning entrance roller H To this point the rate of feed is high The interval sensor slows the paper so it does not collide with the trailin...

Page 742: ...the upper inverter rollers B and stops Upper inverter junction gate C closes The upper inverter rollers reverse and feed the original into the feed path 3 Original feeds to rollers D where skew is corrected 6 4 7 Skew is corrected only for small paper sizes B6 A5 HLT Other sizes can be selected for this function with SP6020 1 3 B132D112 WMF 1 3 B132D113 WMF 1 3 B132D114 WMF A B C D ...

Page 743: ... inverter junction gate C and upper inverter junction gate D remain closed Lower inverter rollers E feed original to exit rollers F 6 The exit rollers feed original to the original exit tray Original is corrected for skew and is scanned Skew is corrected only for small paper sizes B6 A5 HLT Other sizes can be selected for this function with SP6020 3 1 2 B132D115 WMF B132D117 WMF B132D118 WMF A B C...

Page 744: ...in the original path at P1 P2 and P3 These notations appear on the operation panel display when a jam occurs A Upper Inverter Sensor B Separation Sensor C Skew Correction Sensor D Interval Sensor E Registration Sensor F Exit Sensor G Lower Inverter Sensor B132D119 WMF P1 P2 P3 B132D972 WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 745: ... Sensor Jam Type Separation sensor Orig late Skew correction sensor Orig late Interval sensor Orig late Upper inverter sensor Orig late Registration sensor Orig late Skew correction sensor Orig lag Interval sensor Orig lag P1 Upper inverter sensor Orig lag Exit sensor Orig late Lower inverter sensor Orig late Registration sensor Orig lag P2 Exit sensor Orig lag P3 Lower inverter sensor Orig lag If...

Page 746: ... 15 2nd Scanner 16 Scanner Fan Motor Left The light reflected from the original is sent to the CCD 1st Mirror 2nd Mirror 3rd Mirror Lens Block CCD The lens block consists of the scanner lens and SBU CCD The CCD converts the light that was reflected from the original and converts it to three color analog signals R G B The SBU converts the analog signals to digital signals then sends the digital sig...

Page 747: ...boards to detect the size of the original on the exposure glass A APS1 W1 and W2 detects original width B APS2 L1 and L2 detects original length C APS3 L3 detects original length D ARDF position sensor Detects whether the ARDF is open or closed E APS start sensor Triggers automatic paper size detection B132D102 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 748: ... 1 0 0 000 11100 A4 LEF 11 x 81 2 0 0 0 1 1 000 00011 B5 SEF 0 0 1 0 0 000 00100 B5 LEF 0 0 0 1 0 000 00010 A5 SEF 51 2 x 81 2 0 0 0 0 0 000 00000 A5 LEF 81 2 x 51 2 0 0 0 0 0 000 00000 1 On Paper Detected 0 Off Paper Not Detected NOTE If the original is small such as A5 LEF all sensors are off and the machine shows that the original size cannot be detected However you can force the machine to det...

Page 749: ...after Start is pressed ARDF Mode The CPU checks the APS sensors after the platen is lowered Bypass Mode The APS sensors are ignored when copy paper is fed from the bypass tray but the bypass tray can handle a variety of sizes and orientations To accomplish this The machine always assumes short edge feed for paper on the bypass tray Width is measured by a sensor inside the bypass tray The bypass tr...

Page 750: ... drives the 1st and 2nd scanner with wires and pulleys B 1st scanner C 2nd scanner D Scanner HP sensor Stops and reverses the scanner motor when the scanner reaches the home position The machine measures distance from home position by counting scanner motor pulses B132D103 WMF A B C D ...

Page 751: ...n front B Scanner cooling fan rear C Scanner exhaust fan Condensation on the mirrors can cause Running smearing and image borders Printing completely black or gray pages Fans The scanner cooling fans front rear pull cool air into the scanner unit The scanner exhaust fan expels hot air from the scanner unit B132D104 WMF A C B ...

Page 752: ...belt is scanned The IPU checks if dust is present If dust is detected the scanner carriage position for ARDF scanning is moved by 0 7 mm The next time that dust is detected the scanning position is moved again by 0 7 mm The third time that dust is detected the scanning position is not moved An alert message is displayed but the job does not stop Then at the start of the next job the procedure star...

Page 753: ...scanning reference point at the upper left corner of the exposure glass Home Position a From Book Read Position 34 mm Shift Direction a Æ b Æ c If dust is detected after the scanner has been moved two times an alert is displayed but the job does not stop Then at the start of the next job the scanner stays at position c But if dust is detected at c the scanner goes back to home position a and the d...

Page 754: ...re not easily contaminated with dust and they are used as reference points during dust detection Another part of the belt could have dust on it and give an incorrect reference NOTE The illustration shows the belt if it were a perfect circle To detect dust the belt turns one time The IPU through the CCD checks for dust If a dark spot is detected for 96 of this rotation the IPU determines that dust ...

Page 755: ...arning has been issued raise the setting to increase the level of sensitivity If warnings are issued when you see no black streaks in copies lower the setting SP4020 003 Sets the level for vertical line correction caused by dust A high setting can eliminate unwanted vertical lines caused by dust but it can also thin vertical lines of the original SP7852 Displays the count for the number of times t...

Page 756: ...on Filtering ADS UCR Saturation Hue Correction Color Correction Main Scan Mag Sub Scan Interval Correction Digitization Mask Compression Decompression Printer Gamma Correction Gradation Processing Exposure I F PCI I F YCMK Image Processing ARDF LVDS rsv Lamp Motor Sensor Scanner Control CCD Analog AD Conversion LVDS drv SBU Fusing ID Sensors Temp Humidity CPU Bus XDF_FGATE IPU BICU UART I2 C ID Ch...

Page 757: ...Scan Magnification Adjustment SP4010 001 Sub Scan Reg Sub Scan Registration Adjustment SP4011 001 Main Scan Reg Main Scan Registration Adjustment Also before lens block replacement enter the SP mode and note the settings of SP4800 001 to 003 ARDF density adjustments for R G B After lens block replacement do some copy samples with the ARDF then check the copies If the copies have background change ...

Page 758: ...processing signals sent over the PCI bus from the controller memory processes them then outputs them to the VGAVD Outputs the control signals for the ARDF Controls the relay of power and signals Image processing ADS Auto image Density Selection correction and line width correction are done on the BICU board for all the digital data sent from the SBU Finally the processed data is sent to the printe...

Page 759: ...it K 9 LD Unit M 10 LSDB M Rear 11 LSDB K Rear 12 Dual Layer fθ Lens M K 13 WTL Lens M 14 WTL Lens K 15 LSDB K Front 16 LSDB M Front 17 LSDB C Rear 18 LSDB Y Rear LD Units 4 One two beam LD unit for each color C M Y K Line Scan Mechanism Main scanning with polygon mirror Image Position Correction MUSIC sensor patterns read from ITB with MUSIC sensors K M C Y B132D002 WMF 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18...

Page 760: ...600 dpi and is not adjustable LD Safety Switches To ensure the safety of customers and service engineers two switches inside the cover prevent the laser beams from switching on accidentally When the front door is open the 5V line connecting each LD driver on the LD control board is disconnected PSU Power Supply Unit BICU Base engine Image processing Control Unit LDB LD Drive Board included in the ...

Page 761: ...OPTICAL PATHS 1 WTL Lens Y 2 WTL Lens C 3 Dual layer fθ Lens C Y 4 Polygon Motor 5 Dual layer fθ Lens M K 6 WTL Lens M 7 WTL Lens K 8 Dust shield Glass 9 Dust shield Glass 10 Dust shield Glass 11 Dust shield Glass K M C Y B132D001 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ...

Page 762: ...Mirror Dust shield Glass 10 Drum Each fθ lens has two layers Because of this it can correct both beams from the LD units Each WTL lens corrects for image distortion The polygon mirror turns at high speed The laser beams are reflected from the polygon mirror to a pair of mirrors upper and lower then to one more mirror and out to the drum through the dust shield glass The polygon mirror has six face...

Page 763: ...chine is turned on or returns from an energy save mode At the start of a job if the temperature in the laser exposure unit changed since the end of the job by the amount set with SP2153 012 Default 1 5 ºC If the cover is open for longer than the time set with SP2153 015 Default 8 min After process control enable disable with SP2153 002 Every 100 pages during a long color job you can change the int...

Page 764: ... 6 48 Location of the MUSIC Sensors The sensors A are below the ITB A roller B opposite the sensors pushes the transfer belt against the sensors This makes sure that the sensors read the patterns accurately B132D301 WMF A B ...

Page 765: ... the diagram but the K pattern overlaps the CMY patterns as shown The MUSIC sensor response is measured The output is the lowest when the K pattern fully overlaps the color pattern the dotted lines in the diagram cross at this point This is the Actual position as shown in the diagram But there is a Target value in the machine s software an example is shown on the diagram this is not the real targe...

Page 766: ... lowest when the K pattern fully overlaps the color pattern the dotted lines in the diagram cross at this point This is the Actual position as shown in the diagram But there is a Target value in the machine s software an example is shown on the diagram this is not the real target it is just an example to explain the process The machine compares the Actual and Target values and adjusts the main mot...

Page 767: ... cover each other exactly on the ITB The 3rd mirror for black K does not have an adjustment motor The position of black toner on the ITB is used as a reference point to adjust the positions of the other colors Exposure Unit Temperature Sensors There are temperature sensors 5 near the fθ lenses to monitor the temperature inside the exposure unit The fθ lenses are made of plastic The magnification r...

Page 768: ...PCU for each color The image that is developed on the drum transfers to the ITB 10 All four colors transfer during the same rotation of the ITB Then the color images transfer to the paper The color images are transferred from the PCUs to the ITB in the order Y C M K Each PCU contains identical components The only difference is that the K PCU has a temperature sensor that is used to correct process...

Page 769: ...11 Quenching Lamp QL 12 Drum 13 TD Sensor 14 Developer Augers Drum dimensions φ60 mm Drum drive Drum motor An independent drum motor for each PCU drives the drum for each color Drum charge Charge roller method with charge cleaning roller Drum cleaning Cleaning brush roller and cleaning blade mounted opposite to direction of drum rotation Waste toner Transported away from the drum by a waste toner ...

Page 770: ... and drum motor shaft C During black and white copying and printing only the black drum K rotates The other color drums Y M C do not rotate The drum shaft must be locked with a special tool attached to the front end of the shaft in order to remove the drum motor The special tool is attached to the bottom of the PCU stand For more please refer to Section 3 Removal and Replacement B132D204 WMF A B C...

Page 771: ...leans it A gear on the rear of the drum shaft turns the charge roller in the opposite direction of the drum The gap between drum and charge roller is 0 05 mm The charge roller is the same length as the drum to ensure an even charge along the entire length of the drum The charge roller receives its charge from the charge roller power pack The power pack is connected at a receptacle attached to the ...

Page 772: ...l moves the waste toner away from the drum toward the waste toner port C Waste toner port The toner is moved away from this port to the waste toner bottle 6 10 D Lubricant brush roller To improve the efficiency of cleaning the rotating lubricant brush roller lubricates the surface of the drum E Lubricant bar Provides the lubricant transferred to the drum surface by the lubricant brush roller F Cle...

Page 773: ...ide The Peltier cooling fan E pulls air into the machine The air passes through the cold side where the moisture condenses and drains into a small reservoir F The four PCU fan motors Y M C K pull the dried air from the common duct into the PCUs to keep dry the air around the drums The moisture is absorbed by an absorbent pad not shown below the Peltier unit The hot laminated plates on the right si...

Page 774: ...it turns ON 2 The Peltier circulation fan and PCU fans turn on together and run at half speed 3 The Peltier cooling fan turns on and runs at full speed The operation changes when the relative humidity goes below 50 for 5 minutes 1 The Peltier unit turns OFF 2 The Peltier circulation fan turns OFF When the humidity stays below 50 for another 5 minutes 1 The Peltier cooling fan turns OFF 2 The PCU f...

Page 775: ... PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNITS PCU 6 59 Detailed Descriptions Ozone Ventilation The ozone fan A pulls air from around the drums through the ozone filter B and then expels the filtered air from the machine B132D962 WMF A B ...

Page 776: ...iew A Developer Cartridge B Developer Augers C Development Roller D TD Sensor Development method Dual component development Agitation Two augers Development unit drive PCU motor 1 motor for each PCU Y C M K Development bias Development bias power pack B132D211 WMF A C B D ...

Page 777: ... is supplied through a small square port at the front of the development unit see section 6 9 Two development augers B cross mix the toner from the toner cartridge with the developer and then send the mixture to the development roller The magnetic development roller C pulls the developer toner mixture onto its surface as it rotates Near the top of the development unit the doctor blade D cuts and s...

Page 778: ...U Drive A PCU Motor A motor and timing belt behind each PCU drives all the rollers in the PCU The drum is driven by the drum motor B Timing Belt C Developer Augers D Development Roller E Cleaning Brush Roller F Lubricant Brush Roller B132D213 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 779: ...r Supply Clutch 7 Toner End Sensor Toner supply Sub hopper toner supply clutch Toner transport Toner pump toner pump clutch Toner container Soft Toner Cartridge STC sides collapse automatically as toner is pumped from each cartridge Toner level detection Toner end sensor Toner cartridge ID Built in chip identifies color and type of cartridge to prevent installation at incorrect location B132D906 B...

Page 780: ...nd rotor of the toner pump when more toner is needed 5 Sub Hopper Receives the toner from the toner pump The sub hopper functions as a reserve tank for the development unit 6 Toner Supply Clutch The toner supply clutch is driven by the toner hopper motor Engages the toner supply auger in the sub hopper to send the toner from the sub hopper into the development unit below 7 Toner End Sensor This se...

Page 781: ...tches on for 2 seconds and pumps toner from the toner cartridge to the sub hopper Sub hopper Æ development unit Based on the toner coverage of the previous print detected by the TD sensor the machine determines how much toner was consumed compares it with the amount remaining and then switches on the toner supply clutch for the correct time to increase the amount of toner in the development unit T...

Page 782: ...m the machine the plug B moves to its original position and covers the toner supply port of the toner cartridge This prevents toner leakage from the bottom of the toner cartridge STC when the toner cartridge STC is removed The sides of a toner cartridge gradually collapse as toner is pulled out of the cartridge by the toner pump The built in ID chip D near the toner supply port holds information a...

Page 783: ...ortant At elevations 1 000 meters 3 280 ft above sea level the toner cartridge packs may expand due to the difference in air pressure preventing them from being installed in their bins After approximately 24 hours the cartridges should shrink to normal size If the customer cannot wait for the toner cartridges STCs to collapse naturally the STC Air Release Kit is available as a service part For mor...

Page 784: ...runs low in the sub hopper Toner near end When a toner end sensor detects no toner in a sub hopper the toner supply clutch in that sub hopper engages and operates the toner pump for 2 seconds to supply more toner from the toner cartridge STC to the sub hopper If the toner end sensor cannot detect toner in a sub hopper after 10 consecutive readings this triggers the toner near end alert this number...

Page 785: ...600 this can be adjusted with SP3411 003 to 004 Up to 10 A4 DLT pages at 5 coverage can be printed SP 3411 001 002 Pixel count coverage The number of pages that can be printed is determined by a calculation of the coverage 30 A4 DLT pages at 100 coverage The default setting can be adjusted with SP3411 005 to 006 Important The number of pages that actually print after the toner near end alert is is...

Page 786: ...TH A Waste Toner Collection Coils PCU Y PCU C PCU M PCU K ITB Unit PTR Unit B Horizontal Waste Toner Transport Coil C Vertical Waste Toner Transport Coil D Diagonal Waste Toner Transport Coil E Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil F Waste Toner Bottle Distribution Coil B132D215 WMF B C D A E F ...

Page 787: ...onnected to the waste toner bottle transport motor this transports waste toner from the horizontal waste toner collection coil to the central collection point above the waste toner bottle D Diagonal Waste Toner Transport Coil Driven by the PTR motor this transports waste toner from the ITB unit and PTR unit waste toner collection coils to the central collection point above the waste toner bottle E...

Page 788: ...ORS A Waste Toner Transport Motor Drives the waste toner bottle transport coil C and the vertical waste toner transport coil D B Waste Toner Distribution Motor Drives the waste toner bottle distribution coil E This motor does not constantly turn B132D220 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 789: ...e Set Sensor B Waste Toner Bottle Near Full Sensor C Waste Toner Bottle Full Sensor Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor This sensor A detects the position of the waste toner bottle and checks if it is set correctly When the waste toner bottle is set in the machine the bottle pushes the feeler of this sensor away from the sensor and turns the sensor on The machine issues SC487 if the waste toner bottle i...

Page 790: ...e toner in the waste toner bottle Signals an alert when the pressure of the waste toner releases the bottle full sensor C After the alert is issued the machine can print up to 100 additional copies After 100 copies the machine issues SC484 Waste Toner Lock Sensor This sensor is located on the PTR motor bracket It detects when the waste toner bottle transport coil locks and stops rotating because o...

Page 791: ...nsors are used to determine the development capacity development gamma and then adjust the conditions around the drum to reproduce the best possible images Potential control also puts the machine in the best possible condition to begin toner supply control Toner supply control Detects the amount of toner applied to ID sensor patterns between pages and adjusts the amount of toner supplied to the de...

Page 792: ...s undeveloped latent images exposed on the drum by the laser diodes A detector in the center of a very small window measures the strength of the electrostatic charge on the drum surface The strengths of the charges vary depending on the surface potential of the drum A feedback circuit applies voltage to the probe until the strength of this charge equals offsets the strength of the charge on the dr...

Page 793: ... patterns Y C M The black ID sensor is a direct reflection sensor The color ID sensor is a combination of a direct reflection sensor and a diffused reflection sensor This combination of a direct reflection sensor pair and an additional diffused reflection sensor achieves more accurate readings for Y M C colors 40 mm 40 mm Y M C K 150 mm B132D902 WMF B132D904 BMP B132D903 BMP Black ID Sensor Color ...

Page 794: ...hen reads the color ID sensor patterns in the order M C Y Note that the K pattern is read by the black ID sensor at approximately the same time the Cyan pattern is being read These ID sensors read the following patterns from the ITB 10 grade patterns x4 during process control 16 grade patterns x4 during process control gamma correction ID sensor patterns x4 at 10 page and other intervals for toner...

Page 795: ...sensors are used for process control One is above the black PCU and one is below the waste toner bottle Temperature humidity sensor PCU K This sensor is in the black PCU the last PCU on the right The output of this sensor is used to Set the level of the ac charge applied to the charge roller of each PCU Set the length of time the agitator in the development unit rotates to mix the developer and to...

Page 796: ...exposed by the laser diodes Maximum laser power has been applied to the diodes Vpl Electrical potential after laser exposure with 24 63 of maximum laser power power is controlled with PWM Vpl 1 Electrical potential Vpl after Vr residual potential adjustment Vpp Charge AC bias Vr Residual potential Vsg_dif Vsg after checking the bare surface of the ITB by the diffused reflection sensor Vsg ID senso...

Page 797: ...ervice Tables SP3501 001 Potential Control Type Selection Initial Range Target Effect in Process Control 0 Auto 1 Fixed Charge Charge dc bias Cdc SP3576 SP2201 700 V 450 to 950 V Potential control Charge ac bias Vpp SP3577 SP2202 2 2 kV 1 8 to 2 4 kV 2 2 kHz Prevention of abnormal images Exposure PM LD power Ldp SP3581 SP2211 0 117 to 127 Potential control Development Development bias Vb SP3575 SP...

Page 798: ...tart ACC and just before the ACC pattern prints However this operation can be changed with SP3501 004 0 Process control self check is not done before the ACC pattern prints 1 A partial self check only potential control is done before the ACC pattern prints This takes about 24 seconds 2 The full process control self check potential control and toner density control is done before the ACC pattern pr...

Page 799: ...ture and Humidity Sensor Error SC400 ID Sensor Error 1 Calibration SC418 LED Error during Vsg Adjustment SC410 to 413 ID Sensor Error 2 to 5 Development Gamma SC414 to 417 ID Sensor Error 6 to 9 Development Start Voltage Update Toner Supply Control Parameters During Copy Interval Process Control Self Check Determine Target Toner Amount Based Using Development Gamma Lower Development Gamma Raise De...

Page 800: ...essary for the optimum AC charge Vpp The optimum charge depends on the ambient temperature and humidity The optimum charge for each temperature and humidity range is set with SP2204 ACC Charge Correction Insufficient charge causes white spotting and too much charge causes toner to film on the surface of the drum This check ensures that the average value of Vpp after 20 samplings is Vpp 2 8 kV AC C...

Page 801: ...and the condition of other electrical components ID Sensor Pattern Detection Errors SC Codes SP3821 Procon OK For More Details SC410 SC413 55 56 59 SC414 SC417 57 58 See Process Control Troubleshooting in Section 4 Troubleshooting Adjust for Residual Potential The laser unit fires at full power PM 127 PWM 63 to compensate for a possible high residual potential on the drum Next the amount of residu...

Page 802: ... use the results of the process control calculations to get the correct toner amount There is no check for abnormal conditions at this step Process Control Gamma Correction The following adjustments are done based on the development gamma correction to achieve the target values Vd Vl Vb To adjust Vd drum bias the voltage of the charge roller is raised To adjust Vl laser power the input current of ...

Page 803: ... inputs from pixel count only The following three functions comprise toner supply control for this machine 1 At the end of every job at the same time as potential control This is done if the number of pages since the previous toner supply control is more than the number that is set with SP 3551 Black and white After 250 pages adjustable with SP3551 001 Full color After 200 pages adjustable with SP...

Page 804: ...s per Area is calculated from this sensor pattern after every 10th page Target M A K Toner Uses the setting of SP3161 001 Y M C Toner Uses the settings of SP3531 002 to 004 Toner supply is based on Vt Vtref If the pattern is too dark too much toner Æ Vtref is increased Æ Toner supply amount decreases If the pattern is too light not enough toner Æ Vtref is reduced Æ Toner supply amount increases Al...

Page 805: ... Threshold Range for Toner Adjustment Between Pages Correct Light Dark No Action Lower Vtref Raise Vtref Toner Supply Control Method PID Control GAVD dpi Start Print Job Get Pixel Count TD Sensor Reads Calculate Image Coverage Get Vtref Toner Supply Time Conversion Sub Hopper Clutch ON Time Calculate Amount of Toner Supply Amount Pixel Ratio Supply Amount Vt Ratio Result of Toner Amount Calculatio...

Page 806: ...ower Pack 4 ITB Drive Roller 5 ID MUSIC Sensor Roller 6 Belt Pressure Roller 7 Lubricant Bar 8 PTR Cleaning Blade 9 PTR Waste Toner Collection Coil 10 PTR Cleaning Brush roller 11 PTR Paper Transfer Roller 12 ITB Bias Roller 13 ITB Waste Toner Collection Coil 14 ITB Cleaning Brush Roller 15 ITB Cleaning Blade B132D301 WMF 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 807: ...oller The ITB drive motor turns this roller which drives the ITB belt 5 ID MUSIC Sensor Roller This idle roller is directly opposite the two ID sensors and three MUSIC sensors It ensures that the belt is positioned correctly close to the sensors for accurate readings of the ID sensor patterns and MUSIC patterns on the ITB 6 Belt Pressure Roller Presses down on the ITB and paper to hold them in pla...

Page 808: ...ed toner image from the ITB to the paper 13 ITB Waste Toner Collection Coil Toner removed from the ITB by the ITB cleaning brush roller and ITB cleaning blade falls into the rotating coils It is then moved to the transverse waste toner collection coil and finally to the waste toner bottle 14 ITB Cleaning Brush Roller Removes residual toner from the ITB after the image is transferred from the ITB t...

Page 809: ...ND PAPER TRANSFER 6 93 Detailed Descriptions 6 12 2 ITB DRIVE A ITB drive motor B ITB drive roller C ITB The ITB drive motor A drives the ITB drive roller B All the other rollers inside the ITB are idle rollers B132D307 WMF A C B ...

Page 810: ...hen the machine is turned ON the ITB stays at position E The Y C M drums are separated from the ITB When Full Color Mode is Selected The motor turns the cam until the actuator goes into the ITB lift sensor The motor stops The raised cam holds the ITB at position F All drums Y C M K contact the ITB The machine automatically adjusts the paper feed timing for full color copying with all the drums Whi...

Page 811: ...pying with only one drum The ITB stays down until the next full color job starts When ACS Mode is Selected If the job has color pages and black and white pages the ITB operation is controlled by SP 5880 001 The default is 0 low productivity In this mode the ITB changes position each time the page type changes This makes printing slower but decreases wear on the color PCUs If you set the SP to 1 th...

Page 812: ...toner off the drums and onto the ITB To transfer the images from ITB to paper The transfer power pack A supplies a negative charge to the ITB bias roller terminal E The terminal applies the negative charge to the ITB bias roller F The high negative charge of the ITB bias roller is applied to the back of the ITB This repulses the low negative charge of the toner forcing the images onto the paper NO...

Page 813: ...paper This system has two advantages The repulsive bias from the front side of the paper has no effect on the moisture in the paper Because the bias is applied from the front side of the paper the bias can be applied more effectively regardless of the level of humidity around the paper After the image has been transferred to the paper The paper discharge plate C connected to the separation power p...

Page 814: ...s toner from the PTR B because these rollers rotate in opposite directions The PTR cleaning blade C removes toner that remains after brush cleaning The PTR lubricant bar D lubricates the surface of the PTR to facilitate cleaning The removed toner falls into the PTR waste toner collection coil E The coils move the toner to the transverse waste toner collection coil at the back of the machine and th...

Page 815: ...he ITB B while it passes above The ITB cleaning blade C removes toner that remains on the belt after the ITB cleaning brush roller cleaning The brush roller cleaning roller D removes toner from the rotating cleaning brush roller Toner removed from the ITB falls into the rotating waste toner collection coil E The coil moves the toner to the transverse waste toner collection coil at the back of the ...

Page 816: ...registration errors during full color printing See section 6 7 4 There are two ITB position sensors 1 B and 2 C above the encoder strip scale D on the rear edge of the ITB ITB position sensor 1 monitors the belt speed The CPU uses this information to adjust the speed of the belt to account for eccentricity of the image transfer roller differences in the thickness of the belt belt slippage and the ...

Page 817: ...006 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSFER 6 101 Detailed Descriptions 6 12 9 ITB VENTILATION The image transfer fan A draws in cool air and blows it across the top of the drawer unit to cool the ITB B132D967 WMF A ...

Page 818: ...ler 9 Double Feed detection Sensor 10 Registration Sensor 11 Double Feed Detection LED 12 Bypass Tray 13 Relay Sensor 14 Lower Relay Roller 15 Pick Up Roller 16 Feed Roller 17 Grip Roller 18 Paper Feed Sensor 19 Separation Roller NOTE Items 15 to 19 use the standard FRR feed system which is used for Trays 1 2 and 3 This machine uses motor ON OFF time not clutches to control paper feed B132D600A WM...

Page 819: ...te The combinations of actuating and de actuating these sensors as the plate rises are used to detect the paper supply display on the operation panel Paper size detection For the tandem tray Tray 1 an SP setting is required SP 5959 001 For the universal trays Tray 2 3 there is size detection switch on each tray Vertical Transport A grip roller at each feed station feeds the paper into the vertical...

Page 820: ...ch feed station not shown The lower relay motor D drives the lower relay roller E halfway between trays 1 and 2 The lower relay roller is added here because the paper path is very long The upper relay roller F feeds each sheet to the registration roller The bypass feed motor not shown drives the upper relay roller F The relay sensor G at the top of the vertical transport path triggers the start of...

Page 821: ...C Pin locks coupling at shaft D Shaft rotates E Lift arm raised by the rotation of the shaft F Bottom plate pushed up by lift arm NOTE The universal trays Tray 2 Tray 3 each have a paper near end sensor inside the lift motor assembly The sensor measures the angle of the lift shaft There are four possible readings from this sensor to indicate four levels of remaining paper B132D610 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 822: ...ort D activates the tray lift sensor E and the lift motor stops After several paper feeds the paper level gradually lowers and the lift sensor de activates Next the lift motor turns on again until the lift sensor once again activates When the tray is pulled out of the feed unit coupling F disengages pin G on shaft H and the tray bottom plate I drops by its own weight B132D934 WMF B132D935 WMF A B ...

Page 823: ...ical transport path can continue to feed To do this the paper feed motor C rotates in reverse The feed roller cannot turn because of a one way clutch The separation roller D is free to rotate in the direction shown by the arrow because the separation roller solenoid is OFF When the feed motor reverses Feed roller A Æ No rotation Separation roller D Æ Free to rotate Grip roller B Æ Rotates The feed...

Page 824: ... motor D turns feed roller E turns pick up roller F via gear G When the paper feed sensor H detects the leading edge of the paper Pick up solenoid C switches off and pick up roller F lifts The feed roller E then feeds the sheet to the registration roller Note the three one way clutches I One for the grip roller one for the feed roller and one for the gear G which drives the pickup roller When the ...

Page 825: ...ation rollers If the paper tray is pulled out of the machine this paper might be torn if the two rollers do not separate The operator can easily pull out jammed paper between the feed and separation rollers if the separation roller is away from the feed roller Normally the feed and separation roller separate when the separation roller solenoid switches off However if the rollers stick together aft...

Page 826: ... TRAYS 2 AND 3 The paper near end sensor A is in the lift motor assembly It can detect four levels of remaining paper The paper end sensor A receives light reflected from the paper below B until the last sheet has been fed Then paper end is detected B132D940 WMF A B ...

Page 827: ...d back fences you must enter the selected paper size with SP5959 001 Universal Trays Tray 2 3 The output from the switch depends on the position of the dial see the table on the following page The paper size switch A detects the paper size with 5 microswitches The actuator plate B attached to the rear of the paper tray actuates the paper size switch and the side fence C changes position B132D616 W...

Page 828: ... LEF 5 x 8 11110 F4 8 x 13 11011 Folio 8 x 13 01011 F 8 x 13 01111 Executive LEF 7 x 10 10100 Executive SEF 7 x 10 00111 8 Kai 267 x 390 mm 00110 16 Kai LEF 267 x 195 mm 10010 16 Kai SEF 195 x 267 mm 10111 0 OFF Sensor Output HIGH 1 ON Sensor Output LOW If the user does not put the fences at the correct position a jam can occur To use a paper size that is not in this table select the size with thi...

Page 829: ...ater turns on automatically When the main power switch is turned off When the machine enters auto off mode NOTE These tray heaters are not connected before the machine is shipped from the factory The heaters are installed in the machine but their connection is optional If the trays are needed you must connect them at machine installation or at any time after installation For more see Section 1 Ins...

Page 830: ... out paper in the left tray is automatically pushed into the right tray and paper feed resumes Normally both the right and the left trays are joined together However if there is no paper in the left tray during copying the left tray can be pulled out to load paper without interrupting the copy job in progress The right tray remains in the machine and paper feed continues B132D942 WMF A B ...

Page 831: ...ying if there is no paper in the left tray Right tray lock solenoid C turns on which releases lock lever A The left tray can be pulled out to load paper even while paper is feeding from the right tray When the tandem tray is drawn out fully while the machine is not copying projection D pushes up lock lever A so both trays separate This makes paper loading easier B132D943 WMF B132D944 WMF B132D945 ...

Page 832: ...If sensor 1 was not present and the tray was empty the bottom plate would have to lift until the 1st tray lift paper end sensor at the top of the tray detected that there was no paper The lift operation begins as soon as paper is detected Tray 1 Lift motor 2 Æ Coupling gear 3 Æ Pin 4 on the lift shaft 5 Æ Wires 6 Æ Slots at the ends of the tray support rods 7 8 Æ Tray bottom plate 9 The tray goes ...

Page 833: ... to the off state which would indicate 100 of the paper remaining the same state as when the actuator is below the paper height sensor Paper near end Detected when the actuator 2 on the right rail activates the paper near end sensor 3 When the actuator passes this sensor the display indicates 10 of the paper supply remaining Paper end After the last sheet feeds the right tray paper sensor 4 below ...

Page 834: ...n on and open the side fences The side fences move out until the open sensors C activate After the stack has been moved into the right tray The side fence solenoids turn off and the side fences close The side fences move in until the close sensors D activate Next the LCD prompts the operator to set paper in the left side of the tandem tray B132D948 WMF B B C D A A C D ...

Page 835: ...ence starts to move left ray lock solenoid turns on and locks lever to hold the left tray in place Rear fence C pushes the paper stack completely into the right tray Rear fence return sensor D detects the actuator on the rear fence Motor B stops reverses and turns clockwise Rear fence moves back to the left tray until rear fence HP sensor E detects the actuator HP sensor turns the rear fence motor...

Page 836: ... When the feed tray is set in the feed unit the side to side positioning plate A presses the feed tray against the stopper B By moving the positioning plate the tray position can be changed to adjust the side to side registration B132D951 WMF B132D952 WMF A B ...

Page 837: ...ailed Descriptions 6 13 9 TRAY POSITIONING MECHANISM TRAYS 1 TO 3 When the tray is placed in the feed unit the lock lever A drops behind the lock plate B on the support bracket to lock the tray in the proper position B132D953 WMF A B ...

Page 838: ...D Æ Pick up solenoid see the next page Æ Feed roller E and separation roller F The bypass tray uses the standard FRR feed system Handling Paper Paper Feed Methods Forward and Reverse Roller FRR or Bypass Feed Tray NOTE The direction of feed in the bypass tray is opposite from that of the other paper trays so their parts with the exception of the separation roller are not interchangeable B132D954 W...

Page 839: ... PAPER FEED 6 123 Detailed Descriptions Bypass Tray Paper End Detection When the paper runs out the paper end feeler A drops through the cutout in the bypass paper end sensor B C Pickup solenoid B132D604 WMF A B C ...

Page 840: ...metal actuator C moves to a position on the sensor strip D The machine reads the position of the actuator on the strip to determine the paper size Paper Length Paper length is determined with pulse counts read from the registration sensor NOTE Use SP1007 to check the size of the paper detected in the bypass tray if paper is skewing during feeding B132D602 WMF A B C D ...

Page 841: ...the bypass tray The size must be within the range shown in the illustration NOTE Use SP1905 to adjust the bypass feed clutch operation if thick paper often jams at the registration roller For more see 5 Service Tables Use SP5150 to enable paper length up to 600 mm 23 6 B132D955 WMF 148 457 mm 5 8 17 9 100 305 mm 3 9 12 ...

Page 842: ...two universal trays D Duplex unit E Bypass tray The bypass tray feeds paper directly to the registration rollers The grip rollers F feed paper from the trays into the vertical transport path to the registration rollers The upper relay roller G feeds all paper exiting the vertical transport path It also feeds paper from the duplex unit and LCT B132D941 WMF A B C D E F G ...

Page 843: ...ing the paper buckles against the registration rollers and corrects skew NOTE Use SP1003 to adjust the registration motor timing for each paper feed station or the duplex tray For details see 5 Service Tables Two mylars and at the registration rollers collect dust from the paper and other rollers to reduce the amount of paper dust in the paper feed path after the registration rollers B132D607 WMF ...

Page 844: ...noid A turns on and raises lever B Lock lever C on the guide plate releases pin D on the rear side frame The guide plate E falls open The open plate diverts paper from the feed path below into the duplex tray As soon as the guide plate opens actuator F on the guide plate activates the guide plate position sensor G The operator must remove the paper jammed in the feed path remove the diverted paper...

Page 845: ...pair checks the translucence of each sheet This function makes sure that each sheet of paper fed is of the same type and also detects double feeds If a sheet of a different type or a double feed is detected the machine stops the job and a copy jam error message is shown After buckle adjustment double feed detection LED B an LED emits light that passes through the sheet above The light is received ...

Page 846: ...ous sheet If the translucence of the sheet at the registration rollers is less than that of the previous sheet greater opacity the CPU determines that a double feed has occurred and stops the job In either case after the job halts the sheets must be cleared just as if a jam occurred at the registration rollers SP1110 001 012 enables disables double feed and paper type detection for the paper feed ...

Page 847: ...or LCT cover is set When using bypass feed paper set in the bypass tray After a double feed error and the paper has been removed When the paper type setting is changed UP Mode Settings The operator can select either Paper Type Detection or Double Feed Detection in the Operator Tools UP mode for each paper feed station default ON Neither paper type recognition nor double feed detection operates whe...

Page 848: ...tat Heating Roller 9 Heating Roller Temperature Sensor 10 Thermostat Pressure Roller 11 Thermistor Pressure Roller 12 Cleaning Felt Roller 13 Fusing Lamp x1 Pressure Roller 14 Pressure Roller φ50 15 Accordion Jam Sensor 16 Fusing Exit Sensor 17 Pressure Roller Strippers 18 Fusing Belt Strippers 19 Hot Roller φ52 20 Fusing Belt Lubrication Roller Fusing Lamps Hot Roller 350W Heating Roller 590W Pre...

Page 849: ...adhering to its surface It applies heat with one fusing lamp 350W to maintain the temperature of the fusing belt while the machine is in standby mode The accordion jam sensor detects accordion jams where the paper exits at the nip between the hot roller and pressure roller The fusing exit sensor detects jams at the fusing exit by confirming that paper arrives the fusing exit at the correct time Th...

Page 850: ... Thermistor 2 Hot Roller Thermostats 3 Heating Roller Thermostats 4 Pressure Roller Thermistor 5 Heating Roller Temperature Sensor 6 Pressure Roller Thermostats 7 Heating Roller Thermistor Each roller in the fusing unit has one thermistor and two thermostats B132D402 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 851: ...NG UNIT DRIVE A Fusing exit motor B Idle roller C Hot roller D Fusing belt E Heating roller F Pressure roller The fusing exit motor A drives the fusing unit Fusing exit motor A Idle Roller B Hot Roller C Fusing Belt D Heating Roller E Pressure Roller F B132D404 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 852: ...saturated with silicone oil to prevent toner and paper dust from clinging to the fusing belt The fusing belt lubrication roller A contacts the fusing belt B above the hot roller C This lubrication roller applies a very thin coat of silicone oil to the fusing belt where the belt contacts the roller A cleaning roller D cleans the surface of the fusing belt lubrication roller The cleaning felt roller...

Page 853: ...at C for example the point of the stripper separates the paper from the fusing belt The strippers retract immediately under the slightest pressure D if an accordion jam occurs This prevents the points of the strippers from damaging the surfaces of the fusing belt or the pressure roller if a jam occurs where the paper emerges from the nip of the hot roller and pressure roller The accordion jam sens...

Page 854: ...ing belt for fusing The hot roller provides additional heat for fusing The pressure roller maintains the temperature of the fusing belt while the machine is in standby mode The feedback from these thermistors controls the fusing temperature Heating roller A temperature sensor located at the center and a thermistor at the front end of the heating roller Hot roller A thermistor located at the front ...

Page 855: ...56 160 120 320 248 FC 180 356 160 120 320 248 OHP B W 170 338 100 212 FC 170 338 100 212 Thin Paper B W 160 160 320 320 150 120 302 248 FC 160 160 320 320 150 120 302 248 Idling Start 160 320 Ready machine ready lamps on rollers turning 180 356 165 329 Standby between jobs 177 351 145 269 6 152 306 Low Power Mode 185 333 50 90 60 108 Energy Save Off Mode Off Off Off Notes The parentheses indicate ...

Page 856: ... 175 ºC plain paper If the room temperature is low less than 10 ºC the fusing unit temperature can become too low To compensate for this copy speed is reduced as explained below After 20 copies if the fusing unit temperature is 165 ºC or less the copier goes into 1st CPM Down Mode At this time the copy speed decreases to 55 cpm black and white and 30 cpm color After 10 more copies if the fusing un...

Page 857: ...xhaust fan Heat rising from the fusing unit A collects around a heat sink B The heat sink contains pipes with water that help to cool the hot air The fusing cooling fan C pulls cool air into the machine and blows it over the heat sink The fusing exhaust fan D pulls the heated air away from the heat sink and expels it through a vent B132D964 WMF A B C D ...

Page 858: ...t Sensor 1 11 Duplex Inverter Sensor 12 Inverter Exit Roller 13 Duplex Junction Gate For one sided printing pages are fed out face down default For face down output the exit junction gate sends the page to the inverter and the inverter inverts the page If the operator selected duplex mode the inverter inverts the page then the duplex junction gate directs the page into the duplex unit The duplex u...

Page 859: ... duplex positioning roller 6 Duplex inverter motor 4 Æ Inverter exit roller 7 Duplex transport motor 8 Æ Timing belt Æ transport rollers 3 4 9 Duplex transport clutch 10 Stops transport rollers 1 2 5 during interleaving Allows the sheet in front to be fed out of the duplex unit by motor 8 and rollers 9 Controlled by the duplex inverter sensor 11 B132D505 WMF B132D956 WMF 5 9 1 2 3 4 6 9 7 8 5 10 1...

Page 860: ...the Start key is pressed Motor A positions fences B 12 mm away from the selected paper size to wait for the paper Inverter entrance roller D feeds paper to the jogger section The paper pushes down the junction gate E After the paper passes through the gate Motor A moves the jogger fences B in to square the paper This happens every page Next the jogger fences move back to the previous position 12 m...

Page 861: ...ging each page is fed back as follows Solenoid A pushes down roller B Roller B contacts roller C catching the paper between the two rollers Roller C always turns counter clockwise and feeds the paper D backwards to roller E When the leading edge of the paper now caught by roller E passes sensor F solenoid A switches off and roller B returns to its home position B132D957 WMF B132D508 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 862: ...r inversion If duplex mode is not selected the duplex junction gate solenoid A does not switch on to open the duplex junction gate B The paper goes to the output tray or finisher face down If duplex mode is selected after the paper leaves the inverter the solenoid A switches on and opens the junction gate B The paper goes down to the duplex tray B132D958 WMF A B C D ...

Page 863: ... smaller 1 1 3 5 2 7 4 9 6 11 8 13 10 12 14 Longer than A4 LT LEF 2 1 3 2 5 4 7 6 9 8 11 10 13 12 14 1 3 pages can be interleave processed at once 2 Only 2 pages can be interleave processed at once The following diagrams show where the 7 sheets are located at every step during a 14 page duplex print job with A4 LT LEF paper three pages can be in the feed path at once 1 First 3 sheets fed 1 1st she...

Page 864: ... to duplex tray 8 2nd sheet back page printed pg 4 9 5th sheet feeds 10 2nd sheet exits 11 5th sheet back page printed pg 9 feeds to duplex tray 12 3rd sheet back page printed pg 6 13 6th sheet front page printed pg 11 14 4th sheet back page pg 8 7th sheet front page pg 13 copied in order the process above repeats B132D961 WMF B132D963 WMF B132D978 WMF ...

Page 865: ...6 DUPLEX UNIT VENTILATION A Duplex Fan B Rear Duplex Fan C Front Duplex Fan The duplex fan A draws cool air into the duplex unit The rear duplex fan B and front duplex fan C expel the heated air through vents on the left side of the machine B132D965 WMF A B C ...

Page 866: ...e solenoid A Æ Off Inverter junction gate B Æ Open Paper goes down to the inverter When the inverter is not used face up output or when paper was fed from the bypass tray Inverter junction gate solenoid A Æ On Inverter junction gate Æ Closed Paper goes up to the output tray The exit sensor C detects the leading and trailing edge of each sheet as it feeds out and triggers a jam if the paper is late...

Page 867: ...the fusing unit it passes between the heat pipe roller A and the exit rollers B The heat pipe roller absorbs heat from the paper Fins C attached to the front end of the heat pipe roller conduct heat away from the heat pipe roller The cooling pipe fan D draws in cool air and blows it through the fins to dissipate the heat conducted away from the heat pipe roller B132D503 WMF A B C D A ...

Page 868: ...PAPER EXIT August 2006 6 152 6 17 3 PAPER EXIT COOLING The paper exit fan A draws hot air from the paper exit area and expels it through a vent on the left side of the machine B132D966 WMF A ...

Page 869: ...y Operation Energy Saver Key ON or Panel Off Timer 10 s to 999 s Default 60 s Panel Off Mode Low Power Mode Energy Saver Timer 1min to 240 min Default 15 min Return Time Less Than 10s Operation Panel Key Pushed Platen Cover Open Closed Original Set in ADF Paper Set in Bypass Return Time Less Than 4 minutes Off Mode Off Stand by Mode Printer Data in After Printing Operation Sw Off or Auto Off Timer...

Page 870: ...er Settings Energy Saver Timer default 15 minutes Maximum recovery time 4 minutes Auto off timer User Tools System Settings Timer Settings Auto Off Timer default 90 minutes Maximum recovery time 8 minutes If the printer and scanner are installed the machine uses Sleep Mode instead of Auto Off mode This is the same as Auto Off Mode but if a print job comes in the printer wakes up to print the data ...

Page 871: ...A3 11 x17 PAPER SIZE TRAY Machine Code B331 06 09 ...

Page 872: ...i TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INSTRALLATION B331 1 2 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT B331 2 2 1 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT WIRE REPLACEMENT B331 2 3 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS B331 4 3 1 SECTIONAL DESCRIPTION B331 4 06 09 ...

Page 873: ......

Page 874: ...T WIRE REPLACEMENT B331 1 Peripherals 1 INSTALLATION For details about installing the A3 DLT Kit B331 please refer to the instructions you received with the instructions or the 1 Installation in the main machine service manual 06 09 ...

Page 875: ...nt bottom plate lift wire The procedure for the two wires is the same 1 Remove the tray 2 Remove the inner cover 2 screws 3 Slightly lift the front bottom plate and unhook the wire stoppers A 2 stoppers B 4 Remove the wire cover C 1 E ring each 5 Remove the bracket D 1 screw 1 E ring and 1 bushing 6 Remove the gear E 7 Replace the bottom plate lift wire F B331R102 WMF B D C C A A B E F 06 09 ...

Page 876: ...ACEMENT B331 3 Peripherals NOTE When re installing the bottom plate lift wire 1 Set the positioning pin A in the hole B and set the projection C in the hole D 2 Position the wire as shown E 3 Do not cross the wires B331R061 WMF E D B A C 06 09 ...

Page 877: ...h the tray wires B by the lift motor C rotation There is no remaining paper capacity detection The paper remaining sensors D trigger messages on the LCD to let the user know how much paper remains in the tray The operation panel LCD displays full whether there is paper in the tray Except for the above matter refer to the main copier tandem LCT section for details B331D201 WMF A C D B 06 09 ...

Page 878: ...LCT LARGE CAPACITY TRAY Machine Code B473 06 09 ...

Page 879: ...S B473 4 1 5 TRAY MOTOR B473 5 1 6 PAPER STACK SENSOR B473 5 1 7 PAPER SIZE ADJUSTMENT B473 6 2 DETAILS B473 7 2 1 OVERVIEW B473 7 2 1 1 LCT MAIN COMPONENTS B473 7 2 1 2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT B473 9 2 2 PAPER FEED AND SEPARATION B473 10 2 2 1 STARTING PAPER FEED B473 10 2 2 2 FEED AND SEPARATION B473 11 2 3 PAPER LIFT B473 12 2 4 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION B473 14 2 5 PAPER END DETECTION B473 15 06 09 ...

Page 880: ......

Page 881: ...RNAL COVERS B473 1 Peripherals 1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 EXTERNAL COVERS A Transport cover B Transport cover hinge x1 C Rear cover x4 D Top cover x1 E Right cover x2 F Front cover x3 B473R001 WMF A B C D E F 06 09 ...

Page 882: ...ATION ROLLERS September 2006 B473 2 1 2 PICK UP FEED SEPARATION ROLLERS A Open the transport cover B Bracket cover x2 C Pick up roller x1 D Feed roller x1 E Separation roller x1 B473R002 WMF B473R003 WMF C D E B A 06 09 ...

Page 883: ...September 2006 PICK UP SOLENOID B473 3 Peripherals 1 3 PICK UP SOLENOID Rear cover x4 Open the transport cover 1 2 Bracket cover 2 2 A Pick up solenoid x2 x1 B473R004 WMF A 06 09 ...

Page 884: ...ENSOR UPPER COVER SWITCHES September 2006 B473 4 1 4 PAPER END SENSOR UPPER COVER SWITCHES Open the top cover Right cover 1 1 A Paper end sensor x1 B Upper cover switches 1 2 x2 B473R005 WMF B473R006 WMF A B 06 09 ...

Page 885: ...TRAY MOTOR B473 5 Peripherals 1 5 TRAY MOTOR Rear cover 1 1 A Tray motor x2 x1 1 6 PAPER STACK SENSOR Disconnect the LCT from the machine A Sensor cover x1 B Paper stack sensor x1 B473R007 WMF B473R008 WMF A B A 06 09 ...

Page 886: ...ys or LT sideways at the top B and bottom brackets C After changing the side fences to accept another paper size you must execute SP5959 005 Paper Type Tray 4 and select the paper size of the side fence positions For details see SP5959 in section 5 Service Tables of the e STUDIO4500c 5500c service manual B473R109 WMF A B C 06 09 ...

Page 887: ...eed Sensor 4 Feed Roller 5 Lift Sensor 6 Pick up Roller 7 Paper End Sensor 8 Paper Near End Sensor 9 Paper Height Sensor 1 10 Paper Height Sensor 2 11 Paper Tray 12 Paper Height Sensor 3 13 Paper Tray Motor 14 Low Limit Sensor 15 Tray Drive Belt 16 Feed Motor 17 Stack Sensor B473D001 WMF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 17 1 16 15 06 09 ...

Page 888: ... lift motor and timing belt raise and lower the paper tray Paper Size Detection The side fences cannot be adjusted by customers The paper size must be entered with SP5959 005 For details see SP5959 in section 5 Service Tables Paper Height Detection A feeler and four photointerrupters are used Paper End Detection A reflective sensor on the upper stay detects paper end 06 09 ...

Page 889: ...VERVIEW B473 9 Peripherals 2 1 2 LCT DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Pick up Roller 2 Separation Roller 3 Transport Rollers 4 Feed Roller 5 Feed Motor 6 Tray Motor 7 Tray Lift Shaft 8 Tray Drive Belt B473D003 WMF 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 06 09 ...

Page 890: ...tandard FRR system is used It consists of the pick up feed and separation rollers 2 2 1 STARTING PAPER FEED The feed motor A drives the transport rollers B The separation roller C which is free to rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow remains at rest B473D004 WMF A B C 06 09 ...

Page 891: ...oller lowers and feeds the first sheet when it contacts the top of the stack The separation roller E in contact with the feed roller only allows one sheet out of the tray As soon as the paper feed sensor not shown detects the leading edge of the paper it switches off the pick up solenoid which raises the pick up roller The feed roller feeds the sheet to the registration roller This process is repe...

Page 892: ...ay motor lowers the tray and stops When the paper height sensor activates the tray motor lifts the tray After several sheets have been fed the paper level lowers the actuator G activates the lift sensor H and switches on the motor again The motor raises stack until the actuator de activates the lift sensor This cycle repeats to maintain the correct height of the stack until the end of the job B473...

Page 893: ...m plate moves down once again by 5 cm This allows the customer to replenish paper in convenient amounts and at the same position A lower limit sensor E triggered by an actuator on the bottom of the tray is also provided to stop the tray motor if the stack sensor should fail Summary The tray raises when The main power switch is turned on When the lift sensor switches on during copying The top cover...

Page 894: ... operation panel displays a message for each paper height until the actuator reaches the near end sensor then a message warns the user that the tray is nearly empty The table summarizes the relation between sensor detection and the number of sheets remaining in the stack Sensors Sheet Remaining Bars 1 Near end P Height 1 P Height 2 P Height 3 75 1 1500 2 2500 3 3500 4 1 The number of vertical bars...

Page 895: ...ON The paper end sensor A monitors the light reflected by each sheet on top of the stack When the last sheet feeds the cutout B is exposed and the paper end sensor receives no reflected light from below because there is no paper and this signals paper end B473D111 WMF A B 06 09 ...

Page 896: ...PAPER END DETECTION September 2006 B473 16 06 09 ...

Page 897: ...Peripherals 2000 3000 SHEET FINISHER Machine Code B700 B701 ...

Page 898: ...IT SENSOR B700 8 1 7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR B700 9 1 8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR B700 10 1 9 PRE STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR B700 11 1 10 FOLD UNIT EXIT SENSOR B700 12 1 11 FOLD ADJUSTMENTS B700 ONLY B700 13 1 11 1 FOLDING HORIZONTAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT B700 13 1 11 2 FOLD VERTICAL SKEW ADJUSTMENT B700 16 1 12 CORNER STAPLER B700 17 1 13 FOLD UNIT B700 18 1 14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR B700 20 1 15 STACK PR...

Page 899: ...0 42 2 8 CORNER STAPLING B700 44 2 8 1 STACKING AND JOGGING B700 44 2 8 2 STAPLER MOVEMENT B700 46 2 8 3 CORNER STAPLING B700 48 2 9 BOOKLET STAPLING B700 ONLY B700 49 2 9 1 BOOKLET PRESSURE MECHANISM B700 49 2 9 2 BOOKLET STAPLING AND FOLDING B700 50 Overview B700 50 Booklet Stapling and Folding Mechanisms B700 56 2 10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT B700 59 2 10 1 FEED OUT B700 59 2 10 2 FEED OUT STACKING B70...

Page 900: ...r B700 This finisher is equipped with three trays a proof tray on top of the finisher an upper shift tray and a lower tray for booklets 3000 Sheet Finisher B701 This finisher is equipped with two trays a proof tray on top of the finisher and the upper shift tray This finisher does corner stapling only It does not have the lower tray of the B700 for stapled and folded booklets NOTE The descriptions...

Page 901: ......

Page 902: ...n the guide A indicated in the figure 1 1 BASIC PROCEDURES 1 1 1 COVERS A Small Upper Cover x1 Open the front door remove the screw then remove the cover B Upper Cover x2 C Front Door Bracket x1 D Front Door E Front Left Side Cover x2 F Cover G Paper Exit Cover x2 H Rear Cover x2 B700R101 WMF A B C D E F G H B700I209 MWF A ...

Page 903: ...t 2006 B700 2 1 1 2 UPPER TRAY END FENCE 1 Remove the rear cover 1 1 1 2 To lower the upper tray Support the tray A with your right hand Pull gear B toward you to release Slowly lower the tray until it stops B700R114 WMF A B ...

Page 904: ...August 2006 BASIC PROCEDURES B700 3 Peripherals A Front Side Cover x1 B Rear Side Cover x1 C Upper Tray x1 D Tray Bracket x4 x1 shoulder screw E End Fence x3 B700R115 WMF B700R116 WMF A B D C E E ...

Page 905: ... 4 1 2 UPPER TRAY LIMIT SENSOR UPPER TRAY LIMIT SWITCH Remove Front door front left side cover rear cover upper cover 1 1 1 End fence 1 1 2 A Upper tray exit mechanism x4 x3 B Upper tray limit sensor x1 x1 C Upper tray limit switch x2 B700R117 WMF B700R118 WMF C B A ...

Page 906: ...August 2006 POSITIONING ROLLER B700 5 Peripherals 1 3 POSITIONING ROLLER A Open the front door B Pull out the stapler unit C Positioning roller x1 timing belt x1 B700R103 WMF A B C ...

Page 907: ...PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR August 2006 B700 6 1 4 PROOF TRAY EXIT SENSOR Remove small upper cover 1 1 1 A Proof Tray Exit Sensor Bracket x1 B Proof Tray Exit Sensor S10 x1 B700R107 WMF A B ...

Page 908: ...erals 1 5 UPPER TRAY PAPER HEIGHT SENSORS 1 2 Remove small upper cover upper cover 1 1 1 A Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor Bracket x1 B Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 1 Staple Mode S08 x1 C Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor 2 Non Staple Mode S09 x1 B700R108 WMF A B C ...

Page 909: ... 6 EXIT GUIDE PLATE UPPER TRAY EXIT SENSOR Remove Rear cover 1 1 1 Upper covers 1 1 1 Front door 1 1 1 Cover 1 1 1 Paper exit cover 1 1 1 A Inner cover x2 B Exit guide plate x1 Link and spring x1 x1 C Upper tray exit sensor S6 x1 B700R109 WMF B700R110 WMF A B C ...

Page 910: ...t 2006 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR B700 9 Peripherals 1 7 PROOF TRAY FULL SENSOR Remove the exit guide plate 1 6 A Guide plate Disconnect at B Sensor bracket x1 C Proof tray full sensor S11 x1 B700R111 WMF A B C ...

Page 911: ...August 2006 B700 10 1 8 FINISHER ENTRANCE SENSOR Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier Disconnect the cover interposer if it is installed A Sensor bracket x1 B Finisher entrance sensor S1 x1 B700R133 WMF A B ...

Page 912: ...t 2006 PRE STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR B700 11 Peripherals 1 9 PRE STACK TRAY EXIT SENSOR Disconnect the finisher if it is connected to the copier A Sensor bracket B Pre stack tray exit sensor S2 B700R102 WMF A B ...

Page 913: ...ront door Pull out the stapler tray A Fold unit vertical guide plate B Fold unit inner cover x2 Spring pin x1 C Fold unit upper cover x1 D Paper clamp mechanism x4 E Fold unit exit sensor bracket x1 F Fold unit exit sensor S31 x1 B700R121 WMF B700R125 WMF B700R126 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 914: ... 005 this is for DLT paper NOTE If the original setting of SP6113 001 or 005 is not 0 then you must do the vertical skew adjustment 1 11 2 after you finish this horizontal skew procedure 3 Use the 10 key pad to input 2 mm for the SP value NOTE Press to enter the minus sign 4 Press then exit the SP mode 5 Open the front door and pull the stapler unit A out of the finisher 6 Open the guide plate B 7...

Page 915: ... one page of A3 or DLT paper in the ARDF On the copier operation panel select booklet stapling Press Start One sheet is folded 12 Remove the sheet from the lower tray 13 Hold the folded sheet with the creased side pointing down and face up the same way that it came out of the finisher 14 Referring to the diagram determine if the skew is A or B B700R901 WMF A B ...

Page 916: ...ion adjusts the fold position by 0 1 mm by moving the bottom fence D 18 Raise the tip of the adjustment screw C and allow it to lower under its own weight 19 Attach and tighten the lock screw E 20 Push the stapler unit into the machine close the front door then turn the copier on 21 Europe Asia Do SP 6113 001 this is for A3 paper North America Do SP 6113 005 this is for DLT paper 22 Reset it to 0 ...

Page 917: ...the same way that it came out of the finisher 4 Referring to the diagram determine if the skew is positive A or negative B 5 Measure the amount of skew 6 Enter the SP mode Europe Asia Use SP 6113 001 this is for A3 paper North America Use SP 6113 005 this is for DLT paper 7 Enter one half the measured amount of skew Example If the measure amount of skew is 1 2 mm enter 0 6 mm NOTE The range for me...

Page 918: ...st 2006 CORNER STAPLER B700 17 Peripherals 1 12 CORNER STAPLER Open the front door Pull out the stapler unit A Inner cover x3 B Stapler unit holder x1 C Corner stapler M20 x1 B700R112 WMF B700R113 WMF A B C ...

Page 919: ... UNIT August 2006 B700 18 1 13 FOLD UNIT Remove the back cover 1 1 1 Open the front door CAUTION The stapler unit is heavy A Ground screw x1 B Harness x6 x6 C Stapler unit x4 B700R119 WMF B700R801 WMF A B C ...

Page 920: ... unit 1 Read the DIP SW settings on the decal B attached to the back of the new fold unit 2 Check the DIP SW settings on the main board C of the finisher 3 If these settings are different change these settings to match settings printed on the seal attached to the fold unit NOTE Set DIP switches 1 to 4 the switch set on the right Do not touch the other DIP switches B700R124 WMF B700R134 WMF B C A ...

Page 921: ...FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR August 2006 B700 20 1 14 FOLD UNIT ENTRANCE SENSOR Pull out the stapler unit A Fold unit entrance sensor bracket x2 B Fold unit entrance sensor S26 x1 x1 B700R132 WMF B A ...

Page 922: ...nd to correct the horizontal and vertical skew for the fold unit at the same time do those adjustments first then replace the sensor 1 11 1 1 11 2 Remove the stapler unit 1 13 A Guide plate B Stay x4 C Left plate x4 D Sensor bracket x1 E Stack present sensor S32 x1 B700R121 WMF B700R122 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 923: ...ER MOTOR August 2006 B700 22 1 16 BOOKLET STAPLER BOOKLET STAPLER MOTOR 1 16 1 BOOKLET STAPLER Open the front door Pull out the stapler unit A Harness cover x2 B Booklet stapler support stay x4 x2 x4 C Stapler x4 B700R903 WMF A B C ...

Page 924: ... the Booklet Stapler Motor 3 Reattach the booklet stapler motor Important Do not tighten the screws 4 Attach the special tool G and reattach the booklet stapler stay NOTE This tool is included with the stapler spare part 5 Turn the gear H with your finger until it stops 6 Tighten the screws to attach to the booklet stapler motor 7 Remove the stay again and remove the special tool 8 Reattach the bo...

Page 925: ...unction Gate 2 Punch Unit 3 Stapler Junction Gate 4 Pre Stack Junction Gate 5 Pre Stack Tray 6 Corner Stapler M20 7 Lower Tray Booklet 1 8 Folder Rollers 1 9 Folder Plate 1 10 Booklet Stapler 1 11 Upper Tray Shift 12 Proof Tray 1 B700 Only B700D101 WMF 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 926: ...tray 12 when neither sorting nor stapling are selected for the job Upper tray The upper tray 11 receives copies that are sorted and shifted and also receives copies that have been corner stapled Corner stapling is provided on both the B700 and the B701 Pre stack tray The pre stack tray 5 has a switchback mechanism to increase the productivity of stapling 2 5 Pre stacking is done for corner staplin...

Page 927: ...sor S11 7 Finisher Entrance Sensor S1 8 Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor S9 Non Staple Mode 9 Upper Tray Limit Sensor S12 10 Upper Tray Limit Switch SW2 11 Stacking Roller HP Sensor S13 12 Stacking Sponge Roller Motor M10 13 Upper Tray Exit Sensor S6 14 Upper Tray Paper Height Sensor S8 Staple Mode 15 Shift Roller HP Sensor S5 16 Shift Roller Motor M18 17 Exit Guide Plate Motor M19 18 Proof Junction...

Page 928: ... S2 6 Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid SOL4 7 Positioning Roller Solenoid SOL3 8 Positioning Roller Motor M14 9 Lower Tray Full Sensor Front S34 1 10 Lower Tray Full Sensor Rear S33 1 11 Main Board PCB1 12 Upper Tray Full Sensor S20 2 13 Upper Tray Full Sensor S19 14 Booklet Stapler Board PCB2 1 15 Booklet Pressure Roller Solenoid SOL5 1 1 B700 Only 2 B701 Only B700D202 WMF 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 ...

Page 929: ... Punch Drive Motor M24 3 Punch HP Sensor S24 4 Punch Unit Board PCB3 5 Paper position sensor slide motor M7 6 Paper Position Slide HP Sensor S22 7 Paper Position Sensor S3 8 Punch Hopper Full Sensor S4 9 Punch Movement HP Sensor S21 10 Punch Movement Motor M9 B700D203A WMF 1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 ...

Page 930: ...tor M5 5 Booklet Stapler Rear M23 1 6 Booklet Stapler Front M22 1 7 Jogger Fence Motor M15 8 Jogger Fence HP Sensor S15 9 Corner Stapler Movement Motor M6 10 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor S14 11 Corner Stapler M20 12 Corner Stapler Rotation Motor M13 13 Corner Stapler HP Sensor S17 14 Stapler Rotation HP Sensor S18 15 Stack Junction Gate Motor M17 1 1 B700 Only B700D204 WMF 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 7 8...

Page 931: ...ller Motor M12 3 Fold Plate Motor M11 4 Fold Plate HP Sensor S29 5 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor M16 6 Fold Cam HP Sensor S30 7 Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor S28 8 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor S26 9 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor M8 10 Fold Unit Exit Sensor S31 B700D205 WMF B700 only 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ...

Page 932: ...eel rod to position the stapler at the stapling position at 1 the front 2 the rear straight stapling 3 the rear diagonal stapling or 4 the front and rear for double stapling M7 Paper Position Sensor Slide Motor Drives the movement of the paper position slide that holds the paper position sensor S3 that detects the position of the paper M8 Clamp Roller Retraction Motor Drives a large cam that alter...

Page 933: ...two staples M21 Upper Tray Lift Motor Raises and lowers the upper tray during feed out to keep the tray at the optimum height until it is full M22 Booklet Stapler Front Booklet stapler Staples paper stacks in the center before they are folded M23 Booklet Stapler Rear Booklet stapler Staples paper stacks in the center before they are folded M24 Punch Drive Motor Fires the punches that punch the hol...

Page 934: ...sition of the upper tray 1 during straight through feed out 2 during shift feed out 3 when the machine is turned on The machine obeys the signal of whichever sensor is actuated first An actuator attached to an arm triggers this sensor The tip of the same arm depresses the upper tray limit switch If the sensor fails the tip of the arm will activate the upper tray limit microswitch SW2 and stop the ...

Page 935: ... etc the machine controls the operation of the punch drive M24 motor which drives a small encoder shaped like a notched wheel This wheel is rotated forward and reverse precisely to select which punches are moved up and down during the punch stroke S25 Clamp Roller HP Sensor Controls the movement of the clamp retraction roller the idle roller of the clamp roller pair S26 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor D...

Page 936: ...y At tray full the job halts until booklets are removed from the lower tray Solenoids SOL1 Proof Junction Gate Solenoid Opens and closes the proof tray junction gate When the solenoid switches on it opens the gate and paper is diverted to the proof tray When this gate is closed the paper goes straight to the upper tray I SOL2 Stapling Tray Junction Gate Solenoid Directs paper to the stapling tray ...

Page 937: ...rt Motor M2 2 Upper Proof Exit Motor M4 3 Upper Tray Lift Motor M21 4 Feed Out Belt Motor M5 5 Fold Roller Motor 1 M12 6 Folder Plate Motor 1 M11 7 Positioning Roller Motor M14 8 Lower Transport Motor M3 9 Entrance Motor M1 1 B700 Only B700D206 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 938: ...ains closed The proof tray junction gate directs paper to the proof tray above Shift Mode A Proof tray junction gate remains closed B Staple tray junction gate remains closed With both junction gates closed the paper goes to the upper tray Staple Mode A Proof tray junction gate remains closed B Staple tray junction gate opens The staple tray junction gate directs the paper to the staple tray below...

Page 939: ...enters the finisher B The pre stack junction gate opens and the 1st sheet of Set 2 4 switches back to the top of the pre stack tray as the 2nd sheet of Set 2 5 starts to descend C As the 2nd sheet of Set 2 continues to descend the 1st sheet of Set 2 is fed from the pre stack tray At this time the leading edges 6 of both sheets are even D The trailing edges of the 1st and 2nd sheets of Set 2 pass t...

Page 940: ...Set 1 11 exits the staple tray H The three sheets of Set 2 12 feed together into the stapler tray for stapling Pre stacking is only done for A4 B5 and LT paper In one staple mode one sheet goes to the pre stacking tray Then two sheets go to the stapler tray at the same time In two staple mode and booklet mode three sheets go to the pre stacking tray Then four sheets go to the stapler tray at the s...

Page 941: ...Upper Tray Full Sensors Important The B700 shown above has only one upper tray full sensor the higher sensor at H The B701 has two upper tray full sensors the upper and lower sensor at H On the B701 the upper sensor detects tray full for heavier paper A3 DLT B4 LG 12 x 18 and the lower sensor detects tray full for lighter paper A4 LT etc The tray full capacity is 2 000 sheets B700 for A4 LT and 3 ...

Page 942: ... Mode ON Standby The upper tray stops and waits for the paper output when the actuator activates sensor C D is not used for staple mode Staple Mode Operation The upper tray lowers the prescribed distance immediately after the stack exits The upper tray rises until the actuator activates sensor C and stops the tray lift motor and the tray to wait for the next set Sensor F and switch G are used as b...

Page 943: ...ted higher than the rear lower tray full sensor The lower tray is stationary When it becomes full the stapling and folding job stops until booklets are removed from the tray If the lower tray is not installed this is detected if the front and rear sensors remain OFF the machine will not operate in the booklet staple and fold mode When booklet mode is selected the tray full message appears on the o...

Page 944: ...the paper and the number of sheets in the booklet An example is shown below Tell the operators that the number of sheets that the lower tray can hold will vary greatly Lower Tray Full Condition Table A3 DLT 1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht Full 1 3 Cnt Full 2 5 Cnt 15 Cnt Full 3 7 Cnt 13 Cnt 4 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt 2 Cnt A4 LT 1 Sht 2 Sht 3 Sht 4 Sht 5 Sht 6 Sht 7 Sth 8 Sht 9 Sht Fu...

Page 945: ...700 44 2 8 CORNER STAPLING 2 8 1 STACKING AND JOGGING A Jogger Fence Motor M15 B Jogger Fences C Positioning Roller D Jogger Fence HP Sensor S15 E Stapling Edge Pressure Plate Solenoid SOL4 F Pressure Plate B700D102 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 946: ...ribed for the paper size This pushes the positioning roller C onto the sheet and pushes it down onto bottom fence This aligns the edge of the stack Next the jogger fence motor Switches on again and moves the jogger fences to within 2 6 mm of the sides of the stack to align the sides of the stack Reverses and moves the fences to the standby position 7 5 mm away for the sides and waits for the next ...

Page 947: ...CORNER STAPLING August 2006 B700 46 2 8 2 STAPLER MOVEMENT A Stapler Movement Motor B Stapler C Stapler Rotation Motor B700D103 WMF A B C ...

Page 948: ...s is the stapling position for the paper size selected for the job The stapler movement motor switches off and the stapler waits for the signal to fire or swivel and for diagonal stapling If the stack is to be stapled at two positions The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the front position and staples the front The stapler movement motor moves the stapler to the rear and the stapler sta...

Page 949: ...ring is driven by the stapler motor A inside the stapler unit The stapler hammer B fires the stapler C The cartridge set sensor D detects the cartridge at the correct position The staple end sensor E detects the staple end condition B468D015 WMF B700D304 WMF A B C D E ...

Page 950: ... As soon as the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and the jogger fences the stack feed out belt moves In booklet mode immediately after the edges are aligned by the positioning roller and jogger fences the booklet pressure solenoid switches on and the booklet pressure roller presses down on the stack until booklet stapling is finished This prevents the stack from shifting during stapling...

Page 951: ...sure Roller Rear 9 Jogger Fences x2 10 Pre Stack Exit Roller 11 Pressure Plate 12 Stapling Tray Bottom Fence 13 Corner Stapler M20 14 Stapling Tray Paper Sensor S14 15 Feed Out Belt 16 Fold Unit Bottom Fence 17 Fold Bottom Fence HP Sensor S28 18 Fold Unit Entrance Sensor S26 19 Fold Unit Exit Rollers x2 20 Fold Unit Exit Sensor S31 21 Fold Rollers x2 22 Clamp Rollers x2 23 Stack Junction Gate 24 S...

Page 952: ... 2 The pressure plate 3 and booklet pressure roller 4 press down on the sheet The stack feed out belt switches on and the pawl 5 on the feed out belt catches the bottom of the stack and raises it The stapling tray sensor 6 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack 3 The feed out belt 7 raises the stack to the prescribed stapling position and stops The jogger fences move to the sides of the stac...

Page 953: ... 6 transport rollers 7 8 and clamp rollers 9 rotate and feed the stack past the closed stack junction over the top and down toward the bottom fence 10 At the same time the fold unit bottom fence descends from its home position and stops 10 mm below the fold position 6 The rollers feed the leading edge of the stack to within 3 mm of the stack stopper of the bottom fence 13 The fold unit entrance se...

Page 954: ... position 2 8 The fold plate 3 moves to the left and advances 1 3 its maximum horizontal stroke and exerts 20 kg 44 lb of pressure at the fold rollers 4 9 With the fold plate pushing the stack into nip of the fold rollers 5 the fold rollers begin to rotate and fold the stack as it feeds out B700D914 BMP 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 955: ...fold rollers 4 reverses and feeds the folded edge back until only 3 mm of the fold 5 remains at the nip 12 The fold rollers 6 rotate forward once again feed out The fold unit exit sensor 7 once again detects the edge of the fold NOTE You can do SP6114 to increase the sharpness of the fold The number of forward and reverse feeds can be set in the range of 2 to 30 The machine repeats Steps 11 and 12...

Page 956: ...d rollers 2 and fold unit exit rollers 3 begin to rotate together and feed out the folded booklet to the lower tray 15 Once the trailing edge of the stack passes the fold unit exit sensor 4 the clamp rollers 5 close to be ready to feed the next stack The fold unit bottom fence 6 descends The bottom fence HP sensor 7 stops the bottom fence when it detects the actuator on the bottom fence B700D916 B...

Page 957: ...or Drives a timing belt and stack junction gate cam E Stack Junction Gate Cam Opens and closes the stack junction gate F Stack Junction Gate The stack junction gate motor and stack junction gate cam close the stack junction gate The feed out belt pawl raises the stapled stack and sends it over the top and down to the fold unit G Leading Edge Pressure Roller Presses down on the leading edge of the ...

Page 958: ...r The clamp rollers feed the stack to within 3 mm of the bottom fence when closed and then open to drop the stack onto the bottom fence D Clamp Roller HP Sensor Controls the rotation of the clamp roller retraction motor and cam that open and close the retracting clamp roller E Clamp Roller Cam Forces open the spring loaded retracting clamp roller Bottom Fence F Bottom Fence Raises the booklet stap...

Page 959: ...hes the stack into the nip of the fold rollers and then moves right to retract Fold Rollers F Fold Roller Motor Drives forward to feed out the stack at the fold and then reverses to feed the fold in to sharpen the crease and then drives forward again to feed out the folded stack This reverse forward cycle is done once NOTE This cycle can be repeated by changing the setting of SP6114 G Fold Rollers...

Page 960: ...ripherals 2 10 UPPER TRAY OUTPUT 2 10 1 FEED OUT A Feed Out Belt Motor B Stack Feed Out Belt C Pawl D Exit Rollers E Exit Guide Plate Motor F Exit Guide Plate G Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor H Upper Tray B700D109 WMF B700D110 WMF A B C D E F G H ...

Page 961: ... the exit guide plate closes and the exit roller feeds the stack out The opening and closing of the exit guide plate is controlled by the rising and falling of a link driven by a rotating cam attached to the shaft of the exit guide plate motor E The feed out belt motor stops 300 ms to prevent the stapled stack from rising too high Next the feed out belt motor switches on again then the pawl actuat...

Page 962: ...eed roller B and stacking sponge roller C Stacking sponge roller motor D moves the sponge roller forward and back with link E The position of the stacking sponge roller C is controlled by the stacking sponge roller motor which is switched on and off by the stacking roller HP sensor F B700D359 WMF A B C D E F ...

Page 963: ...s buckles the paper against the finisher entrance roller to correct skew The finisher entrance roller C starts to rotate again and feeds the sheet into the finisher These SP codes adjust the skew operation in the punch unit SP6103 This SP corrects the punch hole alignment To do this it corrects the skew of each sheet by adjusting the amount of time the finisher entrance roller remains off while th...

Page 964: ...tion to the punch unit board The machine uses the detected position of the paper edge to calculate the correct position for punching The upper transport motor switches on and rotates the feed rollers D the prescribed distance to position the paper under the punch unit Using the result of the position calculation the punch unit control board moves the punch unit E to the adjusted punch position The...

Page 965: ... These SP codes adjust the punch hole alignment SP6101 Adjusts the punch positions in the direction of paper feed SP6102 Adjusts the punch position perpendicular to the direction of feed For more see Section 5 Service Tables B700D360 WMF SP6102 SP6101 ...

Page 966: ...er into the finisher The finisher entrance sensor S1 C detects paper when it enters the finisher and detects paper jams The paper position slide sensor motor M7 D extends and retracts the paper position slide that holds the paper position sensor S27 E The paper position sensor detects the position of the paper edge The detected position of the paper is used to calculate and position the punch unit...

Page 967: ...nt motor M9 A extends and retracts the punch unit to position it at the correct position for punching The punch movement HP sensor S21 B detects the position when it retracts switches off the punch position movement motor and stops the punch unit at its home position The punch drive motor M24 C fires the punches that punch holes in the paper below B700D354 WMF A B C ...

Page 968: ... 3 hole punching F When the punch unit is at the punching position the punch motor turns until the encoder detects the starting position for 2 hole or 3 hole punching For two hole punching it only turns 180 degrees not 360 This is the 1 position in the diagrams the top diagram is for 2 hole punching and the bottom diagram is for 3 hole punching Then the punch drive motor turns counter clockwise to...

Page 969: ...the timing belt and gears that rotate the punch waste belt B The punchouts fall from the punch unit onto the belt The belt moves the punchouts to the front and dumps them in the punch waste hopper C The punch hopper full sensor D Signals that the hopper is full when it detects the top of the stack of punchouts that have collected in the hopper It also detects when the punch hopper is set properly ...

Page 970: ...ngth has elapsed Proof exit sensor late After finisher entrance sensor goes ON proof exit sensor does not go ON even after enough time to feed 450 mm R3 Proof Proof exit sensor lag After finisher entrance sensor goes OFF proof exit sensor does not go OFF even after enough time to feed 450 mm Upper tray exit sensor late After finisher entrance sensor goes ON upper tray exit sensor does not go ON ev...

Page 971: ...to feed 1650 mm Fold unit entrance sensor late S26 The fold unit entrance sensor goes not go ON after enough time has elapsed to feed 1 5 times the length of the stack after the leading edge of the stack reaches the stack present sensor S32 Fold unit exit sensor late S31 The fold unit exit sensor does not go ON after enough time has elapsed for the stack to feed 1 5 times its length from the fold ...

Page 972: ...COVER INTERPOSER TRAY Machine Code B704 06 09 ...

Page 973: ...NT B704 6 1 16 1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR B704 6 1 16 2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR B704 6 1 16 3 FEED MOTOR TRANSPORT MOTOR B704 7 2 DETAILS B704 8 2 1 OVERVIEW B704 8 2 1 1 MAIN LAYOUT B704 8 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT B704 9 2 1 3 PAPER SIZE DETECTION B704 10 2 1 4 PAPER PATH B704 13 2 2 PAPER FEED B704 14 Power On B704 14 Paper Separation and Feed B704 14 Bottom Tray Lift B704 14 Paper Near end B704 14 Pa...

Page 974: ...PLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 1 1 EXTERNAL COVERS A Open the feed cover B Upper front cover x 2 NOTE To remove the upper front cover screw C must be removed D Rear upper cover x 2 E Slip sheet tray x 2 x 1 F Rear middle cover x 2 B470R001 WMF A B D E F C 06 09 ...

Page 975: ...ptember 2006 B704 2 1 2 FEED UNIT AND PICK UP ROLLER Open the feed cover A Feed unit The unit is spring loaded Push it to the right to release it then lift it out B Pick up roller x 2 bushings x 2 B470R002 WMF B470R003 WMF A B 06 09 ...

Page 976: ...e from the holder Pull slowly to avoid losing the springs C Feed belt Re assembly 1 Position the pick up roller unit A and feed belt holder B as shown above 2 On the rear side slide out the bushing and rotate D until its flat side is parallel with E then snap it on 3 On the front side rotate F until its flat side is parallel with D then snap it on Viewed from the bottom the plates must be aligned ...

Page 977: ...e covers or slip sheets are not correctly aligned with holes punched in the other sheets 1 Open the feed cover 2 Loosen the screw A 3 Push the table B left or right to change its position then tighten the screw NOTE If you want to see the scale C you must remove the rear cover and the support tray B470R151 WMF A B C 06 09 ...

Page 978: ...6 MAIN BOARD B704 5 Peripherals 1 5 MAIN BOARD Open the top cover Rear cover x 1 A Main board x 9 x 4 NOTE All DIP switch settings on the main board of the cover sheet unit should be set to OFF B470R101 WMF A 06 09 ...

Page 979: ... VERTICAL TRANSPORT MOTOR Open the top cover Rear middle cover x 1 1 1 A Motor bracket x 1 harness x 1 x 2 timing belt x 1 B Motor x 2 1 6 2 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR Rear upper cover 1 1 A Bottom plate lift motor harness x 2 x 1 x 2 B470R102 WMF B470R104 WMF A B A 06 09 ...

Page 980: ...ear and transport gear hold one hand under the gear to catch the pin as it falls from the hole in the shaft A Feed gear x 1 pin x 1 timing belt x 1 bushing x 1 B Transport gear x 1 pin x 1 timing belt x 1 bushing x 1 C Motor bracket harness x 5 x 4 D Feed motor x 1 x 2 E Transport motor x 1 x 2 B470R105 WMF B470R103 WMF A B C D E 06 09 ...

Page 981: ...OVERVIEW September 2006 B704 8 2 DETAILS 2 1 OVERVIEW 2 1 1 MAIN LAYOUT 1 Support tray 2 Slip sheet tray 3 Pick up roller 4 Feed belt 5 Separation roller 6 Grip roller B470D001 WMF 6 5 1 2 3 4 06 09 ...

Page 982: ...2006 OVERVIEW B704 9 Peripherals 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Pick up Roller 2 Feed Belt 3 Bottom Plate Lift Motor 4 Feed Motor 5 Transport Motor 6 Timing Belt 7 Vertical Transport Motor B470D003 WMF 4 6 7 5 3 1 2 06 09 ...

Page 983: ...h sensors B S4 S5 S6 detect the width and length of the original on the interposer feed tray S3 P5 S4 S5 S6 DLT SEF S2 S1 P4 P3 P2 P1 8 K SEF LG 10 x14 B4 SEF F4 A4 SEF LT SEF US EXE SEF 16 K SEF 8 x10 B5 SEF HLT SEF A5 SEF A3 SEF A5 LEF LT LEF 16 K LEF US EXE LEF B5 LEF HLT LEF B470D901 WMF 06 09 ...

Page 984: ...1 0 0 101 2 x 71 2 US Exec 1 1 1 0 0 0 8 K 1 1 1 1 1 1 16 K SEF 1 0 0 1 0 0 16 K LEF 1 1 1 0 0 0 The cover interposer tray detects all the paper sizes listed above However there are some limitations on the display of the correct paper size North America Europe Asia B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Displays 10 x14 1 B5 SEF 182 x 257 Displays US Exec 1 A5 SEF 148 x 210 Displays HLT SEF 1 A5 LEF 210 x 148 Display...

Page 985: ...11 8 x 10 171 Europe Asia Execute SP5959 006 and enter the correct number for the size of the paper loaded for feeding from the cover interposer tray Loaded Display Default To Select for Display Enter 11 x 17 8 K 11 x 17 160 81 2 x 11 16 K SEF 81 2 x 11 166 11 x 81 2 16 K LEF 11 x 81 2 38 81 4 x 13 81 2 x 13 SEF 81 4 x 13 168 B070 B071 B140 series Paper Size Detection Some paper sizes are almost t...

Page 986: ...TH 1 Pick up Roller 2 Feed Belt 3 Separation Roller 4 Grip Roller 5 Transport Roller 1 6 Transport Roller 2 The paper feeds from the tray to the feed belt then to the grip roller and down into the paper path to the finisher below B470D006 WMF 6 5 4 1 2 3 06 09 ...

Page 987: ...ler F reverses if more than one sheet is fed Bottom Tray Lift As sheets feed from the top of the stack The pick up roller unit descends until the actuator on the pick up roller unit drops out of the pick up roller position sensor C The bottom plate lift motor switches on to raise the stack until the actuator enters the pick up roller unit position sensor again and switches the motor off This repea...

Page 988: ...3000 SHEET FINISHER Machine Code B706 06 09 ...

Page 989: ... OPEN SENSOR B706 11 Stack Height Sensors 1 and 2 B706 11 Exit Guide Open Sensor B706 11 3 5 2 UPPER TRAY PAPER LIMIT AND EXIT SENSOR B706 12 Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor B706 12 Upper Tray Exit Sensor B706 12 3 5 3 SHIFT TRAY EXIT SENSOR B706 13 3 5 4 ENTRANCE AND STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSORS B706 14 Entrance Sensor B706 14 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor B706 14 3 5 5 PRE STACK PAPER SENSOR B706 ...

Page 990: ...706 36 Rotation 1 B706 37 Rotation 2 B706 37 6 5 STAPLER B706 38 6 6 FEED OUT B706 40 6 7 PAPER EXIT STACKING B706 41 6 8 SHIFT TRAY B706 42 6 8 1 OVERVIEW B706 42 Stand by Mode B706 42 6 8 2 SHIFT TRAY UP DOWN MOVEMENT B706 43 Sort Stack Mode Shift Mode B706 43 Staple Mode B706 43 6 8 3 SHIFT TRAY LOWER LIMIT DETECTION B706 44 6 9 SHIFT TRAY SIDE TO SIDE MOVEMENT B706 45 6 10 STAPLING Z FOLDED PA...

Page 991: ......

Page 992: ...ion B706 1 Peripherals 1 INSTALLATION For details about installing the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 please refer to the instructions you received with the instructions or the 1 Installation in the main machine service manual 06 09 ...

Page 993: ...VENTIVE MAINTENANCE September 2006 B706 2 2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE For details about the 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 PM table please refer to Section 2 Preventive Maintenance in the main Service Manual 06 09 ...

Page 994: ...ND ADJUSTMENT 3 1 DOOR AND COVER REPLACEMENT Front Door 1 Remove the front door screw A x 1 2 Remove the front door B Left Inner Cover 1 Remove the front door 2 Remove the left inner cover C x 1 Inner Cover 1 Remove the inner cover D x 3 B478R502 WMF B478R505 WMF B D A C 06 09 ...

Page 995: ...ENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 B706 4 Side Table and Upper Tray 1 Remove the side table A x 2 Slide to the right to remove it 2 Click the release lever B and remove the upper tray C B478R503 WMF A B C 06 09 ...

Page 996: ...ar Cover and Top Cover 1 Remove the upper tray See Side Table and Upper Tray 2 Remove the step screws D x 2 3 Remove the top cover E x 2 Slide to the right to remove 4 Remove the rear cover F x 2 Shift Tray 1 If you need to lower the shift tray support the bottom of the tray with your hand then pull the gear toward you G to release the tray and lower it 2 Remove the shift tray H x 4 3 Remove the s...

Page 997: ...PLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 B706 6 3 2 ROLLERS 3 2 1 SHIFT POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Above the shift tray pull the roller mount A out 2 Remove the rollers B and C x 1 each B478R522 WMF A B C 06 09 ...

Page 998: ... 2006 Replacement and Adjustment B706 7 Peripherals 3 2 2 POSITIONING ROLLER 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the snap ring A 3 Release the rubber belt B 4 Replace the positioning roller C B478R506 WMF A B C 06 09 ...

Page 999: ... connectors x 8 4 Remove the screw A and tension spring B for the tension bracket C and release the tension of the timing belt 5 Remove the pulley D and bushing E x 2 6 Remove the inner cover F x 1 7 Open the guide G then remove the alignment brush roller assembly H x 1 8 Remove the alignment brush roller I x 1 bushing x 1 front back B478R507 WMF B478R508 WMF B C E D F G A H I 06 09 ...

Page 1000: ...amp x 1 5 Remove the front guide C x 1 spring x 1 NOTE When re installing make sure that the flat end of the shaft is against the plate 6 Remove the front panel D from the stays x 6 7 Remove the old belt E from the bottom center then the top NOTE 1 Make sure the ribbed side of the new belt and pawl F are facing down 2 Make sure the new belt is engaged at all three rollers B478R523 WMF B478R524 WMF...

Page 1001: ...ront door 2 Pull out the jogger and stapler unit 3 Push both fences to the center 4 Remove the left jogger fence A x 1 5 Remove the right jogger fence B x 1 NOTE If the screws are difficult to remove or re attach remove the jogger fence belt and spring plate B478R525 WMF B A 06 09 ...

Page 1002: ...he top cover 3 71 2 Remove the left upper panel and left upper cover x 2 x 2 3 Remove the protector plate A x 1 4 Remove the sensor feeler B x 1 5 Remove the sensor bracket C x 1 6 Replace the stack height sensor 1 D x 1 or 2 E x 1 Exit Guide Open Sensor 1 Remove the sensor bracket F x 1 2 Replace the exit guide open sensor G x 1 B478R509 WMF G F C E D B A 06 09 ...

Page 1003: ...Upper Tray Paper Limit Sensor 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the sensor cover A x 2 3 Remove the sensor bracket B x 1 4 Replace the upper tray paper limit sensor C x 1 Upper Tray Exit Sensor 5 Remove the sensor bracket D x 1 6 Replace the upper tray exit sensor E x 1 B478R510 WMF C A D E B 06 09 ...

Page 1004: ... top cover 2 Open the front door 3 Remove the inner cover 4 Release the upper exit guide springs A x 2 5 Disconnect the link B from the cam x 1 6 Remove the upper exit guide C x 1 x 1 7 Remove the guide stay D x 2 8 Replace the shift tray exit sensor E x 1 x 1 B478R512 WMF B478R511 WMF D A C A E B 06 09 ...

Page 1005: ...ance Sensor 1 Disconnect the finisher from the copier 2 Remove the sensor bracket A x 1 3 Replace the entrance sensor B x 1 x 1 Stapler Tray Entrance Sensor 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the sensor bracket C x 1 3 Replace the stapler tray entrance sensor D x 1 x 1 B478R513 WMF B478R514 WMF B A D C 06 09 ...

Page 1006: ...move the rear cover 2 Remove the main board A x 8 x all 3 Release the guide B x 2 4 Open the front door 5 Remove the left vertical transport guide C 6 Remove the middle vertical transport guide D x 1 7 Replace the pre stack paper sensor E x 1 B478R521 WMF B478R515 WMF B478R516 WMF A E D C B 06 09 ...

Page 1007: ...ASTE HOPPER SENSOR 1 Open the front door pull out the stapler unit then remove the rear cover 2 Remove the rear cover x 2 3 Remove the staple waste hopper A x 1 4 Remove the hopper holder B x 2 5 Replace the staple waste hopper sensor C x 1 B478R517 WMF B A C 06 09 ...

Page 1008: ...s 3 5 7 STAPLER ROTATION HP AND STAPLER RETURN SENSORS 1 Remove the stapler unit See next page 2 Remove the stapler mount bracket A x 4 Springs x 2 3 Replace the stapler rotation HP sensor B x 1 4 Replace the stapler return sensor C x 1 B478R519 WMF A C B 06 09 ...

Page 1009: ... September 2006 B706 18 3 6 STAPLER 1 Open the front door and pull out the staple tray 2 Remove the stapler unit harness cover A 3 Remove the stapler cover B x 1 x 2 4 Lift the stapler off of the pegs C B478R518 WMF B A C 06 09 ...

Page 1010: ...September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment B706 19 Peripherals 3 7 SHIFT TRAY MOTOR 1 Remove the front door and rear cover 3 1 2 Shift motor A x 2 x 3 B478R531 WMF A 06 09 ...

Page 1011: ...door and all covers with the exception of the left lower cover and top cover labeled C and E NOTE Be sure to lower the shift tray by pulling the gear toward you The shift tray must be down 2 Remove the tray shift motor 3 7 3 Remove the left stay A x 3 4 Unhook the stay at top B 5 Remove the shift tray mounting plate C x 2 B478R526 WMF A B C 06 09 ...

Page 1012: ...nd fence races C from the rollers D behind the fence 8 Remove the upper stay E x 4 9 Remove the lower stay F x 4 10 Remove the cover G x 4 11 Remove the stacking roller drag motor stay H x 3 x4 NOTE Make sure the motor and sensor connectors are disconnected before removing B478R527 WMF B478R528 WMF A E F G H D C B 06 09 ...

Page 1013: ... 22 12 Remove the stacking motor bracket A bushing x 1 x 1 13 Remove the stacking motor B x 2 14 Remove the roller drag motor bracket C x 2 15 Remove return HP sensor D 16 Remove the roller drag motor E x 1 B478R530 WMF B478R529 WMF A B C D E 06 09 ...

Page 1014: ...t and Adjustment B706 23 Peripherals 3 8 Z FOLD JOGGER UNIT 3 8 1 Z FOLD JOGGER UNIT COVER 1 Open the front door 2 Pull out the stapler tray unit A 3 Remove the Z fold jogger unit cover B x 2 B706R101 WMF B706R101 WMF A B 06 09 ...

Page 1015: ... September 2006 B706 24 3 8 2 Z FOLD JOGGER UNIT 1 Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit 2 Remove the Z fold jogger unit cover x 2 3 Remove the Z fold jogger unit A x 4 x 4 x 2 B706R103 WMF B706R103 WMF A 06 09 ...

Page 1016: ... 3 8 3 JOGGER TOP FENCE MOTOR 1 Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit 2 Remove the Z fold jogger unit cover x 2 3 Remove the motor bracket A x 2 timing belt x 1 4 Remove the jogger top fence motor B x 2 x 1 x 1 B706R102 WMF B706R102 WMF B A 06 09 ...

Page 1017: ...STMENT September 2006 B706 26 3 8 4 JOGGER BOTTOM FENCE MOTOR 1 Open the front door and pull out the stapler tray unit 2 Remove the jogger bottom fence motor A x 2 timing belt x 1 x 1 x 1 B706R104 WMF B706R104 WMF A 06 09 ...

Page 1018: ...lation and the remaining spacers were fastened with a screw to the rear frame of the finisher under the rear cover and slightly above the lock bar Right to Left Adjustment The position of the punched holes can be adjusted right to left in the sub scan direction with SP6 113 Punch Hole Position Adjustment The position can be adjusted in the range 7 5 mm in 0 5 mm steps The default setting is 0 Pres...

Page 1019: ...REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT September 2006 B706 28 3 10 JOGGER UNIT B513 3 10 1 JOGGER UNIT 4 Remove the jogger unit cover A x 2 5 Remove the jogger unit B x 2 x 1 B513I002 WMF B513R003 WMF A B 06 09 ...

Page 1020: ...September 2006 Replacement and Adjustment B706 29 Peripherals 3 10 2 JOGGER UNIT PCB 1 Remove the jogger unit from the finisher 3 10 1 2 Remove the jogger unit control PCB A x 2 x 3 B513R001 WMF A 06 09 ...

Page 1021: ...DJUSTMENT September 2006 B706 30 3 10 3 JOGGER UNIT MOTOR 1 Remove the jogger unit from the finisher 3 10 1 2 Remove the shift jogger motor A x 2 x 1 3 Remove the shift jogger lift motor B x 2 x 1 B513R002 WMF A B 06 09 ...

Page 1022: ...pherals 4 TROUBLESHOOTING If the machine logs an SC code in the display of the operation panel see Section 4 Troubleshooting of the Service Manual Section 4 contains a complete list of all service codes and how to troubleshoot the problem 06 09 ...

Page 1023: ...e main machine service manual 5 1 DIP SWITCHES DPS100 1 2 3 4 Description 0 0 0 0 Default 0 0 1 0 Free run A4 LEF staple mode 0 0 0 1 Free run staple and tray shift NOTE Do not use any other settings 5 2 TEST POINTS No Label Monitored Signal TP100 5V 5 V TP101 GND Ground TP102 RXD RXD TP103 TXD TXD 5 3 FUSES No Function FU100 Protects 24 V 06 09 ...

Page 1024: ...tions of open and closed junction gates Selected Operation Mode Solenoid Gate Upper Tray Sort Stack Staple A Stapler junction gate solenoid Off Off ON B Stapler junction gate Closed Closed OPEN C Tray junction gate solenoid ON Off Off D Tray junction gate OPEN Closed Closed B478D506 WMF B478D505 WMF B478D507 WMF Upper Tray Mode B D C A Sort Stack Mode D C A B Staple Mode B D C A 06 09 ...

Page 1025: ...eet to the pre stack tray B This sheet cannot be fed to the stapler yet because the first set is still being stapled The pre stack paper stopper solenoid C turns on 350 mm after the 1st sheet turns on the entrance sensor The pre stack paper stopper D then stops the paper The pre stack junction gate solenoid turns off 230 mm after the trailing edge of the 1st sheet passes through the entrance senso...

Page 1026: ...he jogger motor F turns on and the jogger fences G move to the wait position about 7 2 mm wider than the selected paper size on both sides When the trailing edge of the paper passes the staple unit entrance sensor the jogger motor moves the jogger fences 3 7 mm towards the paper Next the jogger motor turns on again for 3 5 mm for the horizontal paper alignment then goes back to the wait position P...

Page 1027: ...ves to the rear stapling position first staples moves to the front position staples and waits at the front For the second stack the stapler staples the front corner first then moves to the rear corner and staples NOTE For continuous stapling jobs the corners are stapled rear then front for the odd number stacks and stapled front then rear for even number stacks After the job is completed the stapl...

Page 1028: ...r rotation motor rotates the stapler unit to clockwise to remove the staple cartridge C This allows the user to add new staples Once the staples have been installed and the front door closed the stapler unit returns to its home position As the stapler unit is returning to the home position the stapler return sensor D is activated the return solenoid E turns on and it assists the guide roller F to ...

Page 1029: ... the number of copies in the set there will be very little for a stack containing 100 sheets The staple waste drops into the tray D in the stapler When the stapler unit returns to its home position the tray hits the shaft E and the tray opens The staple waste drops into the staple waste hopper F When the staple waste hopper is full the actuator on its base activates the staple waste hopper sensor ...

Page 1030: ...ed advising the operator to install a staple cartridge If this condition is detected during a copy job the indication will appear and the copy job will stop The staple cartridge has a clinch area D where jammed staples collect The operator can remove the jammed staples from the clinch area by pressing in the releases E on both sides then lowering the bracket lever F B478D518 WMF B478D517 WMF B C A...

Page 1031: ...des the upper shift tray exit roller G in order to feed out the leading edge of the copy set smoothly The exit guide motor turns on again a certain time after stapling is complete and the upper exit guide plate is lowered Then the shift tray exit roller takes over the stack feed out The on off timing of the exit guide motor is detected by the exit guide open sensor H The stack feed out motor turns...

Page 1032: ... counter clockwise as the rollers move back The simultaneous rotation and backward movement of the roller assembly pulls each sheet back toward the copier to align the edges of the stack on the shift tray The actuator H is mounted on the cam and rotating with both rotating clockwise and detects the roller assembly home position when the actuator leaves the gap of the return drive HP sensor I and s...

Page 1033: ...sensor 2 E S7 and switches it on This switches on the lift motor which raises the tray until the tray pushes the actuator out of the sensor E Then the lift motor stops the shift tray this is the home position the actuator D is between the two sensors E and F The shift tray upper limit switch SW1 prevents the drive gear from being damaged if staple mode HP sensor 2 E fails In case of a failure when...

Page 1034: ...S12 and switches it on This switches on the lift motor H which raises the tray until the actuator leaves the sensor Then the lift motor stops the tray this is the home position In sort stack mode if S12 fails when the tray is being lifted the shift tray upper limit switch SW1 prevents the drive gear from being damaged Staple Mode The shift tray moves to home position which is when the actuator B i...

Page 1035: ...r limit sensor B S11 for small paper smaller than B4 NOTE Sensor C S10 is not used When the actuator D enters sensor A while using large paper about 1500 sheets are on the tray a message will be displayed and copying will stop When the actuator D enters sensor B while using small paper about 3 000 sheets are on the tray a message will be displayed and copying will stop B478D010 WMF A B C D 06 09 ...

Page 1036: ...e shift tray the shift motor turns on driving the shift gear disk and the shaft D The end fence E is positioned by the shaft creating the side to side movement When the shift gear disk has rotated 180 degrees when the shift tray is fully shifted across the cut out in the shift gear disk turns on the shift tray half turn sensor F and the shift motor stops The next set of copies is then delivered Th...

Page 1037: ...pler tray 4 The positioning roller turns when each sheet is fed to the stapler tray 5 Each sheet is fed down against the lower jogger fence to align the bottom edge 6 After the set number of sheets come in the jogger top fence motor switches on and lowers the top fence against the top of the stack This aligns the stack for stapling 7 The bottom fence motor lowers the aligned stack to the stapling ...

Page 1038: ...s not turn on when the upper transport motor has fed paper 733 mm after the entrance sensor turned on 6 In sort stack mode the shift tray exit sensor does not turn off when the upper transport motor has fed paper 1 5 times the paper s length after it turned on 7 In staple mode the stapler tray entrance sensor does not turn on when the upper and lower transport motor have fed paper 835 mm after the...

Page 1039: ...rotate downward and punch holes in the paper After punching a sheet of paper the cam returns to home position and stops Home position depends on whether 2 holes or 3 holes are being made so there are two punch HP sensors Punch HP sensor 1 C is used when 2 hole punching is selected and punch HP sensor 2 D is used when 3 hole punching is selected When the cut out E enters the slot of the punch HP in...

Page 1040: ... indicate that the hopper is full and must be removed and emptied The job resumes automatically after the hopper is emptied and returned to the finisher The punch waste hopper sensor also functions as the hopper set sensor When the hopper is not in the finisher or if it is not inserted completely the spring loaded sensor arm rotates up and to the right with the punch waste sensor away from the hol...

Page 1041: ...1 JOGGER UNIT MECHANICAL LAYOUT 1 Shift Jogger Fence Lift Motor 2 Shift Jogger Motor Timing Belt 3 Shift Jogger Motor 4 Shift Jogger Fence Timing Belt 5 Shift Jogger Fences 6 Shift Jogger HP Sensor 7 Shift Jogger Lift HP Sensor B513D003 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 06 09 ...

Page 1042: ... the jogger fence lift motor F switches on and raises the fences until the actuator G leaves the slot of the shift jogger fence lift HP sensor H and shuts off the shift jogger fence lift motor At the same time the jogger motor reverses and drives the fences away from the sides of the stack until the actuator I deactivates the shift jogger fence HP sensor J and switches off the jogger motor The jog...

Page 1043: ...Gate 7 Entrance Rollers 8 Punch Unit 9 Pre stack Junction Gate 10 Punch Waste Hopper 11 Pre stack Tray 12 Stack Plate 13 Staple Waste Hopper 14 Stapler 15 Alignment Brush Roller 16 Positioning Roller 17 Stack Feed out Belt 18 Shift Tray Drive Belt 19 Lower Transport Rollers 20 Shift Tray 21 Shift Tray Exit Roller 22 Jogger Top Fence 23 Jogger Bottom Fence 6V900 WMF B478V500 WMF 10 9 15 14 3 11 12 ...

Page 1044: ...own the rear corner of the edge for stapling M15 Stapler Rotation Rotates the stapler 45 degrees for oblique stapling M16 Staple Hammer Drives the staple hammer M17 Punch Drives the punch shaft and roller Punch Unit B531 M18 Upper Transport Drives the entrance rollers the middle and upper transport rollers and upper tray exit roller M19 Shift Jogger Drives the shift jogger fences against the sides...

Page 1045: ...S18 Stack Feed Out Belt HP Detects the home position of the stack feed out belt S19 Stapler Tray Paper Detects the copy paper in the stapler tray S20 Jogger HP Detects the home position of the shift jogger fences S21 Stack Plate Center HP Detects the home position of the center stack plate S22 Stack Plate Front Detects the home position of the front stack plate S23 Stack Plate Rear Detects the hom...

Page 1046: ...ion Gate Drives the pre stack junction gate SOL4 Pre stack Paper Stopper Drives the stopper pawl of the pre stacking tray SOL5 Stapler Return Positions the stapler correctly on its return from the staple supply point SWITCHES SW1 Shift Tray Upper Limit Cuts the power to the shift tray lift motor when the shift tray position is at its upper limit SW2 Front Door Safety Cuts the dc power when the fro...

Page 1047: ...ioning Roller 11 Lower Transport Roller 3 12 Lower Transport Motor 13 Lower Transport Rollers 2 14 Lower Transport Roller 1 15 Transport Roller 1 16 Entrance Roller 2 17 Entrance Roller 18 Upper Transport Roller 1 19 Upper Transport Motor 20 Stack Feed out Motor 21 Jogger Motor 22 Jogger Fence 23 Stack Plate Motor 24 Stapler Motor 25 Stack Feed out Belt 26 Stapler Rotation Motor B478V504 WMF B478V...

Page 1048: ...9 BIN MAILBOX Machine Code B762 06 09 ...

Page 1049: ...RVIEW B762 4 2 1 1 MAIN COMPONENT LAYOUT B762 4 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT B762 5 2 1 3 PAPER PATH B762 6 2 2 BASIC OPERATION B762 7 2 2 1 PAPER PATH B762 7 2 3 OVERFLOW DETECTION B762 8 2 3 1 OVERVIEW B762 8 2 3 2 DETECTION TIMING B762 9 2 4 PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING B762 10 2 4 1 A4 SIDEWAYS LEF 1ST BIN TRAY B762 10 2 4 2 A4 SIDEWAYS LEF 2ND 9TH BIN TRAY B762 10 06 09 ...

Page 1050: ......

Page 1051: ...MENT AND ADJUSTMENT CAUTION Switch the machine off and unplug the machine before starting and procedure in this section 1 1 COVERS AND TRAYS A Trays Grip each tray by the front and lift out B Front cover x2 C Rear cover x3 D Top cover B471R001 WMF A B C D 06 09 ...

Page 1052: ...B762 2 1 2 SENSORS Remove the tray 1 1 A Bin cover B Tray sensor x1 C Tray overflow sensor x1 D Vertical transport sensor x1 Raise the pawl then grip the bottom of the sensor to remove B471R003 WMF B471R104 WMF B C D A 06 09 ...

Page 1053: ...6 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD B762 3 Peripherals 1 3 MAIN MOTOR AND CONTROL BOARD Rear cover 1 1 A Control board x3 x17 B Main motor bracket main motor x1 x2 C Timing belt D Main motor x1 B471R002 WMF A B C D 06 09 ...

Page 1054: ...sport Rollers x5 3 Turn Gates x8 4 Exit Rollers x9 The trays are 1 to 9 bottom to top The numbers are clearly marked on the side of the unit The top tray does not require a turn gate When the top tray is selected for output all turn gates remain closed leaving only the top bin open B471D003 WMF 1 2 4 3 06 09 ...

Page 1055: ...September 2006 OVERVIEW B762 5 Peripherals 2 1 2 DRIVE LAYOUT 1 Main Motor 2 Main Timing Belt 3 Timing Belt B471D002 WMF 1 2 3 06 09 ...

Page 1056: ...h 2 Vertical Transport Path 3 LCT Feed 4 Selected Trays 5 Turn Gates 6 Mailbox Paper Path 7 Junction Gate paper goes either up to the mailbox or out to the finisher s proof tray The solenoid for the junction gate 7 is part of the mailbox B471D970 WMF 1 4 5 6 7 2 3 06 09 ...

Page 1057: ...ted tray C A solenoid D opens and closes the junction gate E When a solenoid switches on the gate opens and directs to the paper to the tray NOTE When the top tray bin 9 is selected all solenoids are off and closed allowing the paper to pass to the top tray bin 9 does not require a solenoid When the last sheet is fed out it switches off the vertical transport sensor and both the mailbox main motor...

Page 1058: ... each paper tray The actuator mounted on a swivel arm remains in contact with the top of the stack The actuator rises as the stack becomes higher until it activates the sensor Then a tray full message appears on the operation panel and the job halts If the paper is removed before the tray is full the job continues B471D005 WMF A B 06 09 ...

Page 1059: ...size ppm x 3 s After the tray full sensor switches on if it remains on for the feeding of eight additional sheets then this notifies the machine that the tray is full T is calculated as shown below For example for a minimum ppm of 12 prints regardless of paper size the value T is 15 s Then if the sensor detects paper for 15 s or more the machine stops the copy job Full High Not Full Low Between Sh...

Page 1060: ...IDEWAYS LEF Î 2ND 9TH BIN TRAY Main Motor Main Unit Exit Sensor Main Motor Mailbox Turn Gate SOL 1 J1 1 1 Time required for A4 LEF B471D011 WMF Main Motor Main Unit Exit Sensor Main Motor Mailbox Turn Gate SOL 2 J1 1 1 Time required for A4 Sideways LEF 2 Feed to 9th Tray All SOLs OFF Vertical Transport Sensor 1 J2 J3 B471D012 WMF 06 09 ...

Page 1061: ... J2 Timing After the mailbox paper exit sensor is activated the machine determines that the paper has not yet fed and detects a misfeed if the vertical transport sensor does not activate within the time prescribed for the paper size 1 94 s for A4 paper for example J3 Timing After the vertical transport sensor is activated a misfeed is detected if the vertical transport sensor does not turn off wit...

Page 1062: ...PAPER MISFEED DETECTION TIMING September 2006 B762 12 06 09 ...

Page 1063: ...o double sided e STUDIO4500c e STUDIO5500c Full color 28 cpm or higher Monochrome 42 cpm or higher Warm up time 300 sec First copy Full color 7 5 sec Monochrome 6 5 sec Original types Sheet book object Max original size A3 11 x 17 Resolution Scanning 600 dpi 10 bit Copying 600 dpi 6 bit Printing 600 dpi 4 bit Max image size 297 x 600 mm 11 7 x 23 6 Magnification NA 7 Reduction 5 Enlargement 93 85 ...

Page 1064: ... lb bond up to 163 g m2 44 lb index 60 lb Bypass 52 3 256 g m2 14 68 5 lb bond Paper weight Duplex mode 64 127 9 g m2 17 34 lb bond Output capacity 500 sheet A4 8 x 11 With Copy Tray B756 NA 120V 20A 60 Hz Power EU Asia 220 240V 10A 50 60 Hz NA Less than 1920 W Max power consumption EU Asia Less than 1920 W NA Electric counter mechanical counter x2 Counter EU Asia Electric counter mechanical count...

Page 1065: ... _S _S LT SEF 8 x 11 OP_T OP_T A_AD A_AD OP_L OP_L _S _S HLT LEF 8 x 5 X X A_AD A_AD X X X X HLT SEF 5 x 8 X X A_AD A_AD X X A_WD _S Foolscap SEF 8 x 13 X X A_AD A_AD X X _S _S Folio SEF 8 x 13 X X A_AD A_AD X X _S _S F SEF 8 x 13 X X A_AD A_AD X X _S _S Executive LEF 10 x 7 X X A_AD A_AD X X _S _S Executive SEF 7 x 10 X X A_AD A_AD X X _S _S 8K SEF 267 x 390 mm X X A_AD A_AD X X _M _M 16K LEF 267...

Page 1066: ... Ethernet RJ 45 10 BaseT 100BaseTX USB 2 0 Network Protocol TCP IP IPX SPX SMB NetBEUI 1 NetBIOS over TCP IP AppleTalk auto switching Private MIB Supported by Ricoh MIB support Standard MIB MIB II RFC1213 HostResource RFC1514 PrinterMib RFC1759 Network operating systems Windows 95 98SE NT 4 0 2000 Me XP Server 2003 NetWare 3 12 3 2 4 1 4 11 5 0 5 1 6 Unix Sun Solaris HP UX SCO Open Server Red Hat ...

Page 1067: ... LEF 11 x 17 SEF 8 x 14 SEF 8 x 13 SEF 8 x 11 SEF LEF 5 x 8 SEF LEF Min 10 x 10 mm 0 04 x 0 04 Original size Customized Max 297 x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 Compression Method BW Binary TIFF MH MR MMR Grayscale Full Color JPEG Interface support 10 100BaseTX Default BW Text Supported BW OCR BW Text Photo BW Photo Grayscale FC Photo FC Text Photo Scan mod Options 1 Auto Color Selection sRGB Photo sRGB Text Ph...

Page 1068: ... size Duplex A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 5 x 8 8 x 11 8 x 14 11 x 17 Simplex 40 128 g m 2 11 34 lb bond Original weight Duplex 52 128 g m 2 14 34 lb bond NA 11 x 17 10 x 14 8 x 14 SEF 8 x 11 5 x 8 SEF LEF 7 x 10 A3 SEF A4 SEF LEF Auto Original Size Detection EU Asia A3 B4 SEF A4 B5 A5 B6 SEF LEF 8 x 13 8K SEF 16K SEF Original set position Face up left rear corner Special original setting Batch mixed sizes Full...

Page 1069: ... With LG B4 Option Less than 27 kg 59 4 lb Power Consumption Less than 50 W Noise Less than 74dB Paper Size A4 B5 11 x 8 LEF Paper Weight 52 128g m 14 lb 34 lb Bond Paper Capacity 80 g m 2 or 20 lb bond 4 000 sheets 2 500 sheets Paper Weight 50 128g m 14 lb 34 lb Bond Note1 with B4 LG Option Note2 80g m2 20lb Bond paper 3 2 8 X 14 B4 PAPER SIZE TRAY B474 This is the option for the LCT B473 that al...

Page 1070: ...r 20lb Bond paper 3 4 COVER INTERPOSER TRAY B704 The cover interposer tray can be used with the 2000 Sheet Finisher B700 3000 Sheet Finisher B701 3000 Sheet Finisher B706 The interposer tray is installed between the copier and the finisher The interposer tray and the Mailbox B762 cannot be installed together Dimension w x d x h 500 x 600 x 600 mm 19 7 x 23 6 x 23 6 in Weight Less than 12 Kg 26 4 l...

Page 1071: ... x17 Paper Weight 52 g m 256 g m 14 lb Bond 68 lb Bond 140 lb Index 90 lb Cover 3000 sheets A4 LEF B5 LEF 8 x11 LEF 1500 sheets A3 A4 B4 B5 SEF 11 x17 8 x14 8 x 11 SEF 500 sheets A5 LEF 5 x8 1 2 LEF Shift Tray Stack Capacity 100 sheets A5 SEF 5 x8 SEF Paper Size A5 A3 SEF 5 x8 11 x17 Paper Weight 52 g m 256 g m 14 lb Bond 68 lb Bond 140 lb Index 90 lb Cover Staples Paper Size B5 A3 8 1 2 x11 11 x1...

Page 1072: ...00 sheets NA 3 hole 15 000 sheets EU 2 hole 40 000 sheets EU 4 hole 15 000 sheets Punch Waste Hopper Capacity Scandinavia 4 hole 15 000 sheets Paper Weight 52 g m 127 9 g m 14 lb Bond 34 lb Bond SEF A6 A3 5 x 8 8 x11 NA 2 holes LEF A5 A4 5 x 8 8 x11 SEF A3 B4 11 x17 NA 3 holes LEF A4 B5 8 x 11 SEF A6 A3 5 x8 11 x17 EU 2 holes LEF A5 A4 5 x 8 8 x 11 SEF A3 B4 11 x 17 EU 4 holes LEF A4 B5 8 x 11 SEF...

Page 1073: ...ond 43 lb Bond 90 lb Index 60 lb Cover 3 000 sheets A4 LEF x11 LEF 1 500 sheets A3 SEF A4 SEF B4 SEF B5 11 x17 SEF 8 x14 SEF 8 x 11 SEF 12 x18 SEF 500 sheets A5 LEF Stack Capacity 100 sheets A5 SEF B6 SEF A6 SEF 5 x 8 SEF Paper Size A5 A3 SEF A6 SEF B6 SEF 5 x 8 11 x17 SEF 12 x 18 SEF Shift Tray Paper Weight 52 g m 256 g m 14 lb Bond 68 lb Bond 140 lb Index 90 lb Cover Staples Paper Size B5 A3 8 1...

Page 1074: ... Sets 20 50 pages 150 60 sets A4 LEF 8 1 2 x11 LEF 2 19 pages 150 sets 15 50 pages 100 30 sets A4 SEF B5 8 12 x11 SEF 2 14 pages 100 sets 15 30 pages 100 33 sets Stapled Stack Capacity same size Others 2 14 pages 100 sets Stapled Stack Capacity mixed sizes A4 LEF A3 SEF B5 LEF B4 SEF 8 1 2 x11 LEF 11 x17 SEF 2 30 pages 50 set ...

Page 1075: ... Paper Weight 52 g m 163 g m 14 lb Bond 43 lb Bond 90 lb Index 60 lb Cover 2 000 sheets A4 LEF 8 1 2 x11 LEF 1 000 sheets A3 SEF A4 SEF B4 SEF B5 11 x17 SEF 8 x14 SEF 8 x 11 SEF 12 x18 SEF 500 sheets A5 LEF Stack Capacity 100 sheets A5 SEF B6 SEF A6 SEF 5 x8 SEF Paper Size A5 A3 SEF A6 SEF B6 SEF 5 x8 to 11 x 17 SEF 12 x 18 SEF Shift Tray Paper Weight 52 g m 256 g m 14 lb Bond 68 lb Bond 140 lb In...

Page 1076: ...8 1 2 x11 LEF 11 x17 SEF 2 30 pages 2 5 pages 6 10 pages Booklet Staple Capacity A4 SEF A3 SEF B5 SEF B4 SEF 8 1 2 x11 SEF 8 1 2 x14 SEF 11 x17 SEF 12 x18 SEF 11 15 pages B700 B701 Paper Specifications Plain Paper Paper Type Paper Size Copier PPC Used Paper Recycled Paper Colored Paper Translucent Blueprint A3 SEF B4 SEF A4 SEF A4 LEF B5 SEF B5 LEF A5 SEF A5 LEF B6 SEF B6 LEF 12 x 18 SEF 11 x 17 S...

Page 1077: ...heets NA 3 hole Up to 5 000 sheets EU 2 hole Up to 14 000 sheets EU 4 hole Up to 7 000 sheets Punch Waste Replenishment Scandinavia 4 hole Up to 7 000 sheets Paper Weight 52 g m 163 g m 14 lb Bond 43 lb Bond 90 lb Index 60 lb Cover SEF A5 to A3 5 x8 to 11 x17 NA 2 hole LEF A5 A4 5 x 8 8 x 11 SEF A3 B4 11 x17 NA 3 hole LEF A4 B5 8 x 11 SEF A5 A3 5 x 8 to 11 x 17 EU 2 hole LEF A5 to A4 5 x 8 8 x 11 ...

Page 1078: ...sion w x d x h 495 x 215 x 535 mm 19 5 x 8 5 x 21 1 in Weight 11 kg 24 2 lb Paper Size A3 SEF B4 SEF A4 11 x17 SEF 8 x 14 SEF 8 x 11 Paper Capacity 1 000 Sheets 3 11COPY TRAY B756 The copy tray is installed receive copies when the copier is used without a finisher Dimension w x d x h 400 x 335 x 70 mm 15 8 x 13 2 x 2 8 in Weight 640 g 1 4 lb 500 Sheets A4 8 x 11 Paper Capacity 250 Sheets A3 11 x 1...

Page 1079: ...t Type 1075 For B706 only 9 B513 Output Jogger Unit Type 1075 For B706 only 10 B704 Cover Interposer Tray Type 3260 For B700 B701 B706 11 B762 Mailbox CS391 For B700 B701 only 12 B701 3000 Sheet Finisher SR970 No saddle stitching Tray x1 50 sheet stapling 13 B702 Punch Unit Type 3260 For B700 B701 14 B700 2000 Sheet Booklet Finisher SR4000 Saddle stitching Trays x2 50 sheet stapling 15 B703 Output...

Page 1080: ...ensation Heater Transfer This options removes moisture from the air around the paper transfer unit H4 Upper Tray Heater Keeps paper dry Provided with machine connection is optional HARD DISKS HDD1 HDD 1 The HDDs hold temporary files spooled for processing and also store permanent files for the document server application HDD2 HDD 2 2nd HDD in a set of 4 HDD3 HDD 3 3rd HDD in a set of 4 HDD4 HDD 4 ...

Page 1081: ...B belt M12 Ozone Fan Motor Draws air from around the drums and through the ozone filter M13 Fusing Fan Motor Cools the fusing unit M14 Fusing Cooling Fan Motor Draws cool air into the fusing unit through a vent and past a heat sink mounted above the fusing unit M15 Fusing Exhaust Fan Motor Draws the hot air away from the heat sink mounted above the fusing unit and expels the hot air through a vent...

Page 1082: ... PCU M43 Drum Motor C Drives the drum in the Cyan PCU M44 Drum Motor M Drives the drum in the Magenta PCU M45 Drum Motor K Drives the drum in the Black PCU M46 ITB Drive Motor Rotates the image transfer roller that drives the ITB M47 3rd Mirror Motor M Fine adjusts the position of the 3rd mirror of the optics for M magenta during MUSIC adjustment M48 Polygon Motor Rotates the polygon mirror in the...

Page 1083: ... pull toner from the Black STC MC5 Toner Supply Clutch K Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the Black PCU to send toner to the development unit below MC6 Toner Pump Clutch Y Engages the drive shaft and rotor of the Yellow toner pump to pull toner from the Yellow STC when more toner is needed MC7 Toner Supply Clutch Y Engages the toner supply coils in the sub hopper of the Yellow P...

Page 1084: ...es the dc ac charges for paper separation PCB10 DMB Drum Motor Board Controls the motors that drive the OPC drums PCB11 TMB Transfer Motor Board Controls the motor that drives the ITB PCB12 Potential Sensor Board Processes data from the Y M C K potential sensors PCB13 PPB Peltier Board Controls the operation of the Peltier unit PCB14 CNB Connector Board Sorts and routes signals to electrical compo...

Page 1085: ...4 PCB28 LSDB M Front Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for Laser Diode 3 PCB29 LSDB C Front Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for Laser Diode 2 PCB30 LSDB Y Front Front Laser Synchronization Detector Board for Laser Diode 1 PCB31 LSDB Y Rear Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for Laser Diode 1 PCB32 LSDB C Rear Rear Laser Synchronization Detector Board for Laser Diode 2 PC...

Page 1086: ...e center MUSIC pattern This feedback is used to control the MUSIC process to correct color registration errors S5 MUSIC Sensor Front Reads the front MUSIC pattern This feedback is used to control the MUSIC process to correct color registration errors S6 MUSIC Sensor Rear Reads the Rear MUSIC pattern This feedback is used to control the MUSIC process to correct color registration errors S7 Paper Fe...

Page 1087: ... bottle is full S19 Paper Feed Sensor Tray 1 Detects the leading edge of each sheet of paper from the pick up roller of tray 1 tandem tray and switches off the pick up roller solenoid so the pick up roller lifts S20 Vertical Transport Sensor Tray 1 Detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each sheet fed from tray 1 2 and 3 and signals a jam if the edges do not pass at the prescribed time S21 ...

Page 1088: ... heating roller overheats S39 Waste Toner Lock Sensor Signals an alert if the waste toner collection coil locks and stops rotating S40 Duplex Transport Sensor 1 The feeler of this sensor detects the leading edge and trailing edge of each sheet as it passes from the jogger unit above and into the horizontal feed path of the duplex unit below Signals a jam if the paper does not arrive at or reach th...

Page 1089: ...he Copy Paper Tray B75 is full and temporarily pauses printing so the operator can remove the stack from the tray and continue S56 TD Sensor M Monitors the amount of toner in the developer toner mixture in the development unit of the Magenta PCU S57 TD Sensor K Monitors the amount of toner in the developer toner mixture in the development unit of the Black PCU S58 Temperature Humidity Sensor PCU K...

Page 1090: ...he exposure glass positioned for LEF S75 Original Length Sensors 1 APS2 a board holds two original length sensors under the exposure glass The detection combinations of these sensors determine the length of the original on the exposure glass positioned for SEF S76 Original Length Sensor 2 APS3 a board holds one original length sensor under the exposure glass The detection combination of this senso...

Page 1091: ...witches off the solenoid leaving it locked in the open position to allow the rear fence to push the paper stack from the left tray into the right tray SOL8 Rear Side Fence Solenoid Tray 1 When the right tray paper sensor in the tandem tray signals paper out and the left tray paper sensor signals paper present this energizes this solenoid which pulls open the rear side fence until the rear side fen...

Page 1092: ...d breaks the circuit to the heating lamps if a lamp overheats TH2 Hot Roller Thermistor Detects and monitors the temperature of the hot roller for fusing temperature control TH3 Pressure Roller Thermistor Detects the temperature of the hot roller for fusing temperature control THERMOSTATS TS1 Pressure Roller Thermostat 1 Monitors the temperature of the pressure roller and cuts the circuit if the p...

Page 1093: ...in measured from the reference point S04 Original Width Sensor 5 Detects paper wider than 288 mm 11 3 in measured from the reference point S05 Original Width Sensor 1 Detects paper wider than 138 mm 5 4 in measured from the reference point S06 Original Set Sensor Detects whether an original is on the table S07 Bottom Plate HP Sensor Detects whether the bottom plate is in the down position or not S...

Page 1094: ...it feeds to the inverter rollers for 2nd side scanning or feeds to the exit rollers for exit S21 ARDF Position Sensor Detects whether the ARDF unit is up or down for scanning on the main exposure glass book mode S22 APS Start Sensor Signals the CPU when the DF is opened and closed for platen mode so that the original size sensors in the copier can check the original size SOLENOIDS SOL01 Upper Inve...

Page 1095: ...000 SHEET FINISHER B700 701 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 2 2 OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT B703 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM MAILBOX B762 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM COVER INTERPOSER B704 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM LCT B473 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 3000 SHEET FINISHER B706 POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM ADF ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 2000 3000 SHEET FINISHER B700 B701 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 2 2000 3000 SHEET FINISHER B700 B701 ELE...

Page 1096: ...e STUDIO4500c 5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 1 4 ...

Page 1097: ...e STUDIO4500c 5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 2 4 ...

Page 1098: ...e STUDIO4500c 5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 3 4 ...

Page 1099: ...e STUDIO4500c 5500c POINT TO POINT DIAGRAM 4 4 ...

Page 1100: ... 35 21 15 36 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 34 89 85 86 87 91 90 88 76 77 78 79 81 80 82 83 84 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 106 105 107 108 109 112 110 111 113 114 58 61 62 65 66 68 60 75 71 69 54 55 56 57 64 67 74 73 59 63 70 72 B132V305 WMF B132V310A WMF B132V311A WMF B132V304 WMF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 B132V303A WMF ...

Page 1101: ...1 199 200 218 206 219 207 208 209 210 211 217 216 215 214 213 212 B132V311 WMF B132V307 WMF B132V301 WMF B132V302 WMF 136 138 137 139 140 141 142 143 144 126 132 133 134 127 128 129 130 131 B132V309 WMF 145 147 146 149 150 148 135 B132V308 WMF 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 170 171 169 167 168 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 154 155 151 152 153 172 173 176 174 175 ...

Page 1102: ... 166 C6 3 4 S48 Relay Sensor 170 C6 3 4 S49 Registration Sensor 171 C6 3 4 S50 Paper Exit Sensor 154 E5 3 4 S51 Bypass Paper Feed Sensor 78 C5 3 4 S52 Bypass Paper End Sensor 77 C5 3 4 S53 Bypass Paper Size Sensor 82 D5 3 4 S54 Paper Exit Relay Sensor 91 H4 3 4 S55 Copy Tray Full Sensor Option H4 3 4 S56 TD Sensor M 42 D1 3 4 S57 TD Sensor K 45 D1 3 4 S58 Temperature Humidity Sensor PCU K 46 D1 3 ...

Page 1103: ......

Page 1104: ......

Page 1105: ......

Page 1106: ......

Page 1107: ...2 5 5 RXD ZESM GND2 TXD 5 VE N C 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 0 GND2 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 GND2 0 5 5 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 Turn Gate Solenoid 8 Turn Gate Solenoid 6 Turn Ga...

Page 1108: ...o B r o s n e S P H r o s n e S t u o l l u P e t a l P e d i u G r o s n e S t e S r o s n e S t i x E 1 5 0 1 N C 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 D N G 0 5 5 2 D N G 0 5 5 5 2 D N G 0 5 2 D N G 0 5 5 2 D N G 0 5 5 2 D N G 0 5 5 2 D N G 0 5 5 2 D N G 0 5 5 3 7 0 2 N C 2 1 3 8 0 2 N C 2 1 3 9 0 2 N C 2 1 3 0 1 2 N C 2 1 3 1 1 2 N C 2 1 3 2 1 2 N C 2 1 3 5 0 2 N C 2 1 3 6 0 2 N C 2 1 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2 ...

Page 1109: ...1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 5 N C 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C N 6 1 5 1 4 1 3 1 2 1 1 1 0 1 9 1 B C P d a o r B e c a f r e t n I T C L 1 5 3 1 N C 2 3 1 6 3 1 N C 2 3 1 7 3 1 N C 2 3 1 8 3 1 N C 2 3 d n E r a e N r o s n e S t h g i e H r e p a P 1 r o s n e S t h g i e H r e p a P 2 r o s n e S t h g i e H r e p a P 3 r o s n e S R E I P O C C N 4 2 V 4 2 A A V 4 2 A A V 4 2 A A V 4 2 A A D N G A 0 D N G A 0 D N ...

Page 1110: ...trance Sensor Upper Tray Exit Sensor Upper Tray Limit Sensor Shift Tray Exit Sensor Exit Guide Open Sensor Shift Paper Height Sensor Stapling Paper Height Sensor CN116 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CN117 1 2 3 4 5 CN120 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CN133 1 2 CN118 1 2 3 4 CN119 1 2 CN121 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CN122 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CN124 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CN125 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CN122 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 1111: ...P H r e l l o R p u k c i P 6 S 5 B 8 2 r o s n e S t e S l a n i g i r O 7 S 5 B 2 3 r o s n e S P H e t a l P m o t t o B 8 S 4 B 3 2 r o s n e S n e p O r e v o C d e e F 9 S 4 B 4 2 r o s n e S n o i t i s o P e t a l P m o t t o B 0 1 S 4 B 2 2 r o s n e S r e t r e v n I r e p p U 1 1 S 4 B 9 2 r o s n e S r e t r e v n I r e w o L 2 1 S 3 B 5 2 G L 1 r o s n e S h t g n e L l a n i g i r O ...

Page 1112: ... 5 7 5 F M W 5 0 2 D 0 0 7 B 1 6 2 6 5 6 6 6 8 6 0 6 4 6 7 6 9 5 3 6 F M W A 3 0 2 D 0 0 7 B 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 F M W 1 0 2 D 0 0 7 B 4 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 3 3 1 2 20 9 1 8 2 9 2 0 3 1 3 2 3 F M W 2 0 2 D 0 0 7 B 2000 3000 SHEET FINISHER B700 B701 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT 1 2 ...

Page 1113: ...d o M e l p a t S r o s n e S t h g i e H r e p a P y a r T r e p p U 8 S 2 1 5 B 8 e d o M e l p a t S n o N r o s n e S t h g i e H r e p a P y a r T r e p p U 9 S 2 1 5 B 5 r o s n e S t i x E y a r T f o o r P 0 1 S 2 1 5 B 6 r o s n e S l l u F y a r T f o o r P 1 1 S 2 1 5 B 9 r o s n e S t i m i L y a r T r e p p U 2 1 S 2 1 5 B 1 1 r o s n e S P H r e l l o R g n i k c a t S 3 1 S 2 1 4 B ...

Page 1114: ... 2 M r o t o M r e g g o J r a e R 3 F 3 3 M r o t o M t f i L r e g g o J 4 F 1 s r o s n e S 1 S 5 r o s n e S P H r e g g o J t n o r F 1 F 2 S 7 r o s n e S P H r e g g o J r a e R 1 F 3 S 6 r o s n e S P H t f i L r e g g o J 2 F 1 2 3 5 6 7 2 1 4 F M W 2 0 1 D 3 0 7 B OUTPUT JOGGER UNIT B703 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT g ...

Page 1115: ...ort 4 B5 B6 S16 12 10 Paper Overflow 6 B5 S17 Paper Detect 7 B5 S18 8 7 6 Paper Overflow 7 Paper Overflow 8 B5 S19 Paper Detect 8 B4 S20 Transport 5 B4 S21 5 4 B4 S22 Paper Detect 9 B3 S23 3 4 Paper Overflow 9 B3 S24 Door Safety B3 Solenoids SOL1 28 Turn Gate 1 I4 SOL2 29 27 Turn Gate 2 I4 SOL3 30 Turn Gate 3 I3 SOL4 31 Turn Gate 4 I3 SOL5 32 Turn Gate 5 I3 SOL6 33 Turn Gate 6 I2 SOL7 34 35 Turn G...

Page 1116: ...a l P m o t t o B 2 1 5 S 6 B t u o l l u P 7 1 6 S 7 B 6 B t e S e t a l P e d i u G 3 1 7 S 7 B t i x E 6 1 8 S 5 I t e S r e p a P 9 1 9 S 5 I 1 h t d i W r e p a P 3 0 1 S 5 I 2 h t d i W r e p a P 2 1 1 S 6 I 3 h t d i W r e p a P 1 2 1 S 6 I 1 h t g n e L r e p a P 6 3 1 S 6 I 2 h t g n e L r e p a P 5 4 1 S 7 I 3 h t g n e L r e p a P 4 5 1 S B C P 7 E 2 E n i a M 4 1 1 B C P F M W 2 0 0 V ...

Page 1117: ...S 4 B d n E r a e N 7 6 S 4 B 1 t h g i e H r e p a P 8 7 S 5 B 2 t h g i e H r e p a P 9 8 S 5 B 3 t h g i e H r e p a P 0 1 9 S s e h c t i w S 3 G r e v o C y a r T 5 1 1 W S 2 G t f i L 4 1 3 W S 3 G r e v o C t i n U d e e F 5 4 W S 6 G n w o D 6 1 5 W S s d i o n e l o S 5 G p u k c i P 4 1 L O S s B C P 6 D 1 D e c a f r e t n I T C L 1 1 1 B C P F M W 2 0 0 V 3 7 4 B 1 5 0 1 7 1 2 3 6 7 8 ...

Page 1118: ...or Safety Switch E6 SW3 43 Emergency Stop Switch I4 PCB PCB 3 Main Board Symbol Index No Description P to P Sensor S1 11 Entrance Sensor A1 S2 41 Upper Tray Exit Sensor A1 S3 42 Upper Tray Limit Sensor A1 S4 44 Shift Tray Exit Sensor A2 S5 53 Exit Guide Open Sensor A2 S6 54 Shift Paper Height Sensor A2 S7 51 Stapling Paper Height Sensor A2 S9 38 Shift Lower Limit Large Paper Sensor A3 S10 36 Shift...

Page 1119: ......

Page 1120: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for e-STUDIO 4500c

Xerox PHASER 6121MFP Service Manual preview
PHASER 6121MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 532
Xerox Phaser 6120 User Manual preview
Phaser 6120
Brand: Xerox Pages: 174
Xerox Phaser 6115 MFP Repacking Manual preview
Phaser 6115 MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 6115 MFP User Manual preview
Phaser 6115 MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 219
Xerox PHASER 6010 Quick Use Manual preview
PHASER 6010
Brand: Xerox Pages: 5
Xerox Phaser 6140N Product Safety Data Sheet preview
Phaser 6140N
Brand: Xerox Pages: 3
Xerox Phaser 6128 MFP Installation Manual preview
Phaser 6128 MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 6128 MFP Evaluator Manual preview
Phaser 6128 MFP
Brand: Xerox Pages: 16
Xerox Phaser 6125 Specifications preview
Phaser 6125
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 7800 Training preview
Phaser 7800
Brand: Xerox Pages: 9
Xerox Phaser 7800 Quick Manual preview
Phaser 7800
Brand: Xerox Pages: 12
Xerox Phaser 7750 Adding Memory Manual preview
Phaser 7750
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 7750 Setup Manual preview
Phaser 7750
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2
Xerox Phaser 8500 Quick Manual preview
Phaser 8500
Brand: Xerox Pages: 4
Xerox Phaser 8500 Detailed Specifications preview
Phaser 8500
Brand: Xerox Pages: 4
Xerox Phaser 6500 User Manual preview
Phaser 6500
Brand: Xerox Pages: 162
Xerox Phaser 8560 Advanced Features Manual preview
Phaser 8560
Brand: Xerox Pages: 83
Xerox Phaser 5550 Installation Manual preview
Phaser 5550
Brand: Xerox Pages: 2

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands